2003 Toyota 4Runner Owners Manual

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

241

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOURTOYOTAInformation before driving your ToyotaOff–road vehicle precautions 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Break–in period 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel pump shut off system 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation in foreign countries 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three–way catalytic converters 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine exhaust cautions 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facts about engine oil consumption 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Iridium–tipped spark plugs 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake system 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake pad wear limit indicators 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage stowage precautions 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limited–slip differential 254. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Toyota’s identification 254. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft prevention labels 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension and chassis 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of tires 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

242


This vehicle belongs to the ut ility ve-hicle class, which has higher groundclearance and narrower tread in relationto the height of its center of gravity tomake it capable of performing in a widevariety of off–road applications. Specificdesign characteristics give it a highercenter of gravity than ordinary passen-ger cars. This vehicle design featurecauses this type of vehicle to be morelikely to rollover. And, utility vehicleshave a significantly higher rollover ratethan other types of vehicles. An advan-tage of the higher ground clearance isa better view of the road allowing youto anticipate problems. It is not de-signed for cornering at the samespeeds as ordinary passenger cars anymore than low–slung sports cars de-signed to perform satisfactorily underoff–road conditions. Therefore, sharpturns at excessive speeds may causerollover.

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-tions to minimize the risk of seriouspersonal injury or damage to your ve-hicle:

� In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-son is significantly more likely todie than a person wearing a seatbelt. Therefore, the driver and allpassengers should fasten their seatbelts whenever the vehicle is mov-ing.

� Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-vers, if at all possible. Failure tooperate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control or vehiclerollover causing death or seriousinjury.

� Loading cargo on the roof luggagecarrier will make the center of thevehicle gravity higher. Avoid highspeeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,sudden braking or abrupt maneu-vers, otherwise it may result in lossof control or vehicle rollover due tofailure to operate this vehicle cor-rectly.

Off–road vehicle precautions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

243


� Always slow down in gusty cross-winds. Because of its profile andhigher center of gravity, your ve-hicle is more sensitive to sidewinds than an ordinary passengercar. Slowing down will allow you tohave better control.

� When driving off–road or in ruggedterrain, do not drive at excessivespeeds, jump, make sharp turns,strike objects, etc. This may causeloss of control or vehicle rollovercausing death or serious injury. Youare also risking expensive damageto your vehicle’s suspension andchassis.

� Do not drive horizontally acrosssteep slopes. Driving straight up orstraight down is preferred. Your ve-hicle (or any similar off–road ve-hicle) can tip over sideways muchmore easily than forward or back-ward.

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak–in. But following a few simple tipsfor the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can addto the future economy and long life ofyour vehicle:

� Avoid full throttle acceleration whenstarting and driving.

� Avoid racing the engine.

� Try to avoid hard stops during the first300 km (200 miles).

� Do not drive for a long time at anysingle speed, either fast or slow.

� Do not tow a trailer during the first 800km (500 miles).

FUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un-leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mix–ups, yourToyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.The special nozzle on pumps with un-leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas willnot.

At a minimum, the gasoline you useshould meet the specifications of ASTMD4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5–M93in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use ofleaded gasoline will cause the three–way catalytic converter to lose its ef-fectiveness and the emission controlsystem to function improperly. Also,this can increase maintenance costs.

Break–in period Fuel

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

244


OCTANE RATING

Select Octane Rating 87 (ResearchOctane Number 91) or higher. Forimproved vehicle performance, the useof premium unleaded gasoline with anOctane Rating of 91 (Research OctaneNumber 96) or higher is recommended.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octanerating or research octane number lowerthan stated above will cause persistentheavy knocking. If it is severe, this willlead to engine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even whenusing the recommended fuel, or if youhear steady knocking while holding asteady speed on level roads, consult yourToyota dealer.

However, occasionally, you may noticelight knocking for a short time while accel-erating or driving up hills. This is normaland there is no need for concern.

GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENTADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasolinethat contains detergent additives toavoid build–up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.contains detergent additives to keep cleanand/or clean intake systems.

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,Europe and Japan have developed aspecification for quality fuel namedWorld–Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) thatis expected to be applied world wide.The WWFC consists of three categoriesthat depend on required emission lev-els. In the U.S., category 3 has beenadopted. The WWFC improves air quali-ty by providing for better emissions invehicle fleets, and customer satisfactionthrough better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-formulated gasoline that contains oxy-genates such as ethanol or MTBE isavailable in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleanerburning gasoline and appropriately blendedreformulated gasoline. These types of gas-oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-prove air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenateblended gasoline where the oxygenatecontent is up to 10% ethanol or 15%MTBE. If you use gasohol in yourToyota, be sure that it has an octanerating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline containing methanol.

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en-hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-taining MMT is used, your emission con-trol system may be adversely affected.The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-strument cluster may come on. If this hap-pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-vice.

GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experiencedriveability problems caused by the partic-ular gasoline that you are using. If youcontinue to have unacceptable driveability,try changing gasoline brands. If this doesnot rectify your problem, then consult yourToyota dealer.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

245


NOTICE

� Do not use gasohol other thanstated above. It will cause fuel sys-tem damage or vehicle performanceproblems.

� If driveab ility problems occur ( poorhot starting, vaporizing, engineknock, etc.), discontinue the use.

� Take care not to spill gasohol dur-ing refueling. Gasohol may causepaint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

87 L (23.0 gal., 19.1 Imp. gal.)

The fuel pump shut off system stops sup-plying fuel to the engine to minimize therisk of fuel leakage when the engine stallsor an airbag inflates upon collision. Torestart the engine after the fuel pump shutoff system activates, turn the ignitionswitch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and startit.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehiclebefore restarting the engine. If youfind that liquid has leaked onto theground, it is the fuel system hasbeen damaged and it is in need ofrepair. In this case, do not restart theengine.

If you plan to drive your Toyota inanother country...

First, comply with the vehicle registrationlaws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor-rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octanenumber).

Fuel pump shut off system Operation in foreign countries

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

246


1GR–FE engine

2UZ–FE engine

The three–way catalytic converter is anemission control device installed in theexhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in theexhaust gas.

CAUTION

� Keep people and combustible mate-rials away from the exhaust pipewhile the engine is running. Theexhaust gas is very hot.

� Do not idle or park your vehicleover anything that might burn easi-ly such as grass, leaves, paper orrags.

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gasesflowing into the three–way catalyticconverter may cause it to overheatand create a fire hazard. To preventthis and other damage, observe thefollowing precautions:

� Use only unleaded gasoline.

� Do not drive with an extremely lowfuel level; running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, creat-ing an excessive load on the three–way catalytic converter.

� Do not allow the engine to run atidle speed for more than 20 min-utes.

� Avoid racing the engine.

� Do not push–start or pull–start yourvehicle.

� Do not turn off the ignition whilethe vehicle is moving.

Three–way catalytic converters

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

247


� Keep your engine in good runningorder. Malfunctions in the engineelectrical system, electronic ignitionsystem/distributor ignition systemor fuel systems could cause an ex-tremely high three–way catalyticconverter temperature.

� If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, take yourvehicle in for a check–up as soonas possible. Remember, your Toyotadealer knows your vehicle and itsthree–way catalytic converter sys-tem best.

� To ensure that the three–way cata-lytic converter and the entire emis-sion control system operate proper-ly, your vehicle must receive theperiodic inspections required by theToyota Maintenance Schedule. Forscheduled maintenance information,refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.

CAUTION

� Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.It contains carbon monoxide, whichis a colorless and odorless gas. Itcan cause unconsciousness or evendeath.

� Make sure the exhaust system hasno holes or loose connections. Thesystem should be checked fromtime to time. If you hit something,or notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust, have the systemchecked immediately.

� Do not run the engine in a garageor enclosed area except for thetime needed to drive the vehicle inor out. The exhaust gases cannotescape, making this a particularlydangerous situation.

� Do not remain for a long time in aparked vehicle with the engine run-ning. If it is unavoidable, however,do so only in an unconfined areaand adjust the heating or coolingsystem to force outside air into thevehicle.

� Keep the back door and back win-dow closed while driving. An openor unsealed back door and backwindow, may cause exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle.

� To allow proper operation of yourvehicle’s ventilation system, keepthe inlet grilles in front of the wind-shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-er obstructions.

� If you smell exhaust fumes in thevehicle, drive with the windowsopen and the back door and backwindow closed. Have the cause im-mediately located and corrected.

Engine exhaust cautions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

248


FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions oflubricating and cooling the inside of theengine, and plays a major role in main-taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con-sume some engine oil during normalengine operation. The causes of oilconsumption in a normal engine are asfollows.

� Oil is used to lubricate pistons, pistonrings and cylinders. A thin film of oilis left on the cylinder wall when a pis-ton moves downwards in the cylinder.High negative pressure generated whenthe vehicle is decelerating sucks someof this oil into the combustion chamber.This oil as well as some part of the oilfilm left on the cylinder wall is burnedby the high temperature combustiongases during the combustion process.

� Oil is also used to lubricate the stemsof the intake valves. Some of this oilis sucked into the combustion chambertogether with the intake air and isburned along with the fuel. High tem-perature exhaust gases also burn theoil used to lubricate the exhaust valvestems.

The amount of engine oil consumed de-pends on the viscosity of the oil, thequality of the oil and the conditions thevehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by high–speed driv-ing and frequent acceleration and decel-eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, sinceits pistons, piston rings and cylinder wallshave not become conditioned.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp. qt./600miles)

When judging the amount of oil con-sumption, note that the oil may becomediluted and make it difficult to judgethe true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used forrepeated short trips, and consumes a nor-mal amount of oil, the dipstick may notshow any drop in the oil level at all, evenafter 1000 km (600 miles) or more. Thisis because the oil is gradually becomingdiluted with fuel or moisture, making itappear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate outwhen the vehicle is then driven at highspeeds, as on an expressway, making itappear that oil is excessively consumedafter driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVELCHECK

One of the most important points in prop-er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-gine oil at the optimum level so that oilfunction will not be impaired. Therefore, itis essential that the oil level be checkedregularly. Toyota recommends that the oillevel be checked every time you refuelthe vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularlycould lead to serious engine troubledue to insufficient oil.

Facts about engine oilconsumption

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

249


For detailed information on oil level check,see “Checking the engine oil level” onpage 324 in Section 7–2.

Your engine is fitted with iridium–tippedspark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium–tipped spark plugsand do not adjust gaps for your en-gine performance and smooth drive-ability.

This brake system has 2 independent hy-draulic circuits. If either circuit should fail,the other will still work. However, the ped-al will be harder to press, and your stop-ping distance will increase. Also, thebrake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only asingle brake system. Have yourbrakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE BOOSTER

The brake booster uses brake fluid pres-surized by the pump to power–assist thebrakes. If the brake booster fails duringdriving, the brake system warning lightcomes on and buzzer sounds continuous-ly. In this case, the brakes may not workproperly. If they do not work well, depressthe brake pedal firmly. If the brake systemwarning light comes on, immediately stopyour vehicle and contact your Toyota deal-er.

It is not a malfunction that the brake sys-tem warning light may stay on for 60 sec-onds after the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position.

Iridium–tipped spark plugs(2UZ–FE engine) Brake system

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

250


Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the brake system warninglight and buzzer. It is normal if the lightturns off and the buzzer stops soundingafter a few seconds.

You may hear a small sound in the enginecompartment after the engine is started orthe brake pedal is depressed repeatedly.This is a pump pulsating sound of thebrake system, and it is not a malfunction.

CAUTION

� Do not pump the brake pedal if theengine stalls. Each push on thepedal uses up your brake fluidpressure reserve.

� Even if the power assist is com-pletely lost, the brakes will stillwork. But you will have to push thepedal hard, much harder than nor-mal. And your braking distance willincrease.

ANTI–LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (with “ABS” warning light)

The anti–lock brake system is designedto help prevent lock–up of the wheelsduring a sudden braking or braking onslippery road surfaces. This assists inproviding directional stability and steer-ing performance of the vehicle underthese circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brakepedal: When the anti–lock brake systemfunction is in action, you may feel thebrake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.In this situation, to let the anti–lockbrake system work for you, just hold thebrake pedal down more firmly. Do notpump the brake in a panic stop. Thiswill result in reduced braking performan-ce.

The anti–lock brake system becomes op-erative after the vehicle has acceleratedto a speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slipperyroad surfaces such as on a manhole cov-er, a steel plate at a construction site,joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy daytends to activate the anti–lock brake sys-tem.

You may hear a click or motor sound inthe engine compartment for a few secondswhen the engine is started or just afterthe vehicle begins to move. This meansthat the anti–lock brake system is in theself–check mode, and does not indicate amalfunction.

When the anti–lock brake system is ac-tivated, the following conditions mayoccur. They do not indicate a malfunc-tion of the system:

� You may hear the anti–lock brake sys-tem operating and feel the brake pedalpulsating and the vibrations of the ve-hicle body and steering wheel. Youmay also hear the motor sound in theengine compartment even after the ve-hicle is stopped.

� At the end of the anti–lock brake sys-tem activation, the brake pedal maymove a little forward.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

251


CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti–lockbrake system: Although the anti–lockbrake system assists in providing ve-hicle control, it is still important todrive with all due care and maintaina moderate speed and safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you, be-cause there are limits to the vehiclestability and effectiveness of steeringwheel operation even with the anti–lock brake system on.

If tire grip performance exceeds itscapability, or if hydroplaning occursduring high speed driving in the rain,the anti–lock brake system does notprovide vehicle control.

Anti–lock brake system is not de-signed to shorten the stopping dis-tance: Always drive at a moderatespeed and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you.Compared with vehicles without ananti–lock brake system, your vehiclemay require a longer stopping dis-tance in the following cases:

� Driving on rough, gravel or snow–covered roads.

� Driving with tire chains installed.

� Driving over the steps such as thejoints on the road.

� Driving on roads where the roadsurface is pitted or has other differ-ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size atappropriate pressure: The anti–lockbrake system detects vehicle speedsusing the speed sensors for respec-tive wheels’ turning speeds. The useof tires other than specified may failto detect the accurate turning speedresulting in a longer stopping dis-tance.

Type A

Type B

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

252


“ABS” warning light

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti–lock brake system and the brake assistsystem work properly, the light turns offafter a few seconds. Thereafter, if eitherof the systems malfunctions, the lightcomes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), thefollowing systems do not operate, but thebrake system still operates conventionally.

� Anti–lock brake system

� Traction control system (two–wheel drive models)

� Active traction control system (four–wheel drive models)

� Vehicle stability control system

� Downhill assist control system (four–wheel drive models)

� Hill–start assist control system

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti–lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels will lock up during asudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.

“VSC TRAC” warning light may come onwith the “ABS” warning light (brake assistsystem warning light) when there is a mal-function somewhere in the anti–lock brakesystem (brake assist system).

If either of the following conditions oc-curs, this indicates a malfunction some-where in the components monitored bythe warning light system. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or remains on.

� The light comes on while you are dri-ving.

A warning light turning on briefly duringoperation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the brake system warn-ing light, immediately stop your ve-hicle at a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti–lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.

Either of the following conditions mayoccur, but do not indicate a malfunc-tion:

� The light may stay on for about 60seconds after the ignition key is turnedto the “ON” position. It is normal if itturns off after a while.

� Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the light. It is normal if itturns off after a few seconds.

DRUM–IN–DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKESYSTEM

Your vehicle has a drum–in–disc typeparking brake system. This type of brakesystem needs bedding–down of the brakeshoes periodically or whenever the parkingbrake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

253


Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed-ding–down.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM

When you slam the brakes on, thebrake assist system judges as an emer-gency stop and provides more powerfulbraking for a driver who cannot holddown the brake pedal firmly.

When you slam the brakes on, more pow-erful braking will be applied. At this time,you may hear a sound in the enginecompartment and feel the vibrations of thebrake pedal. This does not indicate a mal-function.

The brake assist system becomes opera-tive after the vehicle has accelerated toa speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

For an explanation of this system’s warn-ing light, see “Service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers” on page 117 in Sec-tion 1–5.

The brake pad wear limit indicators onyour disc brakes give a warning noisewhen the brake pads are worn to wherereplacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noisewhile driving, have the brake padschecked and replaced by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-tor damage can result if the pads are notreplaced when necessary.

When stowing luggage or cargo in thevehicle, observe the following:

� Put luggage or cargo in the luggagecompartment when at all possible. Besure all items are secured in place.

� Be careful to keep the vehicle bal-anced. Locating the weight as far for-ward as possible helps maintain bal-ance.

� For better fuel economy, do not carryunneeded weight.

CAUTION

� To prevent luggage or packagesfrom sliding forward during braking,do not stack anything in the lug-gage compartment higher than theseatbacks. Keep luggage or pack-ages low, as close to the floor aspossible.

� Do not exceed 66 kg (145 lb.) ofcargo load in the luggage compart-ment.

� Do not place anything on the flat-tened seat or it may slide forwardduring braking.

Brake pad wear limitindicators Luggage stowage pr ecautions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

254


� Never allow anyone to ride in theluggage compartment. It is not de-signed for passengers. They shouldride in their seats with their seatbelts properly fastened. Otherwise,they are much more likely to sufferserious bodily injury, in the eventof sudden braking or a co llision.

� Do not place anything on the lug-gage cover. Such items may bethrown about and possibly injurepeople in the vehicle during suddenbraking or an accident. Secure allitems in a safe place.

� Do not drive with objects left ontop of the instrument panel. Theymay interfere with the driver’s fieldof view. Or they may move duringsharp vehicle acceleration or turn-ing, and impair the driver’s controlof the vehicle. In an accident theymay injure the vehicle occupants.

NOTICE

Do not load the vehicle beyond thecargo load specified on page 352 inSection 8.

Your Toyota is equipped with a limited–slipcenter differential (transfer). If one wheelbegins to spin, the limited–slip center dif-ferential (transfer) is designed to aid trac-tion by automatically transmitting drivingforce to the wheels on the other driveaxle. It transmits driving force to the frontwheels if a rear wheel spins, and to therear wheels if a front wheel spins.

CAUTION

Do not start or run the engine whileyour vehicle is supported by a jack.The vehicle could be driven off thejack and could pose a danger or re-sult in serious injury.

NOTICE

Use only a spare tire of the samebrand, size, construction and load ca-pacity as the original tires on yourToyota because damage to the limit-ed–slip differential could possibly oc-cur with another tire type.

The vehicle identification number (VIN)is the legal identifier for your vehicle.This number is on the left top of theinstrument panel, and can be seenthrough the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification numberfor your Toyota. It is used in registeringthe ownership of your vehicle.

Limited–slip differential(four–wheel drive models)

Your Toyota’s identification——Vehicle identification number

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

255


The vehicle identification number (VIN) isalso on the Certification Label.

1GR–FE engine

2UZ–FE engine

The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown.

—Engine number

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

256


Your new vehicle carries theft preven-tion labels which are approximately 56mm (2.20 in.) by 16 mm (0.63 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reducethe incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-ing the tracing and recovery of parts fromstolen vehicles. The label is designed sothat once it is applied to a surface, anyattempt to remove it will result in destroy-ing the integrity of the label. Transferringthese labels intact from one part to anoth-er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove thetheft prevention labels as it may vio-late certain state or federal laws.

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassiswith lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. Itcan cause dangerous handling charac-teristics resulting in loss of control.

Determine what kind of tires your ve-hicle is originally equipped with.

1. Summer tires

Summer tires are high–speed capabilitytires best suited to highway driving underdry conditions.

Since summer tires do not have the sametraction performance as snow tires, sum-mer tires are inadequate for driving onsnow–covered or icy roads. For driving onsnow–covered or icy roads, we recom-mend using snow tires. If installing snowtires, be sure to replace all four tires.

2. All season tires

All season tires are designed to providebetter traction in snow and to be adequatefor driving in most winter conditions, aswell as for use all year round.

All season tires, however, do not haveadequate traction performance comparedwith snow tires in heavy or loose snow.Also, all season tires fall short in accel-eration and handling performancecompared with summer tires in highwaydriving.

Theft prevention labels(except for Canada) Suspension and chassis Types of tires

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

257


CAUTION

� Do not mix summer and all seasontires on your vehicle as this cancause dangerous handling charac-teristics, resulting in loss of con-trol.

� Do not use tire other than themanufacturer’s designated tires, andnever mix tires or wheels of thesizes different from the originals.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

258


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

259


STARTING AND DRIVINGStarting and drivingBefore starting the engine 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start the engine 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for driving in various conditions 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off–road driving precautions 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving tips 264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dinghy towing 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer towing 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 275. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

260


1. Check the area around the vehicle be-fore entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,seat cushion angle, head restraintheight and steering wheel angle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear viewmirrors.

4. Lock all doors.

5. Fasten seat belts.

Once you turn the ignition key to “START”position and release it, the cranking holdfunction continues to crank the engine in“ON” position until it starts.

The function stops cranking the engineafter about 25 seconds maximum if theengine has not started yet. When youcrank the engine again, wait a few sec-onds and restart it.

If you hold the key in “START” position,the function will keep cranking for about30 seconds maximum.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-sories.

3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If youneed to restart the engine while thevehicle is moving, put the selector le-ver in “N”. A starter safety device willprevent the starter from operating if theselector lever is in any drive position.

4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it tothe floor until driving off.

Before starting the engineHow to start the engine——Cranking hold function (a) Before cranking

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

261


Before starting the engine, be sure to fol-low the instructions in “(a) Before crank-ing”.

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequen-tial multiport fuel injection system in yourengine automatically controls the properair–fuel mixture for starting. You can starta cold or hot engine as follows:

1. With your foot off the accelerator ped-al, turn the ignition key to “START”position, then release it.

2. After the engine runs for about 10 se-conds, you are ready to drive.

If the weather is below freezing, let theengine warm up for a few minutes beforedriving.

If the engine stalls...

Simply restart it, using the correct proce-dure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start...

See “If your vehicle will not start” on page278 in Section 4.

NOTICE

� Do not race a cold engine.

� If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, have theengine checked immediately.

� Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.This will allow you much better control.

� Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-sible, at a right angle. Avoid drivingonto high, sharp–edged objects andother road hazards. Failure to do socan lead to severe tire damage suchas a tire burst.

Drive slowly when passing over bumpsor travelling on a bumpy road. Other-wise, the impact could cause severedamage to the tires and/or wheels.

� When parking on a hill, turn the frontwheels until they touch the curb sothat the vehicle will not roll. Apply theparking brake, and place the transmis-sion in “P”. If necessary, block thewheels.

� Washing your vehicle or driving throughdeep water may get the brakes wet. Tosee whether they are wet, check thatthere is no traffic near you, and thenpress the pedal lightly. If you do notfeel a normal braking force, the brakesare probably wet. To dry them, drivethe vehicle cautiously while lightlypressing the brake pedal with the park-ing brake applied. If they still do notwork safely, pull to the side of the roadand call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

(b) Starting the engineTips for driving in variousconditions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

262


� Vehicles with rear height control airsuspension: When you drive on abumpy road, it is recommended thatthe vehicle height should be set in the“N” (normal) or “H” (high) mode.

CAUTION

� Before driving off, make sure thatthe parking brake is fully releasedand the parking brake reminderlight is off.

� Do not leave your vehicle unat-tended while the engine is running.

� Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. It can causedangerous overheating, needlesswear, and poor fuel economy.

� To drive down a long or steep hill,reduce your speed and downshift.Remember, if you ride the brakesexcessively, they may overheat andnot work properly.

� Be careful when accelerating, up-shifting, downshifting or braking ona slippery surface. Sudden accelera-tion or engine braking, could causethe vehicle to spin or skid.

� Do not drive in excess of the speedlimit. Even if the legal speed limitpermits it, do not drive over 140km/h (85 mph) unless your vehiclehas high–speed capability tires.Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) mayresult in tire failure, loss of controland possible injury. Be sure to con-sult a tire dealer to determinewhether the tires on your vehicleare high–speed capability tires ornot before driving at such speeds.

� Do not continue normal drivingwhen the brakes are wet. If they arewet, your vehicle will require alonger stopping distance, and itmay pull to one side when thebrakes are applied. Also, the park-ing brake will not hold the vehiclesecurely.

� Vehicles with rear height control airsuspension: If you drive throughdeep water over about 500 mm (20in.) in depth, put the vehicle heightin the “H” (high) mode with theheight select switch and then turnoff the rear height control air sus-pension by pushing the “HEIGHTCONTROL OFF” switch. Drive yourvehicle at 30 km/h (19 mph) or low-er speed.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

263


When driving your vehicle off–road, pleaseobserve the following precautions to en-sure your driving enjoyment and to helpprevent the closure of areas to off–roadvehicles.

a. Drive your vehicle only in areas whereoff–road vehicles are permitted to trav-el.

b. Respect private property. Get owner’spermission before entering private prop-erty.

c. Do not enter areas that are closed.Honor gates, barriers and signs that re-strict travel.

d. Stay on established roads. When condi-tions are wet, driving techniques shouldbe changed or travel delayed to pre-vent damage to roads.

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii andPuerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertainingto driving your vehicle off–road, consultthe following organizations.

� State and Local Parks and RecreationDepartments

� State Motor Vehicle Bureau

� Recreational Vehicle Clubs

� U.S. Forest Service and Bureau ofLand Management

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-tions to minimize the risk of seriouspersonal injury or damage to your ve-hicle:

� Drive carefully when off the road.Do not take unnecessary risks bydriving in dangerous places.

� Do not grip the steering wheelspokes when driving off–road. Abad bump could jerk the wheel andinjure your hands. Keep both handsand especially your thumbs on theoutside of the rim.

� Always check your brakes for effec-tiveness immediately after driving insand, mud, water or snow.

� After driving through tall grass,mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., checkthat there is no grass, bush, paper,rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering ortrapped on the underbody. Clear offany such matter from the under-body. If the vehicle is used withthese materials trapped or adheringto the underbody, a breakdown orfire could occur.

� In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-son is significantly more likely todie than a person wearing a seatbelt. Therefore, the driver and allpassengers should fasten their seatbelts whenever the vehicle is mov-ing.

� When driving off–road or in ruggedterrain, do not drive at excessivespeeds, jump, make sharp turns,strike objects, etc. This may causeloss of control or vehicle rollovercausing death or serious injury. Youare also risking expensive damageto your vehicle’s suspension andchassis.

Off–road driving precautions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

264


NOTICE

� If driving through water, such aswhen crossing shallow streams,first check the depth of the waterand the bottom of the river bed forfirmness. Drive slowly and avoiddeep water.

� Take all necessary safety measuresto ensure that water damage to theengine or other components doesnot occur.

Water entering the engine air intakewill cause severe engine damage.

Water can wash the grease fromwheel bearings, causing rusting andpremature failure, and may also en-ter the differentials, transmissionand transfer case, reducing the gearoil’s lubricating qualities.

� Sand and mud that has accumulatedin brake drums and around brakediscs may affect braking efficiencyand may damage brake system com-ponents.

� Always perform a maintenance in-spection after each day of off–roaddriving that has taken you throughrough terrain, sand, mud, or water.For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, refer to the “Scheduled Main-tenance Guide” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement”.

Make sure your coolant is properly pro-tected against freezing.

Your coolant must contain ethylene–glycoltype coolant for a proper corrosion protec-tion of aluminum components. Use “ToyotaGenuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent.

See page 326 in Section 7–2 for detailsabout coolant type selection.

NOTICE

Do not use alcohol type antifreeze orplain water alone.

When it is extremely cold, we recommendto use 60% solution for your Toyota, toprovide protection down to about –50�C(–58�F). Do not use more than 70% solu-tion for better coolant performance.

Check the condition of the battery andcables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity ofany battery, so it must be in top shapeto provide enough power for winter start-ing. Section 7–3 tells you how to visuallyinspect the battery. Your Toyota dealerand most service stations will be pleasedto check the level of charge.

Winter driving tips

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

265


Make sure the engine oil viscosity issuitable for the cold weather.

See page 324 in Section 7–2 for recom-mended viscosity. Leaving a heavy sum-mer oil in your vehicle during wintermonths may cause harder starting. If youare not sure about which oil to use, callyour Toyota dealer—he will be pleased tohelp.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de–icer or glycerine into thelocks to keep them from freezing.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti-freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyotadealer and most auto parts stores. Followthe manufacturer’s directions for howmuch to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake whenthere is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into“P” and block the front wheels. Do notuse the parking brake, or snow or wateraccumulated in and around the parkingbrake mechanism may freeze, making ithard to release.

Keep ice and snow from accumulatingunder the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenderscan make steering difficult. During badwinter driving, stop and check under thefenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving,we recommend you carry some emer-gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in thevehicle are tire chains, window scraper,bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,jumper cables, etc.

Your vehicle is not designed to bedinghy towed (with four wheels on theground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with fourwheels on the ground. This maycause serious damage to your vehicle.

Dinghy towing

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

266


Your vehicle is designed primarily as apassenger–and–load–carrying vehicle. Tow-ing a trailer will have an adverse effect onhandling, performance, braking, durabilityand driving economy (fuel consumption,etc.). Your safety and satisfaction dependon the proper use of correct equipmentand cautious driving habits. For your safe-ty and the safety of others, you must notoverload your vehicle or trailer. Ask yourlocal Toyota dealer for further details be-fore towing.

CAUTION

Vehicles with rear height control airsuspension: When disconnecting atrailer, put the vehicle height in the“LO” (low) mode and push the“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch toturn off the rear height control airsuspension. Otherwise, the vehicleheight may be changed in the auto-matic leveling function, resulting inaccident. For details see “Rear heightcontrol air suspension” on page 158in Section 1–6.

WEIGHT LIMITS

Before towing, make sure the total trail-er weight, gross combination weight,gross vehicle weight, gross axle weightand trailer tongue load are all withinthe limits.

The total trailer weight and tongue loadcan be measured with platform scalesfound at a highway weighing station, build-ing supply company, trucking company,junk yard, etc.

For weight carrying hitch

Also for weight distributing hitch

Trailer towing

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

267


CAUTION

� The maximum gross trailer weight(trailer weight plus cargo weight)must never exceed the following forvehicle with equipped. For details,contact your Toyota dealer.

� According to the hitch receivertype, the maximum gross trailerweight and hitch that can be useddiffers. Refer to the above illustra-tions to confirm the hitch receivertype for your vehicle.

For weight carrying hitch2268 kg (5000 lb.)

Also for weight distributing hitch1GR–FE engine

Two–wheel drive models3039 kg (6700 lb.)

Four–wheel drive models2903 kg (6400 lb.)

2UZ–FE engineTwo–wheel drive models

3311 kg (7300 lb.)Four–wheel drive models

3175 kg (7000 lb.)

If towing a trailer and cargo weigh-ing over 2268 kg (5000 lb.), Toyotarecommends to use a weight dis-tributing hitch.

If towing a trailer and cargo weigh-ing over 907 kg (2000 lb.), it isnecessary to use a sway controldevice with sufficient capacity. Thecombination of the gross trailerweight added to the total weight ofthe vehicle, occupants and vehiclecargo must never exceed a total ofthe following.

For weight carrying hitch1GR–FE engine

4354 kg (9600 lb.)2UZ–FE engine

4422 kg (9750 lb.)Also for weight distributing hitch

1GR–FE engine5034 kg (11100 lb.)

2UZ–FE engine5443 kg (12000 lb.)

Exceeding the maximum weight ofthe trailer, the vehicle, or the ve-hicle and trailer combination, cancause an accident resulting in seri-ous personal injuries.

� Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-ent weight capacities established bythe hitch manufacturer. Even thoughthe vehicle may be physically capa-ble of towing a higher weight, theoperator must determine the maxi-mum weight rating of the particularhitch assembly and never exceedthe maximum weight rating speci-fied for the trailer–hitch. Exceedingthe maximum weight rating set bythe trailer hitch manufacturer cancause an accident resulting in seri-ous personal injuries.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

268


� The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) indicated on theCertification Label. The gross vehi-cle weight is the sum of weights ofthe unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch and trailertongue load. It also includes theweight of any special equipmentinstalled on your vehicle.

� The load on either the front or rearaxle resulting from distribution ofthe gross vehicle weight on bothaxles must not exceed the front andrear Gross Axle Weight Ratings(GAWR) listed on the CertificationLabel.

Total trailer weight Tongue load

Tongue load

Total trailer weight� 100 = 10%

� The trailer cargo load should bedistributed so that the tongue loadis 10% of the total trailer weight,not exceeding the maximum load ofthe following.

For weight carrying hitch227 kg (500 lb.)

Also for weight distributing hitch1GR–FE engine

Two–wheel drive models303 kg (670 lb.)

Four–wheel drive models290 kg (640 lb.)

2UZ–FE engineTwo–wheel drive models

331 kg (730 lb.)Four–wheel drive models

317 kg (700 lb.)

Never load the trailer with moreweight in the back than in thefront. About 60% of the trailer loadshould be in the front half of thetrailer and the remaining 40% in therear.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

269


HITCHES

� If you wish to install a trailer hitch, youshould consult with your Toyota dealer.

� Use only a hitch recommended by thehitch manufacturer and the one whichconforms to the total trailer weight re-quirement.

� According to the hitch receiver type,the maximum gross trailer weight andhitch that can be used differs. Refer tothe above illustrations to confirm thehitch receiver type for your vehicle.

� If you wish to install an aftermarkethitch, the hitch must be bolted securelyto the vehicle frame and installed ac-cording to the hitch manufactures’ in-structions.

� The hitch ball and king pin should havea light coat of grease.

� Toyota recommends the ball mount as-sembly be removed when not towing toprevent injury and to prevent damagein the event of a rear end collision.After removing the ball mount assem-bly, install the grommet to the hitch toprevent entry of dirt and mud.

NOTICE

� Do not install weight distributinghitch to weight carrying hitch re-ceiver because it will be damagedyour vehicle.

� Do not use axle–mounted hitches asthey can cause damage to the axlehousing, wheel bearings, wheels ortires. Also, never install a hitchwhich may interfere with the normalfunction of an Energy AbsorbingBumper, if so equipped.

1 Trailer ball load rating2 Ball diameter3 Shank length 4 Shank diameter

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

270


TRAILER BALL

Follow these easy steps to properly deter-mine the correct trailer ball for your ap-plication:

1. Determine the correct trailer ball sizefor the trailer coupler. Most couplersare stamped with the required trailerball size. The sizes you will most likelyfind stamped on the coupler are:

Trailer class Typical trailer ball size

III and IV 2 5/16 in.

II 2 in.

I 1 7/8 in.

2. Select the appropriate trailer ball tomatch or exceed the gross trailerweight rating of the trailer. The trailerball load rating should be printed onthe top of the ball.

3. When mounted in the ball mount, thethreaded ball shank must protrude be-yond the bottom of the lock washerand nut at least 2 threads. The trailerball shank must be matched to the ballmount hole diameter size.

NOTICE

Only use a ball mount attachmentspecified for the Toyota 4runner.

1 Coupler 2 Trailer ball3 Ball mount attachment

MATCHING TRAILER BALL HEIGHT TOTRAILER COUPLER HEIGHT

No matter which class of tow hitch ap-plies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailerball setup on must be the proper heightfor the coupler on the trailer.

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

� Toyota recommends trailers withbrakes that conform to any applica-ble federal and state/provincial regu-lations.

� A safety chain must always be usedbetween the towing vehicle and thetrailer. Leave sufficient slack in thechain for turns. The chain shouldcross under the trailer tongue toprevent the tongue from dropping tothe ground in case it becomes dam-aged or separated. For correct safetychain procedures, follow the hitch ortrailer manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

271


CAUTION

� If the total trailer weight exceeds453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes arerequired .

� Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-draulic system as it would lower itsbraking effectiveness .

� Never tow a trailer without using asafety chain securely attached toboth the trailer and the vehicle. Ifdamage occurs to the coupling unitor hitch ball, there is danger of thetrailer wandering over into anotherlane.

SERVICE CONNECTOR FOR TOWINGBRAKE CONTROLLER

Your vehicle is equipped with a serviceconnector for the towing brake controlleras shown. Link the connector to the tow-ing brake controller via the sub wire har-ness stored in the glove box. The detailedexplanation of the sub wire harness circuitis packed together with the sub wire har-ness.

Be sure to position the towing brake con-troller where it does not prevent the driverfrom operating the pedal.

Toyota recommends that the sub wire har-ness be stored in the glove box when itis not in use.

TIRES

� Ensure that your vehicle’s tires areproperly inflated. See page 332 in Sec-tion 7–2 and page 356 in Section 8 forinstructions.

� The trailer tires should be inflated tothe pressure recommended by the trail-er manufacturer in respect to the totaltrailer weight.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

272


TOWING CONNECTOR FOR TRAILERLIGHTS

� Your vehicle is equipped with a wireharness stored in the rear end underbody. Some models are fitted with asocket for trailer lights under the rearbumper. Use either of them to connectand operate the trailer lights. However,the trailer lights must comply with fed-eral, state/provincial and local regula-tions. See your local recreational ve-hicle dealer or rental agency for thecorrect type of wiring and relays foryour trailer. Check for correct operationof the turn signals and stop lights eachtime you hitch up. Direct splicing maydamage your vehicle’s electrical systemand cause a malfunction of your lights.

The towing connector can be also con-nected to the trailer brake and trailersub battery.

BREAK–IN SCHEDULE

� Toyota recommends that you do nottow a trailer with a new vehicle or avehicle with any new power train com-ponent (engine, transmission, differen-tial, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE

� If you tow a trailer, your vehicle willrequire more frequent maintenance dueto the additional load. For this informa-tion, please refer to the scheduledmaintenance information in the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’sManual Supplement”.

� Retighten all fixing bolts of the towingball and bracket after approximately1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

CONNECTING A TRAILER (models withrear height control air suspension)

Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line andperform the following:

1. Put the rear height control air suspen-sion in the “LO” (low) mode. Turn theignition switch off or push the “HEIGHTCONTROL OFF” switch to turn off therear height control air suspension.

2. Connect a trailer.

3. Turn the ignition switch on or push the“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch toturn on the rear height control air sus-pension. Select the “N” (normal) modewith the height select switch.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

273


DISCONNECTING A TRAILER (modelswith rear height control air suspension)

Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line andperform the following:

1. Put the rear height control air suspen-sion in the “LO” (low) mode. (Makesure the vehicle height is in the “LO”(low) mode by pushing the height se-lect switch on the “�” side.)

2. Turn the ignition switch off or push the“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch toturn off the rear height control air sus-pension.

3. Set the supporting leg of a trailer onthe ground and raise the hitch by 100mm (4 in.).

4. Turn the ignition switch on or push the“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch toturn on the rear height control air sus-pension.

5. Wait for about 20 seconds until therear vehicle height is lowered by theautomatic leveling function.

6. Make sure the hitch is disconnected. Ifnot, raise the hitch higher and repeatsteps 2 through 5.

7. Move the vehicle forward in the “LO”(low) mode where the hitch does nottouch anything in the “N” (normal)mode.

8. Put the rear height control air suspen-sion in the “N” (normal) mode.

PRE–TOWING SAFETY CHECK

� Check that your vehicle remains levelwhen a loaded or unloaded trailer ishitched. Do not drive if the vehicle hasan abnormal nose–up or nose–downcondition, and check for impropertongue load, overload, worn suspensionor other possible causes.

� Make sure the trailer cargo is securelyloaded so that it cannot shift.

� Check that your rear view mirrors con-form to any applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If not,install the rear view mirrors requiredfor towing purpose.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS

When towing a trailer, your vehicle willhandle differently than when not tow-ing. The three main causes of vehicle–trailer accidents are driver error, exces-sive speed and improper trailer loading.Keep these in mind when towing:

� Before starting out, check operation ofthe lights and all vehicle–trailer connec-tions. After driving a short distance,stop and recheck the lights and con-nections. Before actually towing a trail-er, practice turning, stopping and back-ing with a trailer in an area away fromtraffic until you learn the feel.

� Backing with a trailer is difficult andrequires practice. Grip the bottom ofthe steering wheel and move your handto the left to move the trailer to theleft. Move your hand to the right tomove the trailer to the right. (This pro-cedure is generally opposite to thatwhen backing without a trailer.) Also,just turn the steering wheel a little ata time, avoiding sharp or prolongedturning. Have someone guide you whenbacking to reduce the risk of an acci-dent.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

274


� Because stopping distance may be in-creased, vehicle–to–vehicle distanceshould be increased when towing atrailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) ofspeed, allow at least one vehicle andtrailer length between you and the ve-hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking asyou may skid, resulting in jackknifingand loss of control. This is especiallytrue on wet or slippery surfaces.

� Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-tion.

� Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.The trailer could hit your vehicle in atight turn. Slow down before making aturn to avoid the necessity of suddenbraking.

� Remember that when making a turn,the trailer wheels will be closer thanthe vehicle wheels to the inside of theturn. Therefore, compensate for this bymaking a larger than normal turningradius with your vehicle.

� Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect handling of your vehicleand trailer, causing sway. Pay attentionto the rear from time to time to pre-pare yourself for being passed by largetrucks or buses, which may cause yourvehicle and trailer to sway. If swayinghappens, firmly grip the steering wheeland reduce speed immediately butgradually. Never increase speed. Steerstraight ahead. If you make no extremecorrection with the steering or brakes,the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

� Be careful when passing other ve-hicles. Passing requires considerabledistance. After passing a vehicle, donot forget the length of your trailer andbe sure you have plenty of room befo-re changing lanes.

� In order to maintain engine braking effi-ciency, do not put the transmission in“D”.

� Because of the added load of the trail-er, your vehicle’s engine may overheaton hot days (at temperatures over30�C [85�F]) when going up a long orsteep grade with a trailer. If the enginecoolant temperature gauge indicatesoverheating, immediately turn off the airconditioning (if in use), pull off the roadand stop in a safe spot. Refer to “Ifyour vehicle overheats” on page 282 inSection 4.

� Always place wheel blocks under boththe vehicle and trailer wheels whenparking. Apply the parking brake firmly.Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid park-ing on a slope with a trailer, but if itcannot be avoided, do so only afterperforming the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,release your brakes slowly until theblocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

275


When restarting out after parking on aslope:

1. With the transmission in “P” position,start the engine. Be sure to keep thebrake pedal depressed.

2. Shift into gear.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal and slowly pull or back awayfrom the wheel blocks. Stop and applyyour brakes.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

� Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) orthe posted towing speed limit,whichever is lower. Because insta-bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle–trailer combination usually in-creases as the speed increases, ex-ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) maycause loss of control.

� Slow down and downshift beforedescending steep or long downhillgrades. Do not make sudden down-shifts.

� Avoid holding the brake pedal downtoo long or too frequently. Thiscould cause the brakes to overheatand result in reduced braking effi-ciency.

Improving fuel economy is easy—just takeit easy. It will help make your vehicle lastlonger, too. Here are some specific tipson how to save money on both fuel andrepairs:

� Keep your tires inflated at the cor-rect pressure. Underinflation causestire wear and wastes fuel. See page332 in Section 7–2 for instructions.

� Do not carry unneeded weight inyour vehicle. Excess weight puts aheavier load on the engine, causinggreater fuel consumption.

� Avoid lengthy warm–up idling. Oncethe engine is running smoothly, begindriving—but gently. Remember, howev-er, that on cold winter days this maytake a little longer.

� Put the selector lever into the “D”when engine braking is not required.

5–speed automatic transmission—Driv-ing with the selector lever in “4” willreduce the fuel economy. (For details,see “Automatic transmission (5–speed)”on page 129 in Section 1–6.)

4–speed automatic transmission—Driv-ing with the selector lever in “3” willreduce the fuel economy. (For details,see “Automatic transmission (4–speed)”on page 134 in Section 1–6.)

How to save fuel and makeyour vehicle last longer

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

276


� Accelerate slowly and smoothly.Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into highgear as quickly as possible.

� Avoid long engine idling. If you havea long wait and you are not in traffic,it is better to turn off the engine andstart again later.

� Avoid engine lugging or over–rev-ving. Use a gear position suitable forthe road on which you are travelling.

� Avoid continuous speeding up andslowing down. Stop–and–go drivingwastes fuel.

� Avoid unnecessary stopping andbraking. Maintain a steady pace. Tryto time the traffic signals so you onlyneed to stop as little as possible ortake advantage of through streets toavoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-den braking. This will also reduce wearon your brakes.

� Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jamswhenever possible.

� Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal. This causes premature wear,overheating and poor fuel economy.

� Maintain a moderate speed on high-ways. The faster you drive, the greaterthe fuel consumption. By reducing yourspeed, you will cut down on fuel con-sumption.

� Keep the front wheels in properalignment. Avoid hitting the curb andslow down on rough roads. Improperalignment not only causes faster tirewear but also puts an extra load onthe engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

� Keep the bottom of your vehicle freefrom mud, etc. This not only lessensweight but also helps prevent corro-sion.

� Keep your vehicle tuned–up and intop shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oiland grease, brakes not adjusted, etc.all lower engine performance and con-tribute to poor fuel economy. For longerlife of all parts and lower operatingcosts, keep all maintenance work onschedule, and if you often drive undersevere conditions, see that your vehiclereceives more frequent maintenance.(For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, please refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manu-al Supplement”.)

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coastdown hills. Your power steering andbrake booster will not function with-out the engine running. Also, theemission control system operatesproperly only when the engine is run-ning.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

277


IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCYIn case of an emergencyIf your vehicle will not start 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your engine stalls while driving 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot increase the engine speed 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle overheats 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a flat tire 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle becomes stuck 292. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle needs to be towed 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever 298. . . . . . . . If you lose your keys 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter 299. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

278


Before making these checks, make sureyou have followed the correct starting pro-cedure given in “How to start the engine”on page 260 in Section 3 and that youhave sufficient fuel. Also, check whetherthe other keys will start the engine. Ifthey work, your key may be broken. Havethe key checked at your Toyota dealer. Ifnone of your keys work, there may be amalfunction in the immobiliser system. Callyour Toyota dealer. (See “Keys” on page10 in Section 1–2.)

If the engine is not turning over or isturning over too slowly—

1. Check that the battery terminals aretight and clean.

2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switchon the interior light.

3. If the light is out, dim or goes outwhen the starter is cranked, the batteryis discharged. You may try jump start-ing. See “(c) Jump starting” on page279 for further instructions.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still willnot start, it needs adjustment or repair.Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repairshop.

NOTICE

Do not pull– or push–start the ve-hicle. It may damage the vehicle orcause a collision when the enginestarts. Also the three–way catalyticconverter may overheat and become afire hazard.

If the engine turns over at its normalspeed but will not start—

1. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or“LOCK” and try starting the engineagain.

2. If the engine will not start, the enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking. See “(b) Starting a floodedengine” on page 278 for further instruc-tions.

3. If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyotadealer or qualified repair shop.

If the engine will not start, your enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking.

If this happens, turn the ignition key to“START” with the accelerator pedal fullydepressed, and hold the key at this posi-tion for about 30 seconds. Then thecranking hold function stops cranking au-tomatically, and you can try starting theengine with your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

If the engine does not start, wait a fewminutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealeror qualified repair shop for assistance.

If your vehicle will not start—(a) Simple checks (b) Starting a flooded engine

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

279


To avoid serious personal injury anddamage to your vehicle which might re-sult from battery explosion, acid burns,electrical burns, or damaged electroniccomponents, these instructions must befollowed precisely.

If you are unsure about how to follow thisprocedure, we strongly recommend thatyou seek the help of a competent me-chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

� Batteries contain sulfuric acidwhich is poisonous and corrosive.Wear protective safety glasses whenjump starting, and avoid spillingacid on your skin, clothing, or ve-hicle.

� If you should accidentally get acidon yourself or in your eyes, removeany contaminated clothing and flushthe affected area with water imme-diately. Then get immediate medicalattention. If possible, continue toapply water with a sponge or clothwhile en route to the medical office.

� The gas normally produced by abattery will explode if a flame orspark is brought near. Use onlystandardized jumper cables and donot smoke or light a match whilejump starting.

� Warning: Battery posts, terminalsand related accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting mustbe 12 V. Do not jump start unless youare sure that the booster battery iscorrect.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed inanother vehicle, make sure the vehiclesare not touching. Turn off all unneces-sary lights and accessories.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugsfrom the booster and discharged batter-ies. Lay a cloth over the open ventson the batteries. (This helps reduce theexplosion hazard, personal injuries andburns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with thebooster battery is not running, start itand let it run for a few minutes. Duringjump starting run the engine at about2000 rpm with the accelerator pedallightly depressed.

(c) Jump starting

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

280


Positiveterminal(“+” mark)

Jumper cable Positive terminal(“+” mark)

Boosterbattery

Discharged battery

4. Make the cable connections in the or-der a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)terminal on the discharged battery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other endof the positive (red) jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal on the boosterbattery.

Discharged battery

Booster battery

Negativeterminal(“–” mark)

Jumper cable

c. Connect the clamp of the negative(black) jumper cable to the negative (–)terminal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other endof the negative (black) jumper cable toa solid, stationary, unpainted, metallicpoint of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery.

The recommended connecting pointsare shown in the following illustrations:

Connecting point for 1GR–FE engine

Connecting point for 2UZ–FE engine

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

281


Do not connect the cable to or nearany part that moves when the engineis cranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, toavoid serious injury, do not lean overthe battery or accidentally let thejumper cables or clamps touch any-thing except the correct battery termi-nals or the ground.

5. Start your engine in the normal way.After starting, run it at about 2000 rpmfor several minutes with the acceleratorpedal lightly depressed.

6. Carefully disconnect the cables in theexact reverse order: the negative cableand then the positive cable.

7. Carefully dispose of the battery covercloths—they may now contain sulfuricacid.

8. If removed, replace all the battery ventplugs.

If the cause of your battery discharging isnot apparent (for example, lights left on),you should have it checked at your Toyotadealer.

If your engine stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or“LOCK”, and try starting the engineagain.

If the engine will not start, see “If yourvehicle will not start” on page 278 in thisSection.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-er assist for the brakes and steeringwill not work so steering and brakingwill be much harder than usual.

If the engine speed does not increase whenthe accelerator pedal is depressed, there maybe a problem somewhere in your electronicthrottle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-er, if you depress the accelerator pedalmore firmly and slowly, you can drive yourvehicle at low speeds. Have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronicthrottle control system is corrected duringlow speed driving, the system may not berecovered until the engine is stopped andthe ignition key is turned to “ACC” or“LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-neous pedal operation.

If your engine stalls whiledriving

If you cannot incr ease theengine speed

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

282


If your engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates overheating, if you ex-perience a loss of power, or if you heara loud knocking or pinging noise, theengine has probably overheated. Youshould follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-hicle and turn on your emergencyflashers. Put the transmission in “P”and apply the parking brake. Turn offthe air conditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of theradiator or reservoir, stop the engine.Wait until the steam subsides beforeopening the hood. If there is no coolantboiling over or steam, leave the enginerunning.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keepthe hood closed until there is nosteam. Escaping steam or coolant isa sign of very high pressure.

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from theradiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.However, note that water draining fromthe air conditioning is normal if it hasbeen used.

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keephands and clothing away from themoving fan and engine drive belts.

4. If the engine drive belt is broken or thecoolant is leaking, stop the engine im-mediately. Call a Toyota dealer for as-sistance.

5. If the engine drive belt is O.K. andthere are no obvious leaks, you mayhelp the engine cool down more quicklyby running it at about 1500 rpm for afew minutes with the accelerator pedallightly depressed.

6. Check the coolant reservoir. If it is dry,add coolant to the reservoir while theengine is running. Fill it about half full.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiatorcap when the engine and radiator arehot. Serious injury could result fromscalding hot fluid and steam blownout under pressure.

7. After the engine coolant temperaturehas cooled to normal, again check thecoolant level in the reservoir. If neces-sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-ous coolant loss indicates a leak in thesystem. You should have it checked assoon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

If your vehicle overheats

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

283


1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place well away fromthe traffic. Avoid stopping on the centerdivider of a highway. Park on a levelspot with firm ground.

2. Stop the engine and turn on youremergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake and putthe transmission in “P”.

4. Have everyone get out of the vehicleon the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructions thor-oughly.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe thefollowing to reduce the possibility ofpersonal injury:

� Follow jacking instructions.

� Do not put any part of your bodyunder the vehicle supported by thejack. Otherwise, personal injury mayoccur.

� Do not start or run the engine whileyour vehicle is supported by thejack.

� Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parking brakeand put the transmission in “P”.Block the wheel diagonally oppositeto the one being changed if neces-sary.

� Make sure to set the jack properlyin the jack point. Raising the ve-hicle with jack improperly posi-tioned will damage the vehicle ormay allow the vehicle to fall off thejack and cause personal injury.

� Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by the jackalone.

� Use the jack only for lifting yourvehicle during wheel changing.

� Do not raise the vehicle with some-one in the vehicle.

� When raising the vehicle, do notplace any objects on top of or un-derneath the jack.

� Raise the vehicle only high enoughto remove and change the tire.

NOTICE

� Do not continue driving with a de-flated tire. Driving even a short dis-tance can damage a tire and wheelbeyond repair.

� Vehicles with rear height control airsuspension: When jacking up orinstalling the tire chains, be sure toturn off the rear height control andstop the engine. Otherwise, the ve-hicle height may change in the au-tomatic leveling function, resultingin accident.

If you have a flat tire—

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

284


1. Get the required tools and sparetire.

1. Tool bag2. Jack

To prepare yourself for an emergency, youshould familiarize yourself with the use ofthe jack, each of the tools and their stor-age locations.

When storing the tool bag, make sure itis securely held by the tightening strap.

Turn the jack joint by hand.

To remove: Turn the joint in direction 1until the jack is free.To store: Turn the joint in direction 2 untilthe jack is firmly secured to prevent itflying forward during a collision or suddenbraking.

To remove the spare tire under the lug-gage compartment:

1. Put a jack handle and jack handle ex-tensions together as shown in the il-lustration.

1. Jack handle extensions2. Jack handle

—Required tools and sparetire

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

285


When connecting a jack handle extensionwith jack handle end, use a Phillips–headscrewdriver or jack handle to tighten thebolts on the joints as shown in the il-lustration.

When connecting the jack handle with ex-tension, tighten the bolt on the joint se-curely.

When you tighten the bolt, make sure thatit fits into the depression on the joint.

NOTICE

Tighten all joints securely. Otherwise,the extension may come off and itmay damage the paint or vehiclebody.

2. Insert the end of the jack handle exten-sion into the lowering screw and turnit counterclockwise with the handle.

3. After the tire is lowered completely tothe ground, remove the holding brack-et.

When storing the spare tire, put it in placewith the outer side of the wheel facing up.Then secure the tire, taking care that thetire goes straight up without catching onany other part, to prevent it from flyingforward during a collision or sudden brak-ing.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

286


2. Block the wheel diagonally oppositethe flat tire to keep the vehicle fromrolling when it is j acked up.

When blocking the wheel, place a wheelblock in front of one of the front wheelsor behind one of the rear wheels.

3. Remove the wheel ornament.

Pry off the wheel ornament, using thebeveled end of the wheel nut wrench asshown.

CAUTION

Do not try to pull off the ornament byhand. Take due care in handling theornament to avoid unexpected person-al injury.

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.

Always loosen the wheel nuts before rais-ing the vehicle.

Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise toloosen. To get maximum leverage, fit thewrench to the nut so that the handle ison the right side, as shown above. Grabthe wrench near the end of the handleand pull up on the handle. Be careful thatthe wrench does not slip off the nut.

Do not remove the nuts yet—just unscrewthem about one–half turn.

—Blocking the wheel —Removing wheel ornament —Loosening wheel nuts

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

287


CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the boltsor nuts. The nuts may loose and thewheels may fall off, which could cau-se a serious accident.

Front Rear

5. Position the jack at the correct jackpoint as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned on alevel and solid place.

JACK POINTS:

Front—Under the frame side railRear—Under the rear axle housing

Put a jack handle, jack handle extensionsand jack handle end together as shown inthe illustration.

1. Jack handle end2. Jack handle extensions3. Jack handle

—Positioning the jack

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

288


When connecting a jack handle extensionwith jack handle end, use a Phillips–headscrewdriver or jack handle to tighten thebolts on the joints as shown in the il-lustration.

When connecting the jack handle with ex-tension, tighten the bolt on the joint se-curely.

When you tighten the bolt, make sure thatit fits into the depression on the joint.

NOTICE

Tighten all joints securely. Otherwise,the extension may come off and itmay damage the paint or vehiclebody.

Front of vehicle

6. After making sure that no one is inthe vehicle, as the jack touches thevehicle and begins to fit, double–check that it is properly positioned.

Rear side only—When positioning the jack under the rearaxle housing, make sure the groove onthe top of the jack fits with the rear axlehousing.

—Raising your vehicle

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

289


7. Raise the vehicle high enough sothat the spare tire can be installed.

Remember you will need more groundclearance when putting on the spare tirethan when removing the flat tire.

To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handleend into the jack (it is a loose fit) andturn it clockwise with the handle.

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle when thevehicle is supported by the jackalone.

8. Remove the wheel nuts and changetires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put itaside.

Roll the spare wheel into position andalign the holes in the wheel with the bolts.Then lift up the wheel and get at least thetop bolt started through its hole. Wigglethe tire and press it back over the otherbolts.

Before putting on wheels, remove any cor-rosion on the mounting surfaces with awire brush or such. Installation of wheelswithout good metal–to–metal contact at themounting surface can cause wheel nuts toloosen and eventually cause a wheel tocome off while driving.

—Changing wheels

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

290


9. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fingertight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end in-ward) and tighten them as much as youcan by hand. Press back on the tire backand see if you can tighten them more.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the boltsor nuts. Doing so may lead to over-tightening the nuts and damaging thebolts. The nuts may loose and thewheels may fall off, which could cau-se a serious accident. If there is oilor grease on any bolt or nut, cleanit.

10. Lower the vehicle completely andtighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle extension counter-clockwise with handle to lower the vehicle.

Use only the wheel nut wrench and turnit clockwise to tighten the nuts. Do notuse other tools or any additional leverageother than your hands, such as a hammer,pipe or your foot. Make sure the wrenchis securely engaged over the nut.

Tighten each nut a little at a time in theorder shown. Repeat the process until allthe nuts are tight.

—Reinstalling wheel nuts —Lowering your vehicle

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

291


CAUTION

� When lowering the vehicle, makesure all portions of your body andall other persons around will not beinjured as the vehicle is lowered tothe ground.

� Have the wheel nuts tightened withtorque wrench to 110 N·m (11.5kgf·m, 83 ft·lbf), as soon as pos-sible after changing wheels. Other-wise, the nuts may loosen and thewheels may fall off, which couldcause a serious accident. 11. Reinstall the wheel ornament.

Put the wheel ornament into position andthen tap it firmly with the side or heel ofyour hand to snap it into place.

CAUTION

Take due care in handling the orna-ment to avoid unexpected personalinjury.

12. Check the air pressure of the re-placed tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specificationdesignated on page 356 in Section 8. Ifthe pressure is lower, drive slowly to thenearest service station and fill to the cor-rect pressure.

Do not forget to reinstall the tire inflationvalve cap as dirt and moisture could getinto the valve core and possibly cause airleakage. If the cap is missing, have a newone put on as soon as possible.

13. Restow all the tools, jack and flattire securely.

As soon after changing wheels as pos-sible, tighten the wheel nuts to the torquespecified on page 356 in Section 8 witha torque wrench. Have a technician repairthe flat tire.

—Reinstalling wheel ornament —After changing wheels

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

292


CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all thetools, jack and flat tire are securelyin place in their storage location toreduce the possibility of personal in-jury during a collision or s uddenbraking.

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,mud, sand, etc., then you may attemptto rock the vehicle free by moving itforward and backward.

Turn off the traction control system tobecome unstuck to allow the tires tospin enough to remove the vehicle fromthe obstruction. (For details, see “Trac-tion control system” on page 145 inSection 1–6.)

CAUTION

Do not attempt to rock the vehiclefree by moving it forward and back-ward if people or objects are any-where near the vehicle. During therocking operation the vehicle maysuddenly move forward or backwardas it becomes unstuck, causing injuryor damage to nearby people or ob-jects.

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe thefollowing precautions to prevent dam-age to the transmission and otherparts.

� Do not depress the accelerator ped-al while shifting the selector leveror before the transmission is com-pletely shifted to forward or reversegear.

� Do not race the engine and avoidspinning the wheels.

� If your vehicle remains stuck afterrocking the vehicle several times,consider other ways such as tow-ing.

If your vehicle becomes stuck

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

293


—From front

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

Two–wheel drive models

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear


Four–wheel drive models

If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice. In consultation with them, haveyour vehicle towed using either (a) or(b).

Only when you cannot receive a towingservice from a Toyota dealer or com-mercial tow truck service, tow your ve-hicle carefully in accordance with theinstructions given in “—Emergency tow-ing” on page 295 in this Section.

Proper equipment will help ensure thatyour vehicle is not damaged while beingtowed. Commercial operators are generallyaware of the state/provincial and locallaws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it istowed incorrectly. Although most operatorsknow the correct procedure, it is possibleto make a mistake. To avoid damage toyour vehicle, make sure the following pre-cautions are observed. If necessary, showthis page to the tow truck driver.

If your vehicle needs to betowed—

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

294


TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing,and abide by the state/provincial and locallaws. The wheels and axle on the groundmust be in good condition. If they aredamaged, use a towing dolly.

CAUTION

Vehicles with rear height control airsuspension: When your vehicle istowed, put the vehicle height in the“N” (normal) mode and push the“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch toturn off the rear height control airsuspension. Otherwise, the vehicleheight may be changed in the auto-matic leveling function, resulting inaccident. For details, see “Rearheight control air suspension” onpage 158 in Section 1–6.

Two–wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front—

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the frontwith the rear wheels on the ground,as this may cause serious damage tothe transmission.

From rear— Place the ignition key in the“ACC” position.

NOTICE

� When lifting wheels, take care toensure adequate ground clearancefor towing at the opposite end ofthe raised vehicle. Otherwise, thebumper and/or underbody of thetowed vehicle will be damaged dur-ing towing.

� Do not tow with the key removed orin the “LOCK” position, as thesteering lock mechanism is notstrong enough to hold the frontwheels straight while towing.


Four–wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

FULL–TIME FOUR WHEEL DRIVEMODELS

Use a towing dolly under the wheels notlifted by the truck.

MULTI–MODE FOUR WHEEL DRIVEMODELS

From front—

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the frontwith the rear wheels on the ground,as this may cause serious damage tothe transmission.

From rear— We recommend using a tow-ing dolly under the front wheels. If you donot use a towing dolly, place the ignitionkey in the “ACC” position, put the trans-mission in “N” and the multi–mode controlswitch knob in “H2”.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

295


NOTICE

� When lifting wheels, take care toensure adequate ground clearancefor towing at the opposite end ofthe raised vehicle. Otherwise, thebumper and/or underbody of thetowed vehicle will be damaged dur-ing towing.

� Do not tow with the key removed orin the “LOCK” position when tow-ing from the rear without a towingdolly. The steering lock mechanismis not strong enough to hold thefront wheels straight.


(c) Towing with slingtype truck

All models—

(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-ther from the front or rear. This maycause body damage.

Front

Rear

—Emergency towing

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

296


If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice.

If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may be tempo-rarily towed by a cable or chain se-cured to either emergency towing eyeletunder the front of the vehicle or theleft emergency towing eyelet under therear of the vehicle. Use extreme cautionwhen towing the vehicles.

NOTICE

Only use specified towing eyelet;otherwise your vehicle may be dam-aged.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steerit and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done onlyon hard–surfaced roads for a short dis-tance and at low speeds. Also, thewheels, axles, drive train, steering andbrakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing ve-hicles. Avoid sudden starts or erraticdriving maneuvers which would placeexcessive stress on the emergencytowing eyelet and towing cable orchain. The eyelet and towing cable orchain may break and cause seriousinjury or damage.

NOTICE

Use only a cable or chain specificallyintended for use in towing vehicles.Securely fasten the cable or chain tothe towing eyelet provided.

Before towing, release the parking brakeand put the transmission in “N”. The keymust be in “ACC” (engine off) or “ON”(engine running).

Four–wheel drive models—On multi–modefour–wheel drive models, put the multi–mode control switch knob in “H2”. On full–time four–wheel drive models, unlock thecenter differential.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-er assist for the brakes and steeringwill not work so steering and brakingwill be much harder than usual.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

297


� Before emergency towing, check thatthe eyelet is not broken or damagedand that the installation bolts are notloose.

� Fasten the towing cable or chain se-curely to the eyelet.

� Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steadyand even force.

� To avoid damaging the eyelet, do notpull from the side or at a verticalangle. Always pull straight ahead.

CAUTION

If the emergency towing eyelet isused to get out when your vehiclebecomes struck in mud, sand or oth-er condition from which the vehiclecannot be driven out under its ownpower, make sure to observe the pre-cautions mentioned below. Otherwise,excessive stress will be put on theeyelet and the towing cable or chainmay break, causing serious injury ordamage.

� If the towing vehicle can hardlymove, do not forcibly continue thetowing. Contact your Toyota dealeror a commercial tow truck servicefor assistance.

� Tow the vehicle as straight aheadas possible.

� Keep away from the vehicle duringtowing.

The following methods are effective toget out when your vehicle is struck inmud, sand or other condition fromwhich the vehicle cannot be driven outunder its own power. Use extreme cau-tion when towing vehicles. In addition,keep away from the vehicles and towingcable or chain when towing.

� Remove the soil and sand in the frontand the back of the tires.

� Place a stone or wood under the tires.

—Emergency towing eyeletprecautions

—Tips for towing a stuckvehicle

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

298


If you cannot shift the selector leverout of “P” position to other positionseven though the brake pedal is de-pressed, use the shift lock override but-ton as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to “LOCK”position. Make sure the parkingbrake is set.

2. Pry up the cover with a flat–bladedscrewdriver or equivalent.

3. Insert the screwdriver or equivalentinto the hole to push down the shiftlock override button. You can shiftout of “P” position only while push-ing the button.

4. Shift into “N” position.

5. Insert the cover.

6. Start the engine. For your safety,keep the brake pedal depressed.

Be sure to have the system checked byyour Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

You can purchase a new key at yourToyota dealer if you can give them thekey number and master key.

Even if you lose only one key, contactyour Toyota dealer to make a new key. Ifyou lose all your master keys, you cannotmake new keys; the whole engine immobi-liser system must be replaced.

See the suggestion given in “Keys” onpage 10 in Section 1–2.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle andyou cannot get a duplicate, many Toyotadealers can still open the door for you,using their special tools. If you mustbreak a window to get in, we suggestbreaking the smallest side window be-cause it is the least expensive to replace.Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts fromthe glass.

If you cannot shift automatictransmission selector lever If you lose your keys

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

299


Please contact your nearest Toyotadealer and you can purchase a newwireless remote control transmitter.

Have the registered identification numbersof your transmitters deleted from your ve-hicle by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to avoid the possibility of theft oran accident. Then, have the identificationnumber of your new transmitter registered.At the same time, you must bring all ofthe remaining transmitters to have themregistered again as well.

If you lose your wirelessremote control transmitter

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

300


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

301


CORROSION PREVENTION ANDAPPEARANCE CARECorrosion prevention and appearance careProtecting your Toyota from corrosion 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washing and waxing your Toyota 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the interior 305. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rain clearing mirrors 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

302


Toyota, through the diligent research, de-sign and use of the most advancedtechnology available, helps prevent corro-sion and provides you with the finest qual-ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up toyou. Proper care of your Toyota can helpensure long–term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosionto your vehicle are:

� The accumulation of road salt, dirt andmoisture in hard–to–reach areas underthe vehicle.

� Chipping of paint, or undercoatingcaused by minor accidents or bystones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you livein particular areas or operate your ve-hicle under certain environmental condi-tions:

� Road salt or dust control chemicals willaccelerate corrosion, as will the pres-ence of salt in the air near the sea–coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

� High humidity accelerates corrosion es-pecially when temperatures range justabove the freezing point.

� Wetness or dampness to certain partsof your vehicle for an extended periodof time, may cause corrosion eventhough other parts of the vehicle maybe dry.

� High ambient temperatures can causecorrosion to those components of thevehicle which do not dry quickly due tolack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keepyour vehicle, particularly the underside, asclean as possible and to repair any dam-age to paint or protective coatings assoon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on yourToyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, ofcourse, necessary to keep your vehicleclean by regular washing, but to preventcorrosion, the following points should beobserved:

� If you drive on salted roads in thewinter or if you live near the ocean,you should hose off the undercarriageat least once a month to minimize cor-rosion.

� High pressure water or steam is effec-tive for cleaning the vehicle’s undersideand wheel housings. Pay particularattention to these areas as it is difficultto see all the mud and dirt. It will domore harm than good to simply wet themud and debris without removing. Thelower edge of doors, rocker panels andframe members have drain holes whichshould not be allowed to clog with dirtas trapped water in these areas cancause corrosion.

� Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-oughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” onpage 303 in this Section for more tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle’spaint and trim. If you find any chips orscratches in the paint, touch them up im-mediately to prevent corrosion from start-ing. If the chips or scratches have gonethrough the bare metal, have a qualifiedbody shop make the repair.

Protecting your Toyota fromcorrosion

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

303


Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-ter and dirt can accumulate under thefloor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-casionally check under the mats to makesure the area is dry. Be particularly care-ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-ers, fertilizers, salt, etc; these should betransported in proper containers. If a spillor leak should occur, immediately cleanand dry the area.

Use mud shields on your wheels. If youdrive on salted or gravel roads, mudshields help protect your vehicle. Full–sizeshields, which come as near to the groundas possible, are the best. We recommendthat the fittings and the area where theshields are installed be treated to resistcorrosion. Your Toyota dealer will behappy to assist in supplying and installingthe shields if they are recommended foryour area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilatedgarage or a roofed place. Do not parkyour vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-lated garage. If you wash your vehicle inthe garage, or if you drive it covered withwater or snow, your garage may be sodamp and it will cause corrosion. Even ifyour garage is heated, a wet vehicle cancorrode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regularwashing.

The following cases may cause weaknessto the paint or corrosion to the body andparts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-sible.

� When driving in a coastal area

� When driving on a road sprinkled withantifreeze

� When having coal tar, tree sap, birddroppings and carcass of an insect

� When driving in the areas where thereis a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dustand chemical substances

� When the vehicle becomes remarkablydirty with dust and mud

Hand–washing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until thevehicle body is not hot to the touch.

CAUTION

When cleaning under floor or chassis,be careful not to injure your hands.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-move any mud or road salt from theunderside of the vehicle or in thewheel wells.

2. Wash with a mild car–wash soap,mixed according to the manufacturer’sinstructions. Use a soft cotton mitt andkeep it wet by dipping it frequently intothe wash water. Do not rub hard—letthe soap and water remove the dirt.

Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high–pressure car wash, for example) at ornear the fuel tank inlet with the fuel fillerdoor opened. If the water enters the airvent, you may experience trouble with re-fueling or rough engine idling.

Rear height control air suspension: Do notspray a jet of high–pressure water at theair suspension unit, especially the airspring, at an extremely close range. Thismay damage the air suspension.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plasticwheel ornaments are damaged easily byorganic substances. If any organic sub-stances splashes an ornament, be sure towash it off with water and check if theornament is damaged.

Washing and waxing yourToyota

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

304


CAUTION

Do not attach the heavily damagedplastic wheel ornament. It may fly offthe wheel and cause accidents whilethe vehicle is moving.

Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soapor neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do notscrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumperfaces are soft.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine orcleaners that are marked safe for paintedsurfaces.

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances (gaso-line, kerosene, benzine or strong sol-vents), which may be toxic or causedamage.

3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap cancause streaking. In hot weather youmay need to rinse each section rightafter you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicleusing a clean soft cotton towel. Do notrub or press hard—you might scratchthe paint.

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an auto-matic car wash, but remember that thepaint can be scratched by some types ofbrushes, unfiltered washing water, or thewashing process itself. Scratching reducespaint durability and gloss, especially ondarker colors. The manager of the carwash should be able to advise you wheth-er the process is safe for the paint onyour vehicle.

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommendedto maintain the original beauty of yourToyota’s finish.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehiclesurface does not repel water well.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-fore you begin waxing, even if you areusing a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. Ifthe finish has become extremely weath-ered, use a car–cleaning polish, fol-lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-low the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions. Be sure to polish and waxthe chrome trim as well as the paint.

3. Wax the vehicle again when waterdoes not bead but remains on the sur-face in large patches.

NOTICE

Always remove the plastic bumpers ifyour vehicle is re–painted and placedin a high heat paint waxing booth.High temperatures could damage thebumpers.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

305


CAUTION

� Vehicles with side airbags and cur-tain shield airbags:

Be careful not to splash water orspill liquid on the floor. This mayprevent the side airbags and curtainshield airbags from activating cor-rectly, resulting in serious injury.

� Do not wash the vehicle floor withwater, or allow water to get ontothe floor when cleaning the vehicleinterior or exterior. Water may getinto audio components or otherelectrical components above or un-der the floor carpet (or mat) andcause a malfunction; and it maycause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easilycleaned with a mild soap or detergentand water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to re-move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge orsoft cloth, apply the soap solution to thevinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a fewminutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirtand wipe off the soap with a clean dampcloth. If all the dirt does not come off,repeat the procedure. Commercial foam-ing–type vinyl cleaners are also availablewhich work well. Follow the manufacturer’sinstructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasolineor window cleaner on the interior.

Carpets

Use a good foam–type shampoo toclean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to removeas much dirt as possible. Several types offoam cleaners are available; some are inaerosol cans and others are powders orliquids which you mix with water to pro-duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.Rub in overlapping circles.

Do not apply water—the best results areobtained by keeping the carpet as dry aspossible. Read the shampoo instructionsand follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned withmild soap and water or with lukewarmwater.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-ing, check the belts for excessive wear,fraying, or cuts.

Cleaning the interior

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

306


NOTICE

� Do not use dye or bleach on thebelts—it may weaken them.

� Do not use the belts until they be-come dry.

Windows

The windows may be cleaned with anyhousehold window cleaner.

NOTICE

� When cleaning the inside of therear window, be careful not toscratch or damage the heater wiresor connectors.

� When cleaning the inside of therear quarter window, be careful notto scratch or damage the printedantenna.

Air conditioning control panel, car au-dio, instrument panel, console paneland switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE

� Do not use organic substances (sol-vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.These chemicals can cause discol-oring, staining or peeling of thesurface.

� If you use cleaners or polishingagents, make sure their ingredientsdo not include the substances men-tioned above.

� If you use a liquid car freshener, donot apill the liquid onto the ve-hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-tain the ingredients mentionedabove. Immediately clean any spillusing the method mentioned above.

Leather Interior

The leather upholstery may be cleanedwith neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampenedwith 5% solution of neutral detergent forwool. Then thoroughly wipe off all tracesof detergent with a clean damp cloth.

After cleaning or whenever any part of theleather gets wet, dry with a soft cleancloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-lated shaded area.

NOTICE

� If a stain should fail to come outwith a neutral detergent, apply acleaner that does not contain anorganic solvent.

� Never use organic substances suchas benzine, alcohol or gasoline, oralkaline or acid solutions for clean-ing the leather as these couldcause discoloring.

� Use of a nylon brush or syntheticfiber cloth, etc. may scratch thefine grained surface of the leather.

� Mildew may develop on soiled leath-er upholstery. Be especially carefulto avoid oil spots. Try to keep yourupholstery always clean.

� Long exposure to direct sunlightmay cause the leather surface toharden and shrink. Keep your ve-hicle in a shaded area, especially inthe summer.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

307


� The interior of your vehicle is aptto heat up on hot summer days, soavoid placing on the upholsteryitems made of vinyl or plastic orcontaining wax as these tend tostick to leather when warm .

� Improper cleaning of the leather up-holstery could result in discolor-ation or staining.

If you have any questions about thecleaning of your Toyota, your localToyota dealer will be pleased to answerthem.

On some models, the outside rear viewmirrors have been coated to produce a“rain clearing” effect. This coatingcauses the raindrops to spread, clear-ing the driver’s rear view when it rains.

It is sufficient to wash the mirrors withwater for day to day care.

The rain clearing effect is reduced indrizzle and light rain.

In the following cases, the rain clearingeffect will be reduced temporarily, but willgradually recover.

� After wiping dirt off the mirrors

� When the mirrors fog up

� After waxing your vehicle in an auto-matic car wash

� After your vehicle has been parked fora long period in underground parkinglots, etc. where there is no direct sun-light.

If you would like to restore the rain clear-ing effect to its normal level immediatelyin the above cases, wash the mirrors withneutral detergent, then rinse thoroughly.

NOTICE

To maintain the rain clearing ability,and prevent the mirrors from beingscratched, observe the following pre-cautions.

� Do not use any glass cleaners thatcontain compounds.

� If ice should jam the mirror, do notscrape the mirror. Use a spray de–icer to free the mirror.

� Wash off any wax stuck to the mir-rors with neutral detergent andrinse thoroughly as any wax on thesurface of the mirrors can causethe rain clearing effect to be lost.

� Do not use any water repellents asthey can destroy the rain clearingeffect. If any repellent gets stuck onthe surface of the mirrors, wash itoff with neutral detergent, thenrinse thoroughly.

Rain clearing mirrors

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

308


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

309


VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CAREVehicle maintenance and careMaintenance requirements 310. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance 311. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does your vehicle need repairing? 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs 314. . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

SECTION 6

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

310


Your Toyota vehicle has been designed forfewer maintenance requirements with long-er service intervals to save both your timeand money. However, each regular mainte-nance, as well as day–to–day care, ismore important than ever before to ensuresmooth, and trouble–free, safe, and eco-nomical drivings.

It is the owner’s responsibility to makesure the specified maintenance, includinggeneral maintenance service, is performed.Note that both the new vehicle and emis-sion control system warranties specify thatproper maintenance and care must be per-formed. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for complete warranty information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day–to–day care practices that are important toyour vehicle for proper operation. It is theowner’s responsibility to ensure that thegeneral maintenance items are performedregularly.

These checks or inspections can be doneeither by yourself or a qualified technician,or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will bepleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed inthe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are thoserequired to be serviced at regular inter-vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule,read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

It is recommended that any replacementparts used for maintenance or for therepair of the emission control systembe Toyota supplied.

The owner may elect to use non–Toyotasupplied parts for replacement pur-poses without invalidating the emissioncontrol system warranty. However, useof replacement parts which are not ofequivalent quality may impair the effec-tiveness of the emission control sys-tems.

You may also elect to have mainte-nance, replacement, or repair of theemission control devices and systemperformed by any automotive repair es-tablishment or individual without invali-dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War-ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’sManual Supplement” for complete war-ranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are well–trained spe-cialists and are kept up to date with thelatest service information through technicalbulletins, service tips, and in–dealershiptraining programs. They learn to work onToyotas before they work on your vehicle,rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyotadealer’s service department performs thebest job to meet the maintenance require-ments on your vehicle—reliably and eco-nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof thatall required maintenance has been per-formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-lems should arise with your vehicle whileunder warranty, your Toyota dealer willpromptly take care of it. Again, be sureto keep a copy of the repair order for anyservice performed on your Toyota.

What about do–it–yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easyto do yourself if you have a little mechani-cal ability and a few basic automotivetools. Simple instructions for how to per-form them are presented on page 315 inSection 7.

Maintenance requirements

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

311


If you are a skilled do–it–yourself mechan-ic, the Toyota service manuals are recom-mended. Please be aware that do–it–your-self maintenance can affect your warrantycoverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenanceitems that should be performed as fre-quently as specified. In addition to check-ing the items listed, if you notice anyunusual noise, smell or vibration, youshould investigate the cause or take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-fied service shop immediately. It is recom-mended that any problem you notice bebrought to the attention of your dealer orthe qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only with ade-quate ventilation if you run the en-gine.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performedfrom time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Tire pressure

Check the pressure with a gauge everytwo weeks, or at least once a month. Seepage 332 in Section 7–2 for additionalinformation.

Tire surface and wheel nuts

Check the tires carefully for cuts, damageor excessive wear. See page 333 in Sec-tion 7–2 for additional information. Whenchecking the tires, make sure no nuts aremissing, and check the nuts for loose-ness. Tighten them if necessary.

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires according to the mainte-nance schedule. (For scheduled mainte-nance information, please refer to the sep-arate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.) See page334 in Section 7–2 for additional informa-tion.

Fluid leaks

Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-ter or other fluid after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. If you smell fuelfumes or notice any leak, have the causefound and corrected immediately.

Doors and engine hood

Check that all doors including back dooroperate smoothly and all latches lock se-curely. Make sure the engine hood sec-ondary latch secures the hood from open-ing when the primary latch is released.

General maintenance

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

312


INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checkedregularly, e.g. while performing periodicservices, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Lights

Make sure the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lightsare all working. Check headlight aim.

Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers

Check that all service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheel

Check that it has the specified free play.Be alert for changes in steering condition,such as hard steering or strange noise.

Seats

Check that all front seat controls such asseat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. op-erate smoothly and that all latches locksecurely in any position. Check that thehead restraint move up and down smooth-ly and that the locks hold securely in anylatched position. For folding–down rearseatbacks and swing–up rear seat cush-ions, check that the latches lock securely.

Seat belts

Check that the seat belt system such asbuckles, retractors and anchors operateproperly and smoothly. Make sure that thebelt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn ordamaged.

Accelerator pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation anduneven pedal effort or catching.

Brake pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation andthat the pedal has the proper clearance.Check the brake booster function.

Brakes

At a safe place, check that the brakes donot pull to one side when applied.

Parking brake

Check that the pedal has the proper traveland that, on a safe incline, your vehicleis held securely with only the parkingbrake applied.

Automatic transmission “Park” mecha-nism

On a safe incline, check that your vehicleis held securely with the selector lever in“P” position and all brakes released.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checkedfrom time to time, e.g. each time whenrefueling.

Washer fluid

Make sure there is sufficient fluid in thetank. See page 343 in Section 7–3 foradditional information.

Engine coolant level

Make sure the coolant level is betweenthe “F” and “L” lines on the see–throughreservoir when the engine is cold. Seepage 326 in Section 7–2 for additionalinformation.

Radiator, condenser and hoses

Check that the front of the radiator andcondenser are clean and not blocked withleaves, dirt, or insects. See page 328 inSection 7–2 for additional information.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

313


Battery condition

Check the battery condition by the indica-tor color. See page 340 in Section 7–3 foradditional information.

Brake fluid level

Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.See page 328 in Section 7–2 for addition-al information.

Engine oil level

Check the level on the dipstick with theengine turned off and the vehicle parkedon a level spot. See page 324 in Section7–2 for additional information.

Power steering fluid level

Check the level through the reservoir. Thelevel should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”range depending on the fluid temperature.See page 329 in Section 7–2 for addition-al information.

Exhaust system

If you notice any change in the sound ofthe exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, havethe cause located and corrected immedi-ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” onpage 247 in Section 2.)

Be on the alert for changes in perfor-mance, sounds, and visual tip–offs thatindicate service is needed. Some impor-tant clues are as follows:

� Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging

� Appreciable loss of power

� Strange engine noises

� A leak under the vehicle (however, wa-ter dripping from the air conditioningafter use is normal.)

� Change in exhaust sound (This mayindicate a dangerous carbon monoxideleak. Drive with the windows open andhave the exhaust system checked im-mediately.)

� Flat–looking tire; excessive tire squealwhen cornering; uneven tire wear

� Vehicle pulls to one side when drivingstraight on a level road

� Strange noises related to suspensionmovement

� Loss of brake effectiveness; spongyfeeling brake pedal; pedal almosttouches floor; vehicle pulls to one sidewhen braking

� Engine coolant temperature continuallyhigher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. It probably needs adjustment orrepair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve-hicle unchecked. It could result in se-rious vehicle damage and possiblypersonal injury.

Does your vehicle needrepairing?

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

314


Some states have vehicle emission in-spection programs which include OBD(On–Board Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operationof the emission control system. When theOBD system determines that a problemexists somewhere in the emission controlsystem, the malfunction indicator lampcomes on. In this case, your vehicle maynot pass the I/M test and need to berepaired. Contact your Toyota dealer toservice the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lampdoes not come on, your vehicle may notpass the I/M test as readiness codeshave not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically setduring ordinary driving. However, when thebattery is disconnected or run down, thecodes are erased. Also, depending onyour driving habits, the codes may not becompletely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp hadcome on recently due to temporary mal-function such as a loose fuel tank cap,your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips, but theerror code in the OBD system will not becleared unless about 40 trips or more aretaken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M testeven the malfunction indicator lamp doesnot come on, contact your Toyota dealerto prepare the vehicle for re–testing.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

351


SPECIFICATIONSSpecificationsDimensions and cargo load 352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service specifications 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

352


Model:1GR–FE and 2UZ–FE

Type:1GR–FE engine

6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline2UZ–FE engine

8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.):1GR–FE engine

94.0 � 95.0 (3.70 � 3.74)2UZ–FE engine

94.0 � 84.0 (3.70 � 3.31)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):1GR–FE engine 3956 (241.4)2UZ–FE engine 4664 (284.6)

Dimensions and cargo load

Overall width mm (in.)

2790 (109.8)

Overall height∗1 mm (in.)

1575 (62.0)

Wheelbase mm (in.)

Front tread mm (in.) 1575 (62.0)

Rear tread mm (in.)

66 (145)

∗1: Unladen vehicle∗2: With two–wheel drive models∗3: With four–wheel drive models∗4: With roof rails∗5: With rear spoiler∗6: With rear height control air suspension

Overall length mm (in.)

Cargo load kg (lb.)

4800 (189.0)

1875 (73.8)

1820 (71.7)∗2 or 3, 4

1765 (69.5)∗2, 5

1760 (69.3)∗3, 5

1755 (69.1)∗2

1750 (68.9)∗3

1810 (71.3)∗2 or 3, 4, 6

1750 (68.9)∗2 or 3, 5, 6

1740 (68.5)∗2 or 3, 6

Engine

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

353


Fuel type:Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87(Research Octane Number 91) or higher.For improved vehicle performance, theuse of premium unleaded gasoline withan Octane Rating of 91 (Research Oc-tane Number 96) or higher is recom-mended.

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):87 (23.0, 19.1)

ENGINE

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):

1GR–FE engineIntake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)Exhaust 0.29—0.39 (0.011—0.015)

2UZ–FE engineIntake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)Exhaust 0.25—0.35 (0.010—0.014)

Spark plug type:

1GR–FE engineDENSO K20HR–U11NGK LFR6C11

2UZ–FE engineDENSO SK20R11NGK IFR6A11

Spark plug gap, mm (in.):1.1 (0.043)

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp.qt.):

1GR–FE engineWith filter 5.2 (5.5, 4.6)Without filter 4.9 (5.2, 4.3)

2UZ–FE engineWith filter 6.2 (6.5, 5.5)Without filter 5.7 (6.0, 5.0)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is filled inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade andviscosity.

Oil grade:API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” orILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity:SAE 5W–30

Outside temperature

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details.

Fuel Service specifications

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

354


COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):1GR–FE engine 9.8 (10.4, 8.6)2UZ–FE engine 12.3 (13,0, 10.8)

Coolant type:

“Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” isfilled in your Toyota vehicle. In order toavoid technical problems, we stronglyrecommend using “Toyota Genuine LongLife Coolant” or equivalent.

With ethylene–glycol type coolant for aproper corrosion protection of aluminumcomponents


Please contact your Toyota dealer forfurther details.

BATTERY

Open voltage∗ at 20�C (68�F):12.6—12.8 V Fully charged12.2—12.4 V Half charged11.8—12.0 V Discharged

∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af-ter the key is removed with all thelights turned off

Charging rates:5 A max.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp. qt.):

1GR–FE engineUp to 2.0 (2.1, 1.8)

2UZ–FE engineUp to 3.0 (3.2, 2.6)

Fluid type:Toyota Genuine ATF Type T–IV

Change automatic transmission fluid onlyas necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to changeautomatic transmission fluid only if yourvehicle is driven under one of the SpecialOperating Conditions listed in your“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. Whenchanging the automatic transmission fluid,use only “Toyota Genuine ATF Type T–IV”(ATF JWS3309 or NWS6500) to aid inassuring optimum transmission perfor-mance.

Notice: Using automatic transmissionfluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATFType T–IV” may cause deterioration inshift quality, locking up of your trans-mission accompanied by vibration, andultimately damage the automatic trans-mission of your vehicle.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details.

TRANSFER

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):1.4 (1.5, 1.2)

Oil type:Hypoid gear oil API GL–5

Recommended oil viscosity:SAE 75W–90

DIFFERENTIAL (1GR–FE engine)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Two–wheel drive models3.05 (3.2, 2.7)

Four–wheel drive modelsFront 1.5 (1.6, 1.3)Rear 3.05 (3.2, 2.7)


Recommended oil viscosity:Front

SAE 75W–90

RearAbove –18�C (0�F)

SAE 90Below –18�C (0�F)

SAE 80W or 80W–90

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

355


DIFFERENTIAL (2UZ–FE engine)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Two–wheel drive models3.05 (3.2, 2.7)

Four–wheel drive modelsFront 1.4 (1.5, 1.2)Rear 3.05 (3.2, 2.7)


Recommended oil viscosity:

Above –18�C (0�F)SAE 90

Below –18�C (0�F)SAE 80W or 80W–90

CHASSIS LUBRICATION

Propeller shafts:

Spiders and slide yokesLithium base chassis grease, NLGINo.2

BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressedwith the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)with the engine running, mm (in.):

55 (2.2)

Pedal free play, mm (in.): 1—6 (0.04—0.24)

Pad wear limit, mm (in.): 1.0 (0.04)

Lining wear limit, mm (in.): 1.0 (0.04)

Parking brake adjustment when depressedwith the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66.1 lbf):

5—7 clicks

Fluid type: SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play: Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Power steering fluid type: Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON�IIor III

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

356


Engine compartment

Fuses (type A)

1. SPARE 10 A: Spare fuse

2. SPARE 15 A: Spare fuse

3. STOP 10 A: Stop/tail lights, highmounted stoplight, shift lock controlsystem, anti–lock brake system, trac-tion control system (two–wheel drivemodels), active traction control system(four–wheel drive models), vehicle sta-bility control system, rear height controlair suspension, multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system, trailer brake controller,trailer lights (tail lights)

Tires

Tire size

Tire pressurekPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)

Front Rear

P265/70R16 111S

P265/65R17 110S

220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32)

220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32)

Wheel size

16 � 7J∗1

16 � 7JJ∗2

17 � 7 1/2JJ

Tire size, pressure and wheel size:

∗1: Vehicles with steel wheels∗2: Vehicles with aluminum wheels

NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacingwheels), see “Checking tire pressure” through “Aluminum wheel precau-tions”, pages 332 through 337 in Section 7–2.

Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):110 (11.5, 83)

Fuses

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

357


Instrument panel

4. AC115V INV 15 A: AC inverter

5. FR FOG 15 A: Front fog lights

6. OBD 7.5 A: On–board diagnosis sys-tem

7. HEAD (LO RH) 10 A: Right–handheadlight (low beam)

8. HEAD (LO LH) 10 A: Left–hand head-light (low beam)

9. HEAD (HI RH) 10 A: Right–hand head-light (high beam)

10. HEAD (HI LH) 10 A: Left–hand head-light (high beam)

11. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system

12. HEATER NO.2 7.5 A: Air conditioningsystem

13. AIRSUS NO.2 10 A: Rear height con-trol air suspension

14. SEAT HEATER 25 A: Seat heaters

15. DEFOG 30 A: Rear window defogger,multiport fuel injection system/sequen-tial multiport fuel injection system

16. MIR HEATER 10 A: Outside rear viewmirror heater

17. DOME 10 A: Interior light, personallights, wireless remote control system,door courtesy lights, rear seat audiosystem, gauge and meter, vanity lights,instrument panel lights, running boardlights, multiplex communication system

18. RADIO NO.1 20 A: Audio system, nav-igation system

19. ECU–B 10 A: Anti–lock brake system,navigation system, traction control sys-tem (two–wheel drive models), activetraction control system (four–wheeldrive models), vehicle stability controlsystem, air conditioning system, multi-plex communication system, theft deter-rent system

20. ALT–S 7.5 A: Charging system

21. HORN 10 A: Horns

22. A/F HEATER 15 A: No circuit

23. TRN–HAZ 15 A: Turn signal lights,emergency flashers

24. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system

25. EFI 20 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem

26. DR/LCK 20 A: Power door lock system

27. TOWING 30 A: Towing converter

28. RADIO NO.2 20 A: Audio system

29. IGN 10 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, anti–lock brake system, trac-tion control system (two–wheel drivemodels), active traction control system(four–wheel drive models), vehicle sta-bility control system, stop light, meterand gauge

30. SRS 10 A: SRS airbag system

31. GAUGE 7.5 A: Meter and gauge

32. STA NO.2 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injec-tion system/sequential multiport fuel in-jection system

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

358


33. FR WIP–WSH 30 A: Windshield wipersand washer

34. 4WD 20 A: Four–wheel drive controlsystem

35. D P/SEAT 30 A: Driver’s power seat

36. P P/SEAT 30 A: Front passenger’spower seat

37. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets

38. RR WSH 15 A: Rear window washer,multiplex communication system

39. ECU–IG 10 A: Shift lock control sys-tem, power windows, anti–lock brakesystem, traction control system (two–wheel drive models), active tractioncontrol system (four–wheel drive mod-els), vehicle stability control system,electric moon roof, multiplex commu-nication system, theft deterrent system,rear height control air suspension

40. IG1 15 A: Anti–lock brake system,traction control system (two–wheeldrive models), active traction controlsystem (four–wheel drive models), ve-hicle stability control system, air condi-tioning system, charging system, rearwindow defogger, back–up lights, turnsignal lights, emergency flashers, seatheaters, AC inverter, instrument panellight control, auto anti–glare inside rearview mirror, SRS airbag system

41. STA 7.5 A: No circuit

42. SECU/HORN 10 A: Theft deterrent sys-tem

43. TAIL 10 A: Tail lights, license platelights, parking lights, instrument panellight control, multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system, instrument panel lights,meter and gauge, grove box light

44. ACC 7.5 A: Power outlets, outside rearview mirrors, audio system, navigationsystem, rear seat audio system, shiftlock control system, instrument panellights

45. CIG 10 A: No circuit

Fuses (type B)

46. HEATER 50 A: Air conditioning system

47. AIRSUS 50 A: Rear height control airsuspension

48. AM1 50 A: All components in “ACC”,“CIG”, “IG1”, “ECU–IG”, “FR WIP–WSH”, “RR WIP”, “RR–WSH”, “4WD”,and “STA” fuses

49. TOWING BRK 30 A: Trailer brake con-troller

50. J/B 50 A: All components in “PWROUTLET”, “D P/SEAT”, “P P/SEAT”,“POWER”, “TAIL” and “SECU/HORN”fuses

51. BATT CHG 30 A: Trailer sub battery

52. TOWING 40 A: Trailer lights (taillights)

53. ABS MTR 40 A: Anti–lock brake sys-tem, traction control system (two–wheeldrive models), active traction controlsystem (four–wheel drive models), ve-hicle stability control system

54. AM2 30 A: Starter system, “IGN”,“GAUGE”, “STA NO.2” and “SRS” fuses

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

359


55. ABS SOL 50 A: Anti–lock brake sys-tem, traction control system (two–wheeldrive models), active traction controlsystem (four–wheel drive models), ve-hicle stability control system

56. POWER 30 A: Power windows, electricmoon roof

Fuses (type C)

57. ALT 140 A: All components in “AM2”,“ALT–S”, “DR/LCK”, “TRN–HAZ”,“HORN”, “RADIO NO.2”, “EFI”,“TOWING”, “ABS MTR”, “ABS SOL”and “ETCS” fuses

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

360


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

361


REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.OWNERS AND UNIFORM TIRE QUALITYGRADINGReporting safety defects for U.S. owners and uniformtire quality gradingReporting safety defects for U.S. owners 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uniform tire quality grading 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 9

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

362


If you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could cause acrash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately in-form the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) inaddition to notifying Toyota MotorSales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll–free: 1–800–331–4331).

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investiga-tion, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of ve-hicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or Toyota MotorSales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may ei-ther call the Auto Safety Hotlinetoll–free at 1–800–424–9393 (or366–0123 in Washington, D.C.area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S.Department of Transportation,Washington, D.C. 20590. You canalso obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety from the Hot-line.

This information has been prepared in ac-cordance with regulations issued by theNational Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-tration of the U.S. Department of Trans-portation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyotavehicles with information on uniform tirequality grading.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer anyquestions you may have as you read thisinformation.

DOT quality grades—All passenger cartires must conform to Federal SafetyRequirements in addition to thesegrades. Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder and maximumsection width. For example: Treadwear200 Traction AA Temperature A

Reporting safety defects forU.S. owners Uniform tire quality grading

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

363


Treadwear— The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on the wear rateof the tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified government testcourse. For example, a tire graded 150would wear one and a half (1–1/2) timesas well on the government course as atire graded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and may de-part significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service prac-tices and differences in road characteris-tics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C— The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,B, and C, and they represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as mea-sured under controlled conditions on spe-cified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may havepoor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned tothis tire is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not includecornering (turning) traction.

Temperature A, B, C— The temperaturegrades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissi-pate heat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tire to de-generate and reduce tire life, and exces-sive temperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds to a lev-el of performance which all passenger cartires must meet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of perfor-mance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades for thistire are established for a tire that is prop-erly inflated and not overloaded. Exces-sive speed, underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or in combina-tion, can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

364


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

1


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOverview of instruments and controlsInstrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster overview 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 1

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

2


1. Side vents

2. Side defroster outlets

3. Instrument cluster

4. Center vents

5. Personal lights

6. Electric moon roof switch

7. Garage door opener

8. Auxiliary boxes

9. Glove box

10. Automatic transmission selector lever

11. Power door lock switches

12. Power window switches

13. Seat heater switches

14. “HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch

15. Rear vents

16. Trash holder

17. Height select switch

18. “DAC” switch

19. Front cup holders

20. Tilt steering lock release lever

Instrument panel overview

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

3


21. Telescopic steering lock release lever

22. Parking brake pedal

23. Window lock switch

24. Power rear view mirror control switches

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

4


1. Instrument panel light control dial

2. Headlight, turn signal and front foglight switches

3. Audio remote control switches

4. Wiper and washer switches

5. Power back window switch

6. Car audio

7. Front passenger’s seat belt reminderlight

8. Engine immobiliser/theft deterrentsystem indicator light

9. Multi–information display

10. Emergency flasher switch

11. Air conditioning controls

12. Auxiliary box

13. Back window and rear view mirrordefogger switch

14. Four–wheel drive control switch knob(full–time four–wheel drive models) ormulti–mode control switch knob(multi–mode four–wheel drive models)

15. Ignition switch

16. Cruise control switch

17. Hood lock release lever

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

5


18. Fuel filler door opener

19. “TRAC OFF” switch

20. Center differential lock switch

21. Power outlet main switch

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

6


1. Trip meter reset button

2. Tachometer

3. Service reminder indicators andindicator lights

4. Speedometer

5. Fuel gauge

6. Low fuel level warning light

7. Engine coolant temperature gauge

8. Odometer and two trip meters

9. Odometer/two trip meter changeoverbutton

Instrument cluster overview

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

7


or

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

Brake system warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

Discharge warning light∗1

Anti–lock brake system warning light∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Open door warning light∗1

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

� Vehicle stability control system warninglight∗1

� Traction control system warning light∗1

(two–wheel drive models)

� Active traction control system warning light∗1

(four–wheel drive models)

� Downhill assist control system warninglight∗1 (four–wheel drive models)

� Hill–start assist control system warninglight∗1

Automatic transmission fluid temperaturewarning light∗1

Low windshield washer fluid level warninglight∗1 (for vehicles sold in Canada)

Engine immobiliser/theft deterrent systemindicator light

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

8


Cruise control indicator light∗5

Center differential lock indicator light∗3


Automatic transmission indicator lights(5–speed)

Traction control system off indicator light(two–wheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system off indicator light(four–wheel drive models)

Slip indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

Low speed four–wheel drive indicator light∗3


Downhill assist control system indicator light(four–wheel drive models)

Height control “OFF” indicator light∗4

Height control indicator lights

∗1: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers” on page 117 in Section 1–5.

∗2: If this light flashes, see “Four–wheel drive system” on page141 in Section 1–6.

∗3: If this light flashes, see “Four–wheel drive system” on page138 and on page 141 in Section 1–6.

∗4: If this light flashes, see “Rear height control air suspension”on page 158 in Section 1–6.

∗5: If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 164 inSection 1–6.

Headlight high beam indicator light

Automatic transmission indicator lights(4–speed)

Four–wheel drive indicator light∗2

(multi–mode four–wheel drive models)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

9


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSKeys and DoorsKeys 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine immobiliser system 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side doors 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power windows 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power back window 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back door 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft deterrent system 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank cap 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric moon roof 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 2

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

10


Your vehicle is supplied with the twokinds of keys.

1. Master keys (black)—These keys workin every lock. Your Toyota dealer willneed one of them to make a new keywith a built–in transponder chip.

2. Sub key (gray)—This key does notwork in the glove box.

A transponder chip for engine immobilisersystem has been placed in the head ofthe master and sub keys. These chips areneeded to enable the system to functioncorrectly, so be careful not to lose thesekeys. If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the systemor start the engine.

To protect items locked in the glove boxwhen using valet parking, leave the subkey with the attendant.

Since the side doors can be locked with-out a key, you should always carry aspare key in case you accidentally lockyour keys inside the vehicle.

NOTICE

When using a key containing a trans-ponder chip, observe the followingprecautions:

� When starting the engine, do notuse the key with a key ring restingon the key grip and do not pressthe key ring against the key grip.Otherwise the engine may not start,or may stop soon after it starts.

Keys

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

11


� When starting the engine, do notuse the key with other transponderkeys around (including keys of oth-er vehicles) and do not press otherkey plates against the key grip.Otherwise the engine may not start,or may stop soon after it starts. Ifthis happens, remove the key onceand then insert it again after remov-ing other transponder keys (includ-ing keys of other vehicles) from thering or while gripping or coveringthem with your hand to start theengine.

� Do not bend the key grip.

� Do not cover the key grip with anymaterial that cuts off electromagnet-ic waves.

� Do not knock the key hard againstother objects.

� Do not leave the key exposed tohigh temperatures for a long period,such as on the dashboard and hoodunder the direct sunlight.

� Do not put the key in water orwash it in an ultrasonic washer.

� Do not use the key with electromag-netic materials.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

12


KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by a Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend writing down the key num-ber and storing it in a safe place.

The engine immobiliser system is atheft prevention system. When you in-sert the key in the ignition switch, thetransponder chip in the key’s headtransmits an electronic code to the ve-hicle. The engine will start only whenthe electronic code in the chip corre-sponds to the registered ID code forthe vehicle.

The system is automatically set when thekey is removed from the ignition switch.The indicator light will start flashing toshow the system is set.

If any of the following indicator conditionsoccurs, contact your Toyota dealer.

� The indicator light stays on exceptwhen the theft deterrent system is set-ting or activating. (See “Theft deterrentsystem” on page 31 in this Section.)

� The indicator light does not start flash-ing when the key is removed from theignition switch.

� The indicator light flashes unsteady.

Engine immobiliser system

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

13


Inserting the registered key in the ignitionswitch automatically cancels the system,which enables the engine to start. Theindicator light will go off.

For your Toyota dealer to make you anew key with built–in transponder chip,your dealer will need your key numberand master key. However, there is a limitto the number of additional keys yourToyota dealer can make for you.

If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the sys-tem or start the engine.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas-semble the engine immobiliser sys-tem. If any unauthorized changes ormodifications are made, the properoperation of the system cannot beguaranteed.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZ RI–20BTYMADE IN JAPAN

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS–210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

14


LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turnit.

To lock: Turn the key forward.To unlock: Turn the key backward.

All the side doors and back door lock andunlock simultaneously with the driver’sdoor. In the driver’s door lock, turning thekey once will unlock the driver’s door andtwice in succession will unlock all the sidedoors and back door simultaneously.

This double key turning operation to un-lock all the side doors and back door canbe changed to a single key turning opera-tion. For details, contact your Toyota deal-er.

When any of the side doors and backdoor is unlocked with a key, the interiorlight, luggage compartment light, ignitionswitch light and running board lights (onsome models) will come on and remain onfor about 15 seconds before fading out.(For details, see “Interior light” on page105, “Luggage compartment light” on page107, “Ignition switch light” on page 108and “Running board lights” on page 108in Section 1–4.)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHINSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The front doors can be opened by pullingthe inside handles even if the lock knobsare in the locked position.

Side doors

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

15


CAUTION

Do not pull the inside handle of thefront doors while driving. The doorswill open and an accident may occur.Toyota strongly recommends that allchildren be placed in the rear seat ofthe vehicle.

Closing the door with the lock knob in thelock position will also lock the door. Becareful not to lock your keys in the ve-hicle.

The front doors cannot be locked if youleave the key in the ignition switch.

Driver’s side

Front passenger’s side

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHPOWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on thefront side. To unlock: Push the switch down on therear side.

Operating the switch simultaneously locksor unlocks all the side doors and backdoor.

If you do either of the following, no sidedoor or back door can be unlocked withthe power door lock switch.

� Lock all the side doors and back doorwith the key or wireless remote controltransmitter when all the side doors andback door are closed.

� Open the driver’s door or front passen-ger’s door and move the inside lockknobs of both front doors to the lockposition, then close the front doors.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

16


The power door lock switch can be resetin the following ways.

� Turn the ignition key to “ON”.

� Unlock all the side doors and backdoor with the key or wireless remotecontrol transmitter.

� Unlock the driver’s door or front pas-senger’s door with the inside lockknob, and then unlock all the doorsand back door with the power doorlock switch.

This unlocking protection with the powerdoor lock switch can be disabled. For de-tails, contact your Toyota dealer. REAR DOOR CHILD–PROTECTORS

Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”position as shown on the label.

This feature allows you to lock a reardoor so it can be opened from the outsideonly, not from inside. We recommend us-ing this feature whenever small childrenare in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doorsare closed and locked, especiallywhen small children are in the ve-hicle. Along with the proper use ofseat belts, locking the doors helpsprevent the driver and passengersfrom being thrown out from the ve-hicle during an accident. It also helpsprevent the doors from being openedunintentionally.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

17


You can set the following automaticdoor locking and unlocking functions.

(a) Locking linked with the shift posi-tion

All the side doors and back door arelocked automatically when the automatictransmission selector lever is moved outof the “P” position with the engine running(including ignition switch in the “ON” posi-tion) and all the side doors and back doorare closed. This function is the defaultsetting for new vehicles.

(b) Unlocking linked with the shift posi-tion

All the side doors and back door are un-locked automatically when the automatictransmission selector lever is moved tothe “P” position with the ignition switch inthe “ON” position.

(c) Locking linked with the vehiclespeed

All the side doors and back door arelocked automatically when the vehiclespeed reaches 20 km/h (12 mph) or high-er. However, if any of the side doors andback door is unlocked during driving, thisauto locking function will not operate untilthe unlocked door is opened once.

(d) Unlocking linked with opening thedriver’s door

All the side doors and back door are un-locked automatically when the driver’sdoor is opened within 10 seconds afterthe ignition switch is turned from “ON” tothe “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

SETTING THE FUNCTIONS

1. Close all the side doors and back door.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position.

3. Within 10 seconds after the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position;

� To set function (a)Push and hold the front of the powerdoor lock switch for 5 seconds with theautomatic transmission selector lever inthe “P” position.

� To set function (b)Push and hold the rear of the powerdoor lock switch for 5 seconds with theautomatic transmission selector lever inthe “P” position.

� To set function (c)Push and hold the front of the powerdoor lock switch for 5 seconds with theautomatic transmission selector lever inany position except “P”.

� To set function (d)Push and hold the rear of the powerdoor lock switch for 5 seconds with theautomatic transmission selector lever inany position except “P”.

All the side doors and back door are auto-matically lock and unlock when you re-lease the power door lock switch. Thisindicates that the function is set. If all theside doors and back door do not lock andunlock, the time the switch was held mayhave been too short or too long. Performthe procedure over again starting fromstep 1.

If you want to cancel a function, repeatthe procedure. Each time you perform theprocedure, the function is set or can-celled.

—Automatic door locking andunlocking functions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

18


Locking operation

Unlocking operation

The wireless remote control system isdesigned to lock or unlock all the sidedoors and back door, open the backwindow or activate the “PANIC” modefrom a distance within approximately 1m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THE SIDEDOORS AND BACK DOOR

To lock and unlock all the side doorsand back door, push the switches ofthe transmitter slowly and securely.

To lock: Push the “LOCK” switch. All theside doors and back door are locked si-multaneously. At this time one beep willbe heard, and the turn signal lights flashonce.

Check to see that all the side doors andback door are securely locked.

If any of the side doors or the back dooris not securely closed, locking cannot beperformed by the “LOCK” switch and abeep will sound continuously for 10 sec-onds. However, if the key is in the ignitionswitch, a beep will not sound.

To stop the buzzer, close all the sidedoors and back door securely or push the“UNLOCK” switch.

The buzzer can be disabled. For details,contact your Toyota dealer.

To unlock: Push the “UNLOCK” switchonce to unlock the driver’s door alone.Pushing the switch twice within 3 secondsunlocks all the side doors and back doorsimultaneously. Each time the “UNLOCK”switch is pushed, two beeps will be heard,and the turn signal lights flash twice.

This double switch operation to unlock allthe side doors and back door can bechanged to a single switch operation. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

When the “UNLOCK” switch is pressed,the interior light, luggage compartmentlight, ignition switch light and runningboard lights (on some models) will comeon and remain on for about 15 secondsbefore fading out. (For details, see “Interi-or light” on page 105, “Luggage compart-ment light” on page 107, “Ignition switchlight” on page 108 and “Running boardlights” on page 108 in Section 1–4.)

You have 30 seconds to open a door afterusing the wireless remote unlock feature.If a door is not opened by then, all theside doors and back door will be automati-cally locked again.

The timing for the automatic door lockfunction can be changed. For details, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

—Wireless remote control

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

19


If the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch is keptpressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-tion is not repeated. Release the switchand then push again.

The following adjustments can be made inthis system. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

� Cancelling the wireless door locking orunlocking function

� Cancelling the flash of the turn signallights

� Changing the volume of beep sound

OPENING THE BACK WINDOW

To open the back window, push theback window open switch of the trans-mitter for about 1 second. The windowwill fully open.

At this time, you can hear a beep.

If the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-tion, the back window cannot be openedby the back window open switch.

To open the back window with the key,see “Power back window” on page 26 inthis Section.

The back window opening program bywireless remote control can be changed ordisabled. For details, contact your Toyotadealer.

“PANIC” SWITCH

Pushing the “PANIC” switch blows thehorn intermittently and flashes theheadlights, tail lights and turn signallights, and turns on the interior andluggage compartment lights.

The “PANIC” switch is used to deter ve-hicle theft when you witness anyone at-tempting to break into or damage yourvehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stopalarm midway, push any of the switch onthe wireless remote control transmitter.You can also stop the alarm by turningthe ignition key from “LOCK” to the “ON”position.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

20


The “PANIC” mode does not work whenthe ignition key is in the “ON” position.

This alarm function can be disabled. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLTRANSMITTER

The wireless remote control transmitter isan electronic component. Observe the fol-lowing instructions in order not to causedamage to the transmitter.

� Do not leave the transmitter on placeswhere the temperature becomes highsuch as on the dashboard.

� Do not disassemble it.

� Avoid knocking it hard against otherobjects or dropping it.

� Avoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-trol transmitters for the same vehicle.Contact your Toyota dealer for detailedinformation.

If the wireless remote control transmitterdoes not actuate the doors, back windowor alarm, operate from a normal distance:

� Check for closeness to a radio trans-mitter such as a radio station or anairport which can interfere with normaloperation of the transmitter.

� The battery may have been consumed.Check the battery in the transmitter. Toreplace the battery, see following“REPLACING THE BATTERY”.

If you lose your transmitter, contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toavoid the possibility of theft, or an acci-dent. (See “If you lose your wireless re-mote control transmitter” on page 299 inSection 4.)

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

21


NOTICE:This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aClass B digital device, pursuant to Part15 of the FCC Rules. These limits aredesigned to provide reasonable protec-tion against harmful interference in aresidential installation. This equipmentgenerates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installedand used in accordance with the instruc-tions, may cause harmful interference toradio communications. However, there isno guarantee that interference will notoccur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interfer-ence to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning theequipment off and on, the user is en-couraged to try to correct the interfer-ence by one or more of the followingmeasures:

� Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna.

� Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

� Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

� Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio / TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

22


REPLACING THE BATTERY

For replacement, use a CR2016 lithiumbattery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-vent small children from swallowingthe removed transmitter battery orcomponents.

NOTICE

� When replacing the transmitter bat-tery, be careful not to lose the com-ponents.

� Replace only with the same orequivalent type recommended by aToyota dealer.

� Dispose of used batteries accordingto the local laws.

Replace the transmitter battery by follow-ing these procedures:

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open thetransmitter case.

2. Remove the discharged transmitter bat-tery.

NOTICE

Do not bend the terminals.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

23


3. Put a new transmitter battery with posi-tive (+) side up.

Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE

� Make sure the positive side andnegative side of the transmitter bat-tery should be faced correctly.

� Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause unexpectedrust.

� Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside of the transmitter, orit may interfere with proper opera-tion.

� Be careful not to bend the electrodeof the transmitter battery insertionand that dust or oils do not adhereto the transmitter case.

� Close the transmitter case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that thetransmitter operates properly. If the trans-mitter still does not operate properly, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

The windows can be operated with theswitch on each side door.

The power windows work when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

Key off operation: If both front doors areclosed, all the power windows work for 43seconds even after the ignition switch isturned off. It stops working when eitherfront door is opened.

The indicator light (“AUTO”) on the switchtells you the switch can be operated.

Power windows

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

24


OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW

Use the switch on the driver’s door.

Normal operation: The window moves aslong as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.To close: Lightly pull up the switch.

Automatic operation: Push the switchcompletely down or pull it completely up,and then release it. The window will fullyopen or close. To stop the window part-way, lightly move the switch in the oppo-site direction and then release it.

Jam protection function: During automat-ic closing operation or key off closing op-eration, the window stops and opens halfway if something gets caught between thewindow and window frame.

If the window receives a strong impact,this function may work even if nothing iscaught.

If the battery is disconnected or rundown, the power window may not operateautomatically and the jam protection func-tion will not function correctly after youreconnect, replace or recharge the battery.In any of these cases, you should normal-ize the power window.

To normalize the power window:

1. Push down the power window switchand lower the window halfway.

2. Pull up the switch until the windowcloses and hold the switch for a sec-ond.

Make sure that the window opens andcloses automatically. If the power windowcannot be operated properly, have itchecked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

� Never try jamming any part of yourbody to activate the jam protectionfunction intentionally.

� The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the window is fullyclosed.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

25


Windowlockswitch

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’WINDOWS

Use the switch on each passenger’sdoor or the switches on the driver’sdoor that control each passenger’s win-dow.

The window moves as long as you holdthe switch.

To open: Push down the switch.To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch onthe driver’s door, the passengers’ windowscannot be operated.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

26


CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, youmust do the following.

� Before you close the power win-dows, always make sure there isnobody around the power windows.You must also make sure theheads, hands and other parts of thebodies of all occupants are keptcompletely inside the vehicle. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in a closing window, itcould result in a serious injury.When anyone closes the power win-dows, make sure he or she oper-ates the windows safely.

� When small children are in the ve-hicle, never let them use the powerwindow switches without supervi-sion. Use the window lock switch toprevent them from making unex-pected use of the switches.

� Be sure to remove the ignition keywhen you leave your vehicle.

� Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the ignition key stillinserted. Otherwise, he/she coulduse the power window switches andget trapped in a window. Unat-tended person (particularly a smallchild) can be involved in a seriousaccident.

The back window can be operated withthe switch on the instrument panel orthe key operation in the back door key-hole.

You can open the back window when theback window wiper is working. At thattime, the wiper stops working until thewindow is closed again.

If the back window is not fully closed, theback window wiper, washer and defoggerwill not work. (See “Back window wiperand washer” on page 110 and “Back win-dow and outside rear view mirror defog-gers” on page 110 in Section 1–4.)

Power back window

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

27


If the battery is disconnected or rundown, the power back window may notoperate automatically and the jam protec-tion function will not function correctly af-ter you reconnect, replace or recharge thebattery. In any of these cases, you shouldnormalize the power back window with thepower back window switch.

To normalize the power back window:

1. Push the “�” (down) switch and lowerthe window halfway.

2. Push the “�” (up) switch until the win-dow closes and hold the switch for asecond.

Make sure that the window opens andcloses automatically. If the power backwindow cannot be operated properly, haveit checked by your Toyota dealer.

OPERATING FROM INSIDE

The ignition key must be in the “ON” posi-tion.

Normal operation: To open or close theback window, quickly push and release the“�” (down) or “�” (up) switch.

Automatic operation: To open or closethe back window, push and hold the “�”(down) or “�” (up) switch. The windowwill fully open or close. To stop the win-dow partway, push the switch on eitherthe “�” (down) or “�” (up) side briefly.

Key off operation: If both front doors areclosed, it works for 43 seconds even afterthe ignition switch is turned off. It stopsworking when either front door is opened.

Jam protection function: During automat-ic closing operation or key off closing op-eration, the window stops and opens halfway if something gets caught between thewindow and window frame.


CAUTION



If you push in the window lock switch onthe driver’s door, the back window cannotbe operated.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

28


OPERATING FROM OUTSIDE

The back window can be opened andclosed with the key operation in the backdoor keyhole.

To open: Turn the key fully counterclock-wise and hold it.

After the door is unlocked, the windowbegins to open. To stop the window part-way, release the key.

To close: Turn the key fully clockwise andhold it.

After the door is locked, the window be-gins to close. To stop the window partway,release the key.

This door key linked function can be dis-abled. For details, contact your Toyotadealer.

Jam protection function: During closingoperation, the window stops and openshalf way if something gets caught betweenthe window and window frame.


CAUTION


� Before you close the power backwindow, always make sure there isnobody around the power back win-dow. You must also make sure theheads, hands and other parts of thebodies of all occupants are keptcompletely inside the vehicle. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in a closing window, itcould result in a serious injury.When anyone closes the powerback window, make sure he or sheoperates the window safely.

� When small children are in the ve-hicle, never let them use the powerback window switch without super-vision. Use the window lock switchto prevent them from making unex-pected use of the switch.


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

29


� Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the ignition key stillinserted. Otherwise, he/she coulduse the power back window switchand get trapped in a window. Unat-tended person (particularly a smallchild) can be involved in a seriousaccident.

� Keep the back window closed whiledriving. This not only keeps theluggage from being thrown out butalso prevents exhaust gases fromentering the vehicle.



To open the back window with the wire-less remote control transmitter, see“—Wireless remote control” on page 18 inthis Section.

To open the back door, pull up the backdoor opener.

The back door can be opened when thevehicle is stopped.

If the back door opener does not operateexcept when the battery is disconnectedor run down, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the battery is disconnected or rundown, the back door does not open afteryou reconnect, replace or recharge thebattery. In any of these cases, you shouldnormalize the back door.

To normalize the back door, unlock it withthe key, remote control transmitter or pow-er door lock switch, see “Side doors” onpage 14 in this Section.

Make sure that the back door opens. Ifthe back door cannot be opened properly,have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

The back door can be locked or unlockedin the following ways.

� All the side doors and back door lockand unlock simultaneously with theback door. Insert the key into the key-hole, turn it clockwise to lock and turnit counterclockwise to unlock.

� Operate the power door lock switch.(See “Side doors” on page 14 in thisSection.)

� Operate the wireless remote control.(See “—Wireless remote control” onpage 18 in this Section.)

� All the side doors and back door arelocked and unlocked simultaneouslywith the driver’s door. (See “Sidedoors” on page 14 in this Section.)

If the battery terminal is disconnected andreconnected, the back door will be auto-matically locked. Be careful not to lockyour keys in the vehicle.

Back door

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

30


When all the side doors and back doorare unlocked simultaneously with a key,the interior light, luggage compartmentlight, ignition switch light and runningboard lights (on some models) will comeon and remain on for about 15 secondsbefore fading out. (For details, see “Interi-or light” on page 105, “Luggage compart-ment light” on page 107, “Ignition switchlight” on page 108 and “Running boardlights” on page 108 in Section 1–4.)

The back window can be opened andclosed with the key operation in the backdoor keyhole. (For details, see “Powerback window” on page 26 in this Section.) When closing the back door, the inside

strap can be used to make the reacheasier.

To close the back door, lower it and pressdown on it. After closing the back door,try pulling it up to make sure it is secure-ly closed.

Back door closer: When the back doorhas not been fully closed, it is automati-cally closed completely.

See “Luggage stowage precautions” onpage 253 in Section 2 for precautionswhen loading luggage.

CAUTION

� Keep the back window and backdoor closed while driving. This notonly keeps the luggage from beingthrown out but also prevents ex-haust gases from entering the ve-hicle.

� Careful attention is needed so asnot to get your fingers trapped asthe back door automatically closeswhen it has not been fully closed.

� Never allow a child to operate theback door.

NOTICE

� To avoid damage to the back doordampers, do not apply any force,paint or let any other foreign matteron them.

� Do not apply excessive force whenthe back door closer is operating.Otherwise, the back door closermay become defective.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

31


To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. Thehood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hoodis closed and securely locked. Other-wise, the hood may open unexpected-ly while driving and an accident mayoccur.

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up theauxiliary catch l ever and lift thehood.

Before closing the hood, check to see thatyou have not forgotten any tools, rags,etc. Then lower the hood and make sureit locks into place. If necessary, pressdown gently on the front edge to lock it.

To deter vehicle theft, the system isdesigned to sound an alarm if any ofthe side doors, back door or hood isforcibly unlocked or opened or the bat-tery terminal is disconnected and thenreconnected when the vehicle is locked.

The alarm blows the horn intermittentlyand flashes the headlights, tail lights andturn signal lights, and turns on the interiorand luggage compartment lights.

Hood Theft deterrent system

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

32


SETTING THE SYSTEM

1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”position and remove it.

The indicator light will start flashing whenthe key is removed from the ignitionswitch. (See “Engine immobiliser system”on page 12 in this Section for details.)

2. Have all passengers get out of thevehicle.

3. Close and lock all the side doors, backdoor and hood.

The indicator light will remain on when allthe side doors, back door and hood areclosed and locked.

The system will automatically be set after30 seconds. When the system is set, theindicator light will start flashing again.

4. After making sure the indicator lightstarts flashing, you may leave the ve-hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle whenyou set the system, because unlockingfrom the inside will activate the system.

CANCELING THE SYSTEM

The system will cancel under the any ofthe following conditions:

� Any of the side doors, back door orhood is opened.

� Any of the side doors or the back dooris unlocked.

� The key is inserted into the ignition.

� The battery terminal is reconnected.

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Activating the system

The system will sound the alarm underthe following conditions:

� If any of the side doors is unlocked oropened without the key or wireless re-mote control transmitter, or if the backdoor or hood is forcibly opened.

� If the battery terminal is disconnectedand then reconnected.

� If the ignition is hotwired.

The indicator light will come on when thesystem is activated.

If the alarm has been activated and thekey is not in the ignition switch, all theside doors and back door will re–lock au-tomatically.

After one minute, the alarm will automati-cally stop and the indicator light will startsflashing again.

Reactivating the alarm

Once set, the system automatically resetsthe alarm after the alarm stops.

The alarm will activate again under thesame circumstances described in“Activating the system”.

Stopping the alarm

The alarm will be stopped by the followingthese ways:

� Unlock any of the side doors or theback door with the key or wireless re-mote control transmitter.

� Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”to “ON” position.

These ways cancel the system at thesame time.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

33


If the battery becomes discharged due tothe vehicle being unused for a long time,etc., when the battery is recharged or re-placed, the system will give the alarm. Ifthis happens, immediately unlock any ofthe side doors or the back door with thekey or the wireless remote control trans-mitter, and the alarm will stop.

TESTING THE SYSTEM

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described above.The side doors and back door shouldbe locked with the key or wireless re-mote control transmitter. Be sure towait until the indicator light goes off orstarts flashing.

3. Unlock any side door from the inside.The system should activate the alarm.

4. Stopping the alarm as described above.

5. Repeat this operation for the otherdoors and hood. When testing thehood, also check that the system isactivated when the battery terminal isdisconnected and then reconnected.

If the system does not work properly,have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

This indicates that the fuel filler dooris on the left side of your vehicle.

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull thelever.

When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

� Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames when refueling.The fumes are flammable.

� When opening the cap, do not re-move the cap quickly. In hot weath-er, fuel under pressure could causeinjury by spraying out of the fillerneck if the cap is suddenly re-moved.

Fuel tank cap

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

34


2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turnthe cap counterclockwise by 90 de-grees (to the pressure point 1), andthen turn it an additional 30 degrees(to point 2). Pause slightly beforeremoving it.

Although a click will be heard as you turnthe cap to point 1, it does not indicatethat the cap can be removed.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swooshwhen the cap is opened.

3. The removed cap can be stored onthe back side of the fuel filler door.

Position the cap so that the hooks pointto the left and right or up and down, andset it in the receptacle on the back sideof the door.

When installing the cap, turn the capclockwise until you hear one click.When you hear the click, the cap isfully closed.

If the cap is not installed securely, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on.Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

CAUTION

� Make sure the cap is installed se-curely to prevent fuel sp illage inthe event of an accident.

� Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tankcap for replacement. It is designedto regulate fuel tank pressure.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

35


NOTICE

To prevent damage to the cap, ob-serve the following precautions.

� Apply force only in the turning di-rection to the cap. Do not pull orpry it.

� Do not tighten the cap further afteryou hear one click when installing.

Sliding operation

Tilting operation

To operate the moon roof, use theswitch beside the personal lights.

The moon roof works when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

The sun shade can be opened or closedby hand.

Sliding operation—

To open: Push the switch on the “SLIDEOPEN” side.

The roof will fully open automatically. Tostop the roof partway, push the switch oneither the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”side quickly.

When you quickly push and release theswitch, the moon roof will open while theswitch is being pushed and stop whenreleased.

The sun shade will be opened togetherwith the roof.

When the moon roof is opened fully, thedeflector will raise to reduce the enteringof the strong wind. The angle of the de-flector will be adjusted according to thevehicle speed.

To close: Push the switch on the “TILTUP” side.

Electric moon roof

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

36


The roof will fully close automatically. Tostop the roof partway, push the switch oneither the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”side quickly.

When you quickly push and release theswitch, the moon roof will close while theswitch is being pushed and stop whenreleased.

Tilting operation—

To tilt up: Push the switch on the “TILTUP” side.

The roof will fully tilt up automatically. Tostop the roof partway, push the switch oneither the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”side quickly.

When you quickly push and release theswitch, the moon roof will tilt up while theswitch is being pushed and stop whenreleased.

To tilt down: Push the switch on the“SLIDE OPEN” side.

The roof will fully tilt down automatically.To stop the roof partway, push the switchon either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”side quickly.

When you quickly push and release theswitch, the moon roof will tilt down whilethe switch is being pushed and stop whenreleased.

Key off operation: If both front doors areclosed, it works for 43 seconds even afterthe ignition switch is turned off. It stopsworking when either front door is opened.

Jam protection function:

� If something gets caught between themoon roof and frame during slide clos-ing operation, the moon roof stops andopens half way, and the deflector stopsand raises fully.

� If something gets caught between themoon roof and frame during tiltingdown operation, the moon roof stopsand opens fully.

If the moon roof receives a strong impact,this function may work even if nothing iscaught.

If the battery is disconnected or rundown, the moon roof may not operateautomatically and the jam protection func-tion will not function correctly after youreconnect, replace or recharge the battery.In any of these cases, you should normal-ize the moon roof.

To normalize the moon roof, push andhold the switch on the “TILT UP” side untilthe moon roof tilts all the way up andthen tilts down a little automatically.

Make sure that the moon roof opens andcloses automatically. If the moon roof can-not be operated properly, have it checkedby your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION


� While the vehicle is moving, alwayskeep the heads, hands and otherparts of the bodies of all occupantsaway from the roof opening. Other-wise, they could be seriously in-jured if the vehicle stops suddenlyor if the vehicle is involved in anaccident.

� Before you close the moon roof,always make sure there is nobodyaround the moon roof. You mustalso make sure nobody places hisor her head, hands and other partsof the body in the roof opening. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in the closing roof, it couldresult in a serious injury. Whenanyone closes the moon roof, firstmake sure it is safe to do so.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

37



� Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the ignition key stillinserted. Otherwise, he/she coulduse the moon roof switch and gettrapped in the roof opening. Unat-tended person (particularly a smallchild) can be involved in a seriousaccident.

� Never sit on top of the vehiclearound the roof opening.


� The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the moon roof is fullyclosed.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

38


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

39


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSSeats, Seat belts, Steering wheel and MirrorsSeats 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seats 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fold–down rear seats 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head restraints 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Armrest 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat heaters 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child restraint 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tilt steering wheel 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tilt and telescopic steering wheel 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside rear view mirrors 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti–glare inside rear view mirror 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto anti–glare inside rear view mirror 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear side–view mirrors 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun visors 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 3

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

40


While the vehicle is being driven, all ve-hicle occupants should have the seatbackupright, sit well back in the seat and prop-erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

� Do not drive the vehicle unless theoccupants are properly seated. Donot allow passengers to sit on topof a folded–down seatback, or inthe luggage compartment or cargoarea. Persons not properly seatedand/or properly restrained by seatbelts can be severely injured in theevent of emergency braking or acollision.

� During driving, do not allow pas-sengers to stand up or movearound between seats. Otherwise,severe injuries can occur in theevent of emergency braking or acollision.

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys withconsiderable force, and can causedeath or serious injury especially ifthe driver is very close to the airbag.The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbagis the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) ofinflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10in.) from your driver airbag providesyou with a clear margin of safety.This distance is measured from thecenter of the steering wheel to yourbreastbone. If you sit less than 250mm (10 in.) away now, you canchange your driving position in sever-al ways:

� Move your seat to the rear as faras you can while still reaching thepedals comfortably.

� Slightly recline the back of theseat. Although vehicle designs vary,many drivers can achieve the 250mm (10 in.) distance, even with thedriver seat all the way forward, sim-ply by reclining the back of theseat somewhat. If reclining the backof your seat makes it hard to seethe road, raise yourself by using afirm, non–slippery cushion, or raisethe seat if your vehicle has thatfeature.

� If your steering wheel is adjustable,tilt it downward. This points the air-bag toward your chest instead ofyour head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as rec-ommended by NHTSA above, whilestill maintaining control of the footpedals, steering wheel, and your viewof the instrument panel controls.

Seats

Front seats— —Front seat precautions (on vehicles with SRS front airbags)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

41


Front passenger seat

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag alsodeploys with considerable force, andcan cause death or serious injury es-pecially if the front passenger is veryclose to the airbag. The front passen-ger seat should be as far from theairbag as possible with the seatbackadjusted, so the front passenger sitsupright.

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed inthe driver and front passenger seats.Observe the following precautions.

� Do not lean against the front doorwhen the vehicle is in use, sincethe side airbag inflates with consid-erable speed and force. Otherwise,you may be killed or seriously in-jured.

� Do not use seat accessories whichcover the area where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of front seatsequipped with side airbags. Suchchanges may prevent the side air-bags from activating correctly, dis-able the system or cause the sideairbags to inflate accidentally, re-sulting in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

� Adjustments should not be madewhile the vehicle is moving, as theseat may unexpectedly move andcause the driver to lose control ofthe vehicle.

� When adjusting the seat, be carefulthat the seat does not hit a passen-ger or luggage.

� After adjusting the seat position, re-lease the lever and try sliding theseat forward and backward to makesure it is locked in position.

� After adjusting the seatback, pushyour body back against the seat tomake sure the seat is locked inposition.

� Do not put objects under the seats.Otherwise, the objects may interferewith the seat–lock mechanism orunexpectedly push up the seat posi-tion adjusting lever and the seatmay suddenly move, causing thedriver to lose control of the vehicle.

—Front seat precautions (on vehicles with SRS sideairbags) —Seat adjustment precautions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

42


� While adjusting the seat, do not putyour hands under the seat or nearthe moving parts. Otherwise, yourhands or fingers may be caught andinjured.

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull itup. Then slide the seat to the desiredposition with slight body pressure andrelease the lever.

2. SEAT CUSHION ANGLE ADJUSTINGKNOB

To change the angle of the seat cush-ion on the front side, turn the knobeither way.

3. SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING LEVER

To change the height of the seat, pullup or push down the lever.

4. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGLEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.Then lean back to the desired angleand release the lever.

—Adjusting front seats(manual seat)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

43


CAUTION

To reduce the risk of sliding underthe lap belt during a collision, avoidreclining the seatback any more thanneeded. The seat belts provide maxi-mum protection in a frontal or rearcollision when the driver and the pas-senger are sitting up straight andwell back in the seats. If you arereclined, the lap belt may slide pastyour hips and apply restraint forcesdirectly to the abdomen. In the eventof a frontal collision, the more theseat is reclined, the greater the riskof personal injury.

5. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORTADJUSTING SWITCH

Push the control switch on either side.

The amount of lumber support will changewhile the switch is pushed.

1. DRIVER’S SEAT: SEAT POSITION,SEAT CUSHION ANGLE AND SEATHEIGHT ADJUSTING SWITCH

PASSENGER’S SEAT: SEAT POSITIONADJUSTING SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desireddirection.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat atthat position.

Do not place anything under the frontseats, as this might interfere with the seatmovement.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGSWITCH

Move the control switch in the desireddirection.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat-back at that position.

—Adjusting front seats (powerseat)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

44


CAUTION

To reduce the risk of sliding underthe lap belt during a collision, avoidreclining the seatback any more thanneeded. The seat belts provide maxi-mum protection in a frontal or rearcollision when the driver and the pas-senger are sitting up straight andwell back in the seats. If you arereclined, the lap belt may slide pastyour hips and apply restraint forcesdirectly to the abdomen. In the eventof a frontal collision, the more theseat is reclined, the greater the riskof personal injury.

3. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORTADJUSTING SWITCH

Push the control switch on either side.

The amount of lumber support will changewhile the switch is pushed.

1. Remove the head restraint. Hold thecenter of the lever and pull it up.Then slide the seat further forwardthan the front–most lock position.

2. Pull the seatback angle adjusting le-ver to unlock and push down theseatback.

When returning the seatback upright, becareful not to make yourself hit by theseatback which will bound with consid-erable spring force.

After returning the seat to its originalposition, be certain to replace the headrestraint.

—Flattening seatbacks (manual seat)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

45


CAUTION

� Do not allow passengers to ride onthe flattened seat while driving; usethe seat in the normal position.

� After putting back the seat, trypushing the seat and seatback for-ward and rearward to make sure itis secured in place. Be certain toreplace head restraint.

1. Remove the head restraint. Push theseat position adjusting switch for-ward to slide the seat further for-ward than the front–most position.

2. Move the seatback angle adjustingswitch backward to flatten the seat-back.

After returning the seat to its originalposition, be certain to replace the headrestraint.

—Flattening seatbacks (power seat)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

46


CAUTION

� Do not allow passengers to ride onthe flattened seat while driving; usethe seat in the normal position.

� After putting back the seat, trypushing the seat and seatback for-ward and rearward to make sure itis secured in place. Be certain toreplace head restraint.

BEFORE FOLDING DOWN REAR SEAT

Stow the rear center seat belt buckle asshown in the illustration.

This prevents the seat belt buckle fromfalling out when you fold the seatback.

NOTICE

The seat belt buckle must be stowedbefore you fold the seatback.

If you are using a trash holder, lowerit.

Fold–down rear seats

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

47


1. Lower the head restraint to the lowe-st position.

2. Swing the bottom cushion up bypulling the lock rel ease strap.

If desired, each bottom cushion may beswung up separately.

3. Push the lock release button andfold down the seatback.

This will enlarge the luggage compartmentas far as the raised seat cushion. See“Luggage stowage precautions” on page253 in Section 2 for precautions whenloading luggage.

If desired, each seatback may be foldedseparately.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

48


WHEN RETURNING THE SEATBACK

If you cannot raise the seatback be-cause of the locked seat belt, do nottry it forcibly. Release the lock of theseat belt in the following way. Push inthe lower front edge of the seatbackcushion to slacken the seat belt (1) andlet the seat belt retract a little (2).

CAUTION

When returning seats to their originalposition, observe the following pre-cautions in order to prevent personalinjury in a collision or s udden stop:

� Make sure the seatback is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatback.Failure to do so will prevent theseat belt from operating properly.

� Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatbackand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.

� Make sure the bottom cushion issecurely locked by trying to pull upthe edge of the cushion near thelock release straps.

� Make sure to arrange the buckles ofthe seat belts in their proper posi-tion and be ready to use.

Front

Rear

Head restraints

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

49


For your safety and comfort, adjust thehead restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up.To lower: Push it down while pressing thelock release button.

Front head restraints—You can also movethe head restraint forward or backward. Ifsuch adjustment is desired, pull or pushthe base of the head restraint.

Rear head restraints—When an occupantsits on the rear seat, always pull up therear head restraint to the lock position.

The head restraint is most effective whenit is close to your head. Therefore, usinga cushion on the seatback is not recom-mended.

CAUTION

� Adjust the center of the head re-straint so that it is closest to thetop of your ears.

� After adjusting the head restraint,make sure it is locked in position.

� Do not drive with the head re-straints removed.

To use the armrest, pull it out asshown above.

This armrest is equipped with a cup hold-er and tray. (For details, see “Rear cupholders and tray” on page 232 in Section1–9.)

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest,avoid putting heavy loads on it.

To turn on the seat heater, move thedial forward (“L” dial for the left frontseat and “R” dial for the right frontseat). At this time, the indicator lightwill illuminate to indicate the seat heat-er is operating.

Move the dial forward or backward to ad-just to the desired temperature.

To turn it off, move the dial backwarduntil it stops.

When the seat heater is not in use, movethe dial fully backward.

The key must be in the “ON” position tooperate seat heaters.

Armrest Seat heaters

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

50


CAUTION

Occupants must use caution when op-erating the seat heater because itmay make them feel too hot or causeburns at low temperatures (erythema,varicella). Use extra caution for;

� Babies, small children, elderly per-sons, sick persons or handicappedpersons

� Persons who have delicate skin

� Persons who are exhausted

� Persons who have taken alcohol ordrugs which induce sleep (sleepingdrug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat overheating, donot use the seat heater with a blan-ket, cushion, or other insulating ob-jects which cover the seat.

NOTICE

� Do not put unevenly weighed ob-jects on the seat and do not sticksharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)into the seat.

� When cleaning the seats, do notuse organic substances (paint thin-ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,etc.). They may damage the heaterand seat surface.

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, turn the system offwhen the engine is not running.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver andpassengers in the vehicle be properly re-strained at all times with the seat beltsprovided. Failure to do so could increasethe chance of injury and/or the severity ofinjury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicleare designed for people of adult size,large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap-propriate for the child until the child be-comes large enough to properly wear thevehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”on page 73 in this Section for details.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. According to accidentstatistics, the child is safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seat than in thefront seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, theseat belts should be worn properly. If anaccident occurs and the seat belts are notworn properly, the force of the rapid infla-tion of the airbag may cause death orserious injury to the child.

Seat belts——Seat belt precautions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

51


Do not allow the child to stand up orkneel on either rear or front seats. Anunrestrained child could suffer serious in-jury or death during emergency braking ora collision. Also do not let the child sit onyour lap. It does not provide sufficientrestraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Ask your doctor forspecific recommendations. The lap beltshould be worn securely and as low aspossible over the hips and not on thewaist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-ry, first check with your doctor for specificrecommendation.

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seatsproperly wearing their seat beltswhenever the vehicle is moving.Otherwise, they are much more likelyto suffer serious bodily injury ordeath in the event of sudden brakingor a collision.

When using the seat belts, observethe following:

� Use the belt for only one person ata time. Do not use a single belt fortwo or more people—even children.

� Avoid reclining the seatbacks toomuch. The seat belts provide maxi-mum protection when the seatbacksare in the upright position. (Referto the seat adjustment instructions.)

� Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. Take care thatthey do not get caught or pinchedin the seat or side doors.

� Inspect the belt system periodically.Check for cuts, fraying, and looseparts. Damaged parts should be re-placed. Do not disassemble ormodify the system.

� Keep the belts clean and dry. Ifthey need cleaning, use a mild soapsolution or lukewarm water. Neveruse bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-ers—they may severely weaken thebelts. (See “Cleaning the interior”on page 305 in Section 5.)

� Replace the belt assembly (includ-ing bolts) if it has been used in asevere impact. The entire assemblyshould be replaced even if damageis not obvious.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

52


Adjust the seat as needed (front seatsonly) and sit up straight and well backin the seat. To fasten your belt, pull itout of the retractor and insert the tabinto the buckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjuststo your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during asudden stop or on impact. It also maylock if you lean forward too quickly. Aslow, easy motion will allow the belt toextend, and you can move around freely.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of theretractor, firmly pull the belt and releaseit. You will then be able to smoothly pullthe belt out of the retractor.

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-pletely extended and is then retractedeven slightly, the belt is locked in thatposition and cannot be extended. This fea-ture is used to hold the child restraintsystem securely. (For details, see “Childrestraint” on page 73 in this Section.) Tofree the belt again, fully retract the beltand then pull the belt out once more.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the belt is not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed. It cannotprotect an adult occupant or yourchild from injury.

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulderanchor—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position toyour size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up.To lower: Push in the lock release buttonand slide the anchor down.

After adjustment make sure the anchor islocked in position.

—Front and rear seat belts

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

53


CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofyour shoulder. The belt should bekept away from your neck, but notfalling off your s houlder. Failure todo so could reduce the amount ofprotection in an accident and causeserious injuries in a collision.

Take upslack

Too high

Keep as low onhips as possible

Adjust the position of the lap andshoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possibleon your hips—not on your waist, then ad-just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulderportion upward through the latch plate.

CAUTION

� Both high–positioned lap belts andloose–fitting belts could cause seri-ous injuries due to sliding underthe lap belt during a collision orother unintended result. Keep thelap belt positioned as low on hipsas possible.

� For your safety, do not place theshoulder belt under your arm.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

54


To release the belt, press the buckle–re-lease button and allow the belt to re-tract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pullit out and check for kinks or twists. Thenmake sure it remains untwisted as it re-tracts.

The rear center seat belt buckle can bestowed when not in use.

Seat belt buckle must be stowed beforeyou fold the seat back. (See “Fold–downrear seats” on page 46 in this Section.)

If your seat belts cannot be fastened se-curely because they are not long enough,a personalized seat belt extender is avail-able from your Toyota dealer free ofcharge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer sothat the dealer can order the proper re-quired length for the extender. Bring theheaviest coat you expect to wear for prop-er measurement and selection of length.Additional ordering information is availableat your Toyota dealer.

—Stowing rear center seat beltbuckle —Seat belt extender

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

55


CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,observe the following precautions.Failure to follow these instructionscould reduce the effectiveness of theseat belt restraint system in case ofvehicle accident, increasing thechance of personal injury.

� Remember that the extender pro-vided for you may not be safe whenused on a different vehicle, foranother person, or at a differentseating position than the one origi-nally intended. � If the seat belt extender has been

connected to the driver’s seat beltbuckle without wearing the seat beltwhen using the extender in thedriver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-bag system will judge that the driv-er wears the seat belt even if notwearing it. In this case, the driver’sairbag may not activate correctly,causing death or serious injury inthe event of collision. Be sure towear the seat belt with the seat beltextender.

� Be sure to wear the seat belt with-out the seat belt extender if youcan fasten the seat belt without theextender.

� Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

56


To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the tab into the seat beltbuckle so that the “PRESS” signs onthe buckle–release buttons of the ex-tender and the seat belt are both facingoutward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press onthe buckle–release button on the extender,not on the seat belt. This helps preventdamage to the vehicle interior and extend-er itself.

When not in use, remove the extenderand store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the seat belt extender is nottwisted.


� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed. It cannotprotect an adult occupant or yourchild from injury.

The driver and front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioners are designed to beactivated in response to a severe fron-tal impact.

When the airbag sensor detects the shockof a severe frontal impact, the front seatbelts are quickly drawn back in by theretractors so that the belts snugly restrainthe front seat occupants.

The front seat belt pretensioners are acti-vated even with no passenger in the frontseat.

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air-bags may not operate together in case ofcollisions at a certain speeds and angles.

—Front seat beltpretensioners

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

57


This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the front seat belt pretensionersare operating properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat beltbuckle switch, front seat belt pretensionerassemblies, inflators, warning light, inter-connecting wiring and power sources. (Fordetails, see “Service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers” on page 117 in Sec-tion 1–5.)

The front seat belt pretensioner systemmainly consists of the following compo-nents and their locations are shown in theillustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. Front seat belt pretensioner assemblies

4. Airbag sensor assembly

The front seat belt pretensioners are con-trolled by the airbag sensor assembly. Theairbag sensor assembly consists of a saf-ing sensor and airbag sensor.

When the front seat belt pretensioners areactivated, an operating noise may beheard and a small amount of smoke–likegas may be released. This gas is harm-less and does not indicate that a fire isoccurring.

Once the front seat belt pretensionershave been activated, the seat belt retrac-tors remain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or openthe front seat belt pretensioner as-semblies, airbag sensor or surround-ing area or wiring. Doing so maycause sudden operation of the frontseat belt pretensioners or disable thesystem, which could result in deathor serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious inju-ries. Consult your Toyota dealerabout any repairs and modifications.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

58


NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of thefront seat belt pretensioners in somecases.

� Installation of electronic devicessuch as a mobile two–way radio,cassette tape player or compactdisc player

� Repairs on or near the front seatbelt retractor assemblies

� Modification of the suspension sys-tem

� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure or con-sole

This front seat belt pretensioner systemhas a service reminder indicator to informthe driver of operating problems. If any ofthe following conditions occurs, thisindicates a malfunction of the airbags orpretensioners. Contact your Toyota dealeras soon as possible to service thevehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or the light remains on.

� The light comes on or flashes whiledriving.

� If either front seat belt does not retractor cannot be pulled out due to a mal-function or activation of the relevantfront seat belt pretensioner.

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible:

� The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe front seat belt pretensioners to op-erate.

� Either front seat belt pretensioner as-sembly or surrounding area isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

59


The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) front airbags are designed to pro-vide further protection for the driverand front passenger in addition to theprimary safety protection provided bythe seat belts.

In response to a severe frontal impact,the SRS front airbags work together withthe seat belts to help reduce injury byinflating. The SRS front airbags help toreduce injuries mainly to the driver’s orfront passenger’s head or chest caused bydirectly hitting the steering wheel or dash-board. The front passenger airbag is acti-vated even with no passenger in the frontseat.

Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crashsensing and diagnostic module, which willrecord the use of the seat belt restraintsystem by the driver and front passengerwhen the SRS front airbags are inflated.

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who istoo close to the steering wheel ordashboard during airbag deploymentcan be killed or seriously injured.Toyota strongly recommends that:

� The driver sit as far back as pos-sible from the steering wheel whilestill maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

� The front passenger sit as far backas possible from the dashboard.

� All vehicle occupants be properlyrestrained using the available seatbelts.

� If the seat belt extender has beenconnected to the driver’s seat beltbuckle without wearing the seat beltwhen using the extender in thedriver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-bag system will judge that the driv-er wears the seat belt even if notwearing it. In this case, the driver’sairbag may not activate correctly,causing death or serious injury inthe event of collision. Be sure towear the seat belt with the seat beltextender.

SRS driver airbag and frontpassenger airbag

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

60


This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS airbags are operatingproperly.


The SRS front airbags are designed todeploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-sions where the magnitude and durationof the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle exceeds the designed thresholdlevel.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if theseverity of the impact is above the de-signed threshold level, comparable to anapproximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collisionwhen the vehicle has the impact straightinto a fixed barrier that does not move ordeform.

However, this threshold velocity will beconsiderably higher if the vehicle strikesan object, such as a parked vehicle orsign pole, which can move or deform onimpact, or if the vehicle is involved in anunderride collision (e.g. a collision inwhich the front of the vehicle “underrides”,or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisionswhere the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle is very close to the designed thresh-old level, the SRS front airbags and theseat belt pretensioners may not activatetogether.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are generally notdesigned to inflate if the vehicle is in-volved in a side or rear collision, if itrolls over, or if it is involved in a low–speed frontal collision. But, when ever acollision of any type causes sufficientforward deceleration of the vehicle, de-ployment of the SRS front airbags mayoccur.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

61


Hitting a curb, edgeof pavement orhard material

Falling into orjumping overa deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deployif a serious impact occurs to the under-side of your vehicle. Some examplesare shown in the illustration.

The SRS airbag system mainly consists ofthe following components, and their loca-tions are shown in the illustration.

1. Front airbag sensors


3. Airbag module for front passenger (airbag and inflator)

4. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

5. Driver’s seat position sensor


7. Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)

The airbag sensor assembly consists of asafing sensor and airbag sensor.

The airbag sensors constantly monitor theforward deceleration of the vehicle. If animpact results in a forward decelerationbeyond the designed threshold level, thesystem triggers the airbag inflators. At thistime a chemical reaction in the inflatorsvery quickly fills the airbags with non–tox-ic gas to help restrain the forward motionof the occupants. The airbags then quicklydeflate, so that there is no obstruction ofthe driver’s vision should it be necessaryto continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce aloud noise and release some smoke andresidue along with non–toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can physically andsafely exit the vehicle after a collision,you should do so at the first opportunity.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

62


Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, primarily to the head and chest, itmay also cause other, less severe injuriesto the face, chest, arms and hands. Theseare usually in the nature of minor burnsor abrasions and swelling, but the force ofa deploying airbag can cause more seri-ous injuries, especially if an occupant’shands, arms, chest or head are in closeproximity to the airbag module at the timeof deployment. This is why it is importantfor the occupant to: avoid placing anyobject or part of the body between theoccupant and the airbag module; sitstraight and well back into the seat; wearthe available seat belt properly; and sit asfar as possible from the airbag module,while still maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheelhub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hotfor several minutes after deployment, sodo not touch! The airbags inflate onlyonce. The windshield may be damaged byabsorbing some of the force of the inflat-ing airbag.

CAUTION

� The SRS airbag system is designedonly as a supplement to the prima-ry protection of the driver side andfront passenger side seat belt sys-tems. The front seat occupants canbe killed or seriously injured by theinflating airbags if they do not wearthe available seat belts properly.During sudden braking just beforea collision, an unrestrained driveror front passenger can move for-ward into direct contact with orclose proximity to the airbag whichmay then deploy during the colli-sion. To ensure maximum protectionin an accident, the driver and allpassengers in the vehicle mustwear their seat belts properly. Wear-ing a seat belt properly during anaccident reduces the chances ofdeath or serious injury or beingthrown out of the vehicle. Forinstructions and precautions con-cerning the seat belt system, see“Seat belts” on page 50 in this Sec-tion.

� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing front airbag. An infant or childwho is too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seat of the vehicle and proper-ly restrained. The rear seat is thesafest for infants and children. Forinstructions concerning the installa-tion of a child restraint system, see“Child restraint” on page 73 in thisSection.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

63


� Never install a rear–facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat because the force of therapid inflation of the front passen-ger airbag can cause death or seri-ous injury to the child.

Move seatfully back

� A forward–facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to beinstalled on the front passengerseat only when it is unavoidable.Always move the seat as far backas possible, because the force ofthe deploying front passenger air-bag could cause death or seriousinjury to the child.

� On vehicles with side airbags andcurtain shield airbags, do not allowthe child to lean against the dooror around the door even if the childis seated in the child restraint sys-tem. It is dangerous if the side air-bag and curtain shield airbag in-flate, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.

� For instructions concerning theinstallation of a child restraint sys-tem, see “Child restraint” on page73 in this Section.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

64


� Do not sit on the edge of the seator lean over the dashboard whenthe vehicle is in use, since thefront airbags inflate with consider-able speed and force. Otherwiseyou may be killed or seriously in-jured. Sit up straight and well backin the seat, and always use yourseat belt properly.

� Do not allow a child to stand up orto kneel on the front passengerseat, since the front airbag inflateswith considerable speed and force.Otherwise, the child may be killedor seriously injured.

� Do not hold a child on your lap orin your arms. Use a child restraintsystem in the rear seat. For instruc-tions concerning the installation ofa child restraint system, see “Childrestraint” on page 73 in this Sec-tion.

� Do not put objects or your pets onor in front of the dashboard orsteering wheel pad that houses thefront airbag system. They might re-strict inflation or cause death orserious injury as they are projectedrearward by the force of the deploy-ing airbags. Likewise, the driverand front passenger should nothold objects in their arms or ontheir knees.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

65


� Do not modify or remove any wir-ing. Do not modify, remove, strikeor open any components such asthe steering wheel pad, steeringwheel, column cover, dashboardnear the front passenger airbag,front passenger airbag or airbagsensor assembly. Doing so maycause sudden SRS front airbaginflation or disable the system,which could result in death or seri-ous injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepairs and modifications.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes can in-terfere with proper operation of theSRS front airbag system in somecases.



� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure, con-sole, steering column, steeringwheel or dashboard near the frontpassenger airbag

This SRS front airbag system has a ser-vice reminder indicator to inform the driverof operating problems. If either of the fol-lowing conditions occurs, this indicates amalfunction of the airbags. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible to ser-vice the vehicle.


� The light comes on while driving.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

66



� The SRS front airbags have been in-flated.

� The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS front airbags to inflate.

� The pad section of the steering wheelor dashboard (shaded in the illustra-tion) is scratched, cracked, or other-wise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) side airbags and curtain shield air-bags are designed to provide furtherprotection for the driver, front passen-ger and rear outside passengers inaddition to the primary safety protec-tion provided by the seat belts.

SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

67


In response to a severe side impact, theSRS side airbags and curtain shield air-bags work with the seat belts to helpreduce injury by inflating. The SRS sideairbags help to reduce injuries mainly tothe driver’s or front passenger’s chest andthe SRS curtain shield airbags help toreduce injuries mainly to the driver’s, frontpassenger’s or rear outside passenger’shead. The SRS side airbag and curtainshield airbag on the passenger side areactivated even with no passenger in thefront seat or rear seat.

The curtain shield airbags may activateeven when the side airbags are not acti-vated.

Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crashsensing and diagnostic module, which willrecord the use of the seat belt restraintsystem by the driver and front passengerwhen the SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags are inflated.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags inflate with considerableforce. To avoid potential death or se-rious injury when they inflate, thedriver, front passenger and rear out-side passengers must:

� Wear their seat belts properly.

� Remain properly seated with theirback upright and against the seat atall times.

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags are operating properly.


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

68


The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system may not inflate if thevehicle is subjected to a collision fromthe side at certain angles, or a collisionto the side of the vehicle body otherthan the passenger compartment asshown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags are designed to inflate when thepassenger compartment area suffers a se-vere impact from the side.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Vehicle rollover

Collision from the front

The SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags are not designed to inflate ifthe vehicle is involved in a front orrear collision, if it rolls over, or if it isinvolved in a low–speed side collision.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system consists mainly of the fol-lowing components, and their locations areshown in the illustration.


2. Curtain shield airbag modules(airbag and inflator)

3. Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)

4. Curtain shield airbag sensors

5. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

69


The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system is controlled by the airbagsensor assembly. The airbag sensor as-sembly consists of a safing sensor andairbag sensor.

In a severe side impact, the side andcurtain shield airbag sensor and/or thecurtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) theside airbag and curtain shield airbag inflat-ors and/or the curtain shield airbag inflat-ors. At this time a chemical reaction inthe inflators quickly fills the airbags withnon–toxic gas to help restrain the lateralmotion of the occupants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce afairly loud noise and release some smokeand residue along with non–toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This gas is nor-mally harmless; however, for those whohave delicate skin, it may cause a minorskin irritation. Be sure to wash off anyresidue as soon as possible to preventany potential skin irritation.

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, it may also cause minor burns orabrasions and swelling.

Front seats as well as parts of the frontpillar, and roof side may be hot for sever-al minutes, but the airbags themselves willnot be hot. The airbags are designed toinflate only once.

CAUTION

� The SRS side airbag and curtainshield airbag system is designedonly as a supplement to the prima-ry protection of the driver side, andfront and rear outside passengerside seat belt systems. To ensuremaximum protection in an accident,the driver and all passengers in thevehicle must wear their seat belts.Wearing a seat belt during an acci-dent reduces the chances of deathor serious injury or being thrownout of the vehicle. For instructionsand precautions concerning the seatbelt system, see “Seat belts” onpage 50 in this Section.

� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by a deployingairbag. An infant or child who istoo small to use a seat belt shouldbe properly secured using a childrestraint system. Toyota stronglyrecommends that all infants andchildren be placed in the rear seatof the vehicle and properly re-strained. The rear seat is the safestfor infants and children. For in-structions concerning the installa-tion of a child restraint system, see“Child restraint” on page 73 in thisSection.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

70


� Do not allow a child to lean his/herhead or any part of his/her bodyagainst the front door or the areaof the seat, front pillar or roof sidefrom which the side airbag and cur-tain shield airbag deploy even if he/she is seated in the child restraintsystem. It is dangerous if the sideairbag and curtain shield airbag in-flate, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.For instructions concerning theinstallation of a child restraint sys-tem, see “Child restraint” on page73 in this Section. � Do not lean against the door when

the vehicle is in use, since the sideairbag and curtain shield airbag in-flate with considerable speed andforce. Otherwise, you may be killedor seriously injured. Special careshould be taken especially whenyou have a small child in the ve-hicle.

� Sit up straight and well back in theseat, distributing your weight evenlyin the seat. Do not apply excessiveweight to the outer side of the frontseats with a side airbag, and to thefront pillar, rear pillar and roof siderail with a curtain shield airbag.

� Do not get your head closer to thearea where the side airbag and cur-tain shield airbag inflate, sincethese airbags inflate with consider-able speed and force. Otherwise,you may be killed or seriously in-jured. Special care should be takenespecially when you have a smallchild in the vehicle.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

71


� Do not allow a child to kneel on thepassenger seat facing the passen-ger’s side door, since the side air-bag and curtain shield airbag inflatewith considerable speed and force.Otherwise, the child may be killedor seriously injured.

� Do not attach a cup holder or anyother device or object on or aroundthe door. When the side airbag in-flates, the cup holder or any otherdevice or object will be thrown withgreat force or the side airbag maynot activate correctly, resulting indeath or serious injury. Likewise,the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

� Do not attach a microphone or anyother device or object around thepart where the curtain shield airbagactivates such as on the windshieldglass, side door glass, front andside pillars, roof side and assistgrips. When the curtain shield air-bag inflates, the microphone or oth-er device or object will be thrownwith great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

72


� Do not hook a hanger, heavy orsharp pointed objects on the coathook. If the curtain shield airbaginflates, those items will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly. When you hang clothes,hang them on the coat hook direct-ly.

� Do not use seat accessories whichcover the parts where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of front seats withside airbags. Such changes maydisable the system or cause theside airbags to inflate accidentally,resulting in death or serious injury.

� Do not disassemble or repair thefront pillar and roof side rail con-taining the curtain shield airbags.Such changes may disable the sys-tem or cause the curtain shield air-bags to inflate accidentally, result-ing in death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepairs and modifications.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system in some cases.



� Modification of the side structure ofthe passenger compartment

� Repairs made on or near the con-sole

This SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system has a service reminderindicator to inform the driver of operatingproblems. If either of the followingconditions occurs, this indicates amalfunction of the airbags. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.



’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

73



� The SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags have been inflated.

� The portion of the doors (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags to inflate.

� The surface of the seats with the sideairbag (shaded in the illustration) isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.

� The portion of the front pillars and roofside rail garnishes (padding) containingthe curtain shield airbags inside(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

Toyota strongly urges the use of childrestraint systems for children smallenough to use them.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.and Canada now require the use of achild restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” onpage 50 in this Section for details.

Child restraint——Child restraint precautions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

74


CAUTION

� For effective protection in automo-bile accidents and sudden stops, achild must be properly restrained,using a seat belt or child restraintsystem depending on the age andsize of the child. Holding a child inyour arms is not a substitute for achild restraint system. In an acci-dent, the child can be crushedagainst the windshield, or betweenyou and the vehicle’s interior.

� Toyota strongly urges use of aproper child restraint system whichconforms to the size of the child,and is put on the rear seat. Accord-ing to accident statistics, the childis safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

� Never install a rear–facing child re-straint system on the front seat. Inthe event of an accident, the forceof the rapid inflation of the airbagcan cause death or serious injury ifa rear–facing child restraint systemis installed on the front seat.



� Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

� Make sure that you have compliedwith all installation instructions pro-vided by the child restraintmanufacturer and that the system isproperly secured.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

75


A child restraint system for a smallchild or baby must itself be properlyrestrained on the seat with the lap por-tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You mustcarefully consult the manufacturer’sinstructions which accompany the childrestraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a childrestraint system following the manufactur-er’s instructions about the appropriate ageand size of the child for the child restraintsystem.

Install the child restraint system correctlyfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer of the system. Generaldirections are also provided under the fol-lowing illustrations.

The child restraint system should beinstalled on the rear seat. According toaccident statistics, the child is safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat thanin the front seat.

CAUTION

� Never install a rear–facing child re-straint system on the front seat. Inthe event of an accident, the forceof the rapid inflation of the airbagcan cause death or serious injury ifa rear–facing child restraint systemis installed on the front seat.



� After installing the child restraintsystem, make sure it is secured inplace following the manufacturer’sinstructions. If it is not restrainedsecurely, it may cause death or se-rious injury to the child in theevent of a sudden stop or accident.

When not using the child restraint system,keep it secured with the seat belt or placeit somewhere other than the passengercompartment. This will prevent it from in-juring passengers in the event of a sud-den stop or accident.

—Child restraint system

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

76


Child restraint systems are classified intothe following 3 types depending on thechild’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat(B) Convertible seat(C) Booster seat

Install the child restraint system followingthe instructions provided by its manufac-turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-curing the top strap of a child restraintsystem.

For instructions about how to use the an-chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” onpage 86 in this Section.

The child restraint lower anchorages ap-proved for your vehicle may also be used.See “—Installation with child restraint low-er anchorages” on page 88 in this Sec-tion.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

(C) Booster seat

—Types of child restraintsystem

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

77


(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat is used in rear–facingposition only.

CAUTION


� Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the rear seat if it interfereswith the lock mechanism of thefront seats. This can cause death orserious injury to the child and frontpassenger in case of sudden brak-ing or a collision.

� If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the rear rightseat.

—Installation with seat belt

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

78


1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the infant seat following theinstructions provided by its manufactur-er and insert the tab into the buckletaking care not to twist the belt. Keepthe lap portion of the belt tight.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt are not twisted.


� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, it cannot protect yourchild from injury. Contact yourToyota dealer immediately. Do notuse the child restraint system untilthe seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, makesure the belt is in the lock mode beforeletting the belt retract.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

79


3. While pressing the infant seat firmlyagainst the seat cushion and seatback,let the shoulder belt retract as far asit will go to hold the infant seat secure-ly.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-tem in different directions to be sureit is secure. Follow all the installationinstructions provided by its manufac-turer.

4. To remove the infant seat, press thebuckle–release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

80


(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat is used in forward–facing and rear–facing position depend-ing on the child’s age and size. Wheninstalling, follow the manufacturer’s in-structions about the applicable child’sage and size as well as directions forinstalling a child restraint system.

CAUTION


Move seatfully back


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

81




� If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the rear rightseat.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the convertible seat followingthe instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt. Keep the lap portion of the belttight.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

82


CAUTION



� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, it cannot protect yourchild from injury. Contact yourToyota dealer immediately. Do notuse the child restraint system untilthe seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted slightly, it cannot be ex-tended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

83


CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-tem in different directions to be sureit is secure. Follow all the installationinstructions provided by its manufac-turer.

4. To remove the convertible seat, pressthe buckle–release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

A booster seat is used in forward–fac-ing position only.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

84


Move seatfully back

CAUTION



1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Runthe lap and shoulder belt through oraround the booster seat and child fol-lowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctlyacross the child’s shoulder and that thelap belt is positioned as low as possibleon child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on page50 in this Section for details.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

85


CAUTION

� Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofchild’s shoulder. The belt should bekept away from child’s neck, butnot falling off child’s s houlder. Fail-ure to do so could reduce theamount of protection in an accidentand cause serious injuries in a col-lision.

� Both high–positioned lap belts andloose–fitting belts could cause seri-ous injuries due to sliding underthe lap belt during a collision orother unintended result. Keep thelap belt positioned as low on achild’s hips as possible.

� For child’s safety, do not place theshoulder belt under child’s arm.


� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent yourchild from properly latching the taband buckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, it cannot protect yourchild from injury. Contact yourToyota dealer immediately. Do notuse the child restraint seat until theseat belt is fixed.

2. To remove the child restraint system,press the buckle–release button and al-low the belt to retract.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

86


Follow the procedure below for a childrestraint system that requires the useof a top strap.

Anchor brackets

Symbol

Use the anchor brackets behind the rearseatbacks to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for eachrear seating position.

This symbol indicates the location of theanchor brackets.

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Remove the head restraint.

—Using a top strap

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

87


2. Raise the anchor bracket. 3. Fix the child restraint system withthe seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchorbracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-straint system, see “Child restraint” onpage 73 in this Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securelylatched, and check that the child re-straint system is secure by pushingand pulling it in different directions.Follow all the installation instructionsprovided by its manufacturer.

4. Replace the head restraint.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

88


Lower the anchor bracket when it is notin use.

Lower anchorages for the child restraintsystems complying with the FMVSS225or CMVSS210.2 specifications areinstalled in the rear seat.

The anchorages are installed in the clear-ance between the seat cushion and seat-back of both outside rear seats.

Child restraint systems complying with theFMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specificationcan be fixed to these anchorages. In thiscase, it is not necessary to fix the childrestraint system with a seat belt on thevehicle. Canada only

Type A

—Installation with childrestraint lower anchorages

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

89


Canada only

Type B

For owners in Canada

The symbol on a child restraint systemindicates the presence of a lower connec-tor system.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMINSTALLATION

Type A—

1. Widen the clearance between theseat cushion and seatback a littleand confirm the position of the low-er anchorages around the tag on theseat cushion.

2. Latch the hooks of lower straps ontothe anchorages and tighten the lowerstraps.

Type B—

1. Widen the clearance between theseat cushion and seatback a littleand confirm the position of the low-er anchorages around the tag on theseat cushion.

2. Latch the buckles onto the anchor-ages.

If your child restraint system has a topstrap, it should be anchored. (For theinstallation of the top strap, see “—Usinga top strap” on page 86 in this Section.)

For the installation details, refer to theinstruction manual equipped with eachproduct.

CAUTION

� When using the lower anchoragesfor the child restraint system, besure that there are no irregular ob-jects around the anchorages or thatthe seat belt is not caught.

� Push and pull the child restraintsystem in different directions to besure it is secure. Follow all theinstallation instructions provided byits manufacturer.


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

90


To change the steering wheel angle,hold the steering wheel, pull the lockrelease lever toward you, tilt the steer-ing wheel to the desired angle and re-lease the lever.

When the steering wheel is in a low posi-tion, it will spring up as you release thelock release lever.

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is moving. Doingso may cause the driver to mishan-dle the vehicle and an accident mayoccur resulting in death or seriousinjuries.

� After adjusting the steering wheel,try moving it up and down to makesure it is locked in position.

ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING WHEELTILT

To change the steering wheel angle,hold the steering wheel, pull the lockrelease lever toward you, tilt the steer-ing wheel to the desired angle and re-lease the lever.

When the steering wheel is in a low posi-tion, it will spring up as you release thelock release lever.

Tilt steering wheelTilt and telescopic steeringwheel

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

91


ADJUSTMENT OF TELESCOPICSTEERING COLUMN

To change the steering wheel length,push down the lock release lever, setthe steering wheel to the desired lengthand return the lever to its original posi-tion.

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is moving. Doingso may cause the driver to mishan-dle the vehicle and an accident mayoccur resulting in death or seriousinjuries.

� After adjusting the steering wheel,try moving it up and down or for-ward and rearward to make sure itis locked in position.

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the side of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the outsiderear view mirror on the passenger’s sidebecause it is a convex mirror. Any objectseen in a convex mirror will look smallerand farther away than when seen in a flatmirror.

On some models, when you push theback window defogger switch, the heaterpanels in the outside rear view mirrors willquickly clear the surface. (See “Back win-dow and outside rear view mirror defog-gers” on page 110 in Section 1–4.)

Outside rear view mirrors—

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

92


On some models, the outside rear viewmirrors are rain clearing mirrors that clearthe driver’s rear view when it rains. (Fordetails, see “Rain clearing mirrors” onpage 307 in Section 5.)

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle thevehicle and an accident may occurresulting in death or serious inju-ries.

� On some models, since the mirrorsurfaces can get hot, do not touchthem when the defogger switch ison.

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror tobe adjustedPush the switch to “L” (left) or “R”(right).

2. Control switch—To move the mir-ror Push the switch in the desireddirection.

Mirrors can be adjusted when the key isin the “ACC” or “ON” position.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do notoperate the control or scrape the mir-ror face. Use a spray de–icer to freethe mirror.

—Power rear view mirrorcontrol

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

93


The rear view mirrors can be foldedbackward for parking in compact areas.

To fold the rear view mirror, push back-ward.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the mirrors foldedbackward. Both the driver and pas-senger side rear view mirrors mustbe extended and properly adjustedbefore driving.

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

To reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving, operate the lever on the loweredge of the mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greaterclarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you alsolose some rear view clarity.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

—Folding rear view mirrorsAnti–glare inside rear viewmirror

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

94


Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

This mirror is equipped with auto anti–glare function. The function is designedto reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving.

When the ignition key is inserted andturned on, the inside rear view mirror al-ways turns on in the automatic functionmode.

The indicator illuminates to show you thatthe function is on.

In automatic function mode, if the mirrordetects light from the headlights of thevehicle behind you, the mirror surfacedarkens slightly to reduce the reflectedlight.

To turn off the automatic function, pushthe “MIRROR” switch.

To turn on the automatic function again,push the “MIRROR” switch.

Adjust it before driving so that the rearview is in the best condition.

When the inside air temperature is low, itmay take little longer for the mirror todarken in response to the detection ofheadlights.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

To ensure correct functioning of ananti–glare mirror sensor located on theback side of the mirror, do not touchor cover the sensor with your finger ora piece of cloth, etc.

Auto anti–glare inside rearview mirror

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

95


Rear side–view mirrors are useful as asecondary means of checking the areato the rear of the vehicle.

Carefully check the area to the rear of thevehicle by either looking directly or usingboth outside and inside rear view mirrors.

Type A

Type B

Rear side–view mirrors Sun visors—

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

96


To block out glare, move the sun visor.

To block out glare from the front—Swingdown the main sun visor (position 1).

To block out glare from the side—Swingdown the main sun visor, remove it fromthe hook and swing it to the lateral side(position 2).

Type A—If glare comes from obliquely be-hind you, extend the plate at the end ofthe visor (to position 3).

Type B—If glare comes from obliquely be-hind you, slide the main sun visor back-ward (to position 3).

To block the glare from the front when themain sun visor is swung to the lateralside, swing down the sub visor.

CAUTION

� Type A—Do not extend the plate atthe end of the sun visor when thevisor is in the position 1. It cancover the anti–glare inside rearview mirror and obstruct the rearview.

� Type B—Slide the main sun visoronly when it is swung down to thelateral side. It can cover the anti–glare inside rear view mirror andobstruct the rear view.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

97


Type A

Type B

To use the vanity mirrors, swing downthe main sun visor and slide the cover.

Type A—

The vanity light comes on when you slidethe cover.

To prevent the battery being discharged,the light will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed for 30 minutes ormore.

—Vanity mirrors

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

98


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

99


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSLights, Wipers and DefoggerHeadlights and turn signals 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency flashers 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel light control 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front fog lights 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior light 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal lights 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage compartment light 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition switch light 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running board lights 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wipers and washer 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back window wiper and washer 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back window and outside rear view mirror defoggers 110. . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 4

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

100


HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and/or allof the lights in position 1

They automatically turn on or off depend-ing on the darkness of the surroundings.

Manually twist the knob to the position 2to turn on the headlights if they are need-ed immediately when entering a dark tun-nel, parking structure, etc.

The automatic light control sensor is onthe top of the driver’s side instrumentpanel.

Do not place anything on the instrumentpanel, and/or do not affix anything on thewindshield to block this sensor.

The operating condition or sensitivity canbe changed. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

Automatic light cut off system

Position 1 or position 3 with the taillights on—

The lights automatically turn off when thedriver’s door is opened with the ignitionkey in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

Position 2 or 3 with the headlights on—

The lights automatically turn off after 30seconds when all the side doors and backdoor are closed with the ignition key inthe “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

If the “LOCK” switch of the wireless re-mote control transmitter is pushed twicesimultaneously, the lights automaticallyturn off immediately.

The time before the headlights turn offcan be changed. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

If the driver’s door is kept opened, thelights automatically turn off after 30 min-utes.

To turn them on again, turn the key to the“ON” position or actuate the headlightswitch.

If you are going to park for over oneweek, make sure the headlight switch isoff.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onfor a long period when the engine isnot running.

Headlights and turn signals(with automatic light controlsystem)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

101


Daytime running light (DRL) system (allmodels sold in Canada and some mod-els sold in U.S.A.)

Daytime Running Light (DRL) system canmake it easier for others to see the frontof your vehicle during the day. The DRLsystem can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be espe-cially helpful in the short periods afterdawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make your front turnsignal lights come on when:

� The ignition is on with the engine run-ning.

� The knob is in the “OFF” position,position 1 or position 3 with the taillights on.

� The parking brake is released.

To turn off the DRL system, twist the knobto the position 2 or position 3 with theheadlights on, or turn the ignition switchoff.

This DRL system can be disabled. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

High–Low beams— For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightswith the knob turned to “OFF”.

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

On some models, the front turn signallights are on during daytime running lightsystem is on. For details, see “Daytimerunning light system”.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

102


If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out.

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

Automatic light cut off system

Position 1—

The lights automatically turn off when thedriver’s door is opened with the ignitionkey in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

Position 2—

The lights automatically turn off after 30seconds when all the side doors and backdoor are closed with the ignition key inthe “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

If the “LOCK” switch of the wireless re-mote control transmitter is pushed twicesimultaneously, the lights automaticallyturn off immediately.

The time before the headlights turn offcan be changed. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

If the driver’s door is kept opened, thelights automatically turn off after 30 min-utes.

To turn them on again, turn the key to the“ON” position or actuate the headlightswitch.

If you are going to park for over oneweek, make sure the headlight switch isoff.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onfor a long period when the engine isnot running.

Headlights and turn signals(without automatic lightcontrol system)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

103


Daytime running light (DRL) system (allmodels sold in Canada and some mod-els sold in U.S.A.)

Daytime Running Light (DRL) system canmake it easier for others to see the frontof your vehicle during the day. The DRLsystem can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be espe-cially helpful in the short periods afterdawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make your front turnsignal lights come on when:

� The ignition is on with the engine run-ning.

� The knob is in the “OFF” position orposition 1.

� The parking brake is released.

To turn off the DRL system, twist the knobto the position 2 or turn the ignition switchoff.

This DRL system can be disabled. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

High–Low beams— For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightswith the knob turned to “OFF”.

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.


The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

On some models, the front turn signallights are on during daytime running lightsystem is on. For details, see “Daytimerunning light system”.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

104


If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out.

To turn on the emergency flashers,push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turnthem off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warnother drivers if your vehicle must bestopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos-sible.

The turn signal light switch will not workwhen the emergency flashers are operat-ing.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the switch onlonger than necessary when the en-gine is not running.

Emergency flashers

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

105


To adjust the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights, turn the dial.

To turn on the front fog lights, twistthe band of the headlight and turn sig-nal switch lever. They will come ononly when the headlights are on lowbeam.

Without rear seat audio system

With rear seat audio system

Instrument panel light control Front fog lights Interior light

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

106


To turn on the interior light, slide theswitch.

The interior light switch has the followingpositions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any ofthe side doors and back door is opened.The light goes off when all the side doorsand back door are closed.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

Door linked operation—When the switch isin the “DOOR” position and any of theside doors and back door is opened, thelight will come on. After all the side doorsand back door are closed, the light re-mains on for about 15 seconds beforefading out.

Ignition switch linked operation—When theswitch is in the “DOOR” position, and theignition switch is turned to “LOCK”, thelight will come on. The light remains onfor about 15 seconds before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the lightgoes off immediately.

� All the side doors and back door areclosed when the ignition key is in the“ACC” or “ON” position.

� All the side doors and back door areclosed and locked.

When any of the side doors and backdoor is unlocked using either the key orthe wireless remote control transmitter, thelight will come on and remain on for about15 seconds before fading out.


� Cancelling the door key or the wirelessremote control transmitter linked opera-tion

� Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged,the lights will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed and the door is leftopened with the switch at “DOOR” positionfor 30 minutes or more.

To turn on the personal lights, push thelens. To turn the lights off, push thelens once again.

Personal lights

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

107


To turn on the luggage compartmentlight, slide the switch.

The luggage compartment light switch hasthe following positions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any ofthe side doors and back door is opened.The light goes off when all the side doorsand back door are closed.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

Door linked operation—When the switch isin the “DOOR” position and any of theside doors and back door is opened, thelight will come on. After all the side doorsand back door are closed, the light re-mains on for about 15 seconds beforefading out.

Ignition switch linked operation—When theswitch is in the “DOOR” position, and theignition switch is turned to “LOCK”, thelight will come on. The light remains onfor about 15 seconds before fading out.








To prevent the battery being discharged,the lights will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed and the door is leftopened with the switch at “DOOR” positionfor 30 minutes or more.

Luggage compartment light

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

108


For easy access to the ignition switch,the ignition switch light comes on whenany of the side doors and back door isopened or when the ignition switch isturned to the “LOCK” position.

The light remains on for about 15 secondsafter all the side doors and back door areclosed.








To prevent the battery being discharged,the light will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed and the door is leftopened for 30 minutes or more.

Lighting the running boards and theground helps you easily to get in andout of the vehicle in the night. Thelights come on when any of the sidedoors is opened.

The lights remain on for about 15 secondsafter all the side doors are closed.

However, in the following cases, the lightgo off immediately.


� The vehicle speed reaches 8 km/h (5mph) or higher.

Ignition switch light Running board lights

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

109


When any of the side doors and backdoor is unlocked using either the key orthe wireless remote control transmitter, thelights will come on and remain on forabout 15 seconds before fading out.

To prevent the battery being discharged,the light will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed and the door is leftopened for 30 minutes or more.

To turn on the windshield wipers, movethe lever to the desired setting.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Slow

Position 3 Fast

The “INT TIME” band lets you adjust thewiping time interval when the wiper leveris in the intermittent position (position 1).Twist the band upward to increase thetime between sweeps, and downward todecrease it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the levertoward you.

If the windshield wipers are off, they willoperate a couple of times after the washersquirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 343 inSection 7–3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshieldwith the defroster before using the washer.This will help prevent the washer fluidfrom freezing on your windshield, whichcan block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-shield is dry. It may scratch theglass.

Windshield wipers and washer

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

110


To turn on the back window wiper, twistthe lever knob upward.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Normal

To squirt washer fluid on the back window,twist the knob upward or downward as faras it will go (position 3 or 4). The knobautomatically returns from these positionsafter you release it.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 343 inSection 7–3.

If the back window is not fully closed, theback window wiper and washer will notwork. Make sure the back window is fullyclosed when using the back window wiperand washer.

NOTICE

Do not operate the back window wip-er if the back window is dry. It mayscratch the glass.

To defog or defrost the back window,push the switch with the back windowclosed.


The thin heater wires on the inside of theback window will quickly clear the surface.An indicator light will illuminate to indicatethe defogger is operating.

On some models, heater panels in theoutside rear view mirrors will also quicklyclear the surfaces.

Push the switch once again to turn thedefoggers off.

The system will automatically shut off af-ter the defoggers have operated about 15minutes.

Back window wiper andwasher

Back window and outside rearview mirror defoggers

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

111


If the back window is not fully closed, theback window defogger will not work. Makesure the back window is fully closed whenusing the back window defogger.

If the back window is opened while thedefogger is working, the defogger will au-tomatically turn off. Even if the back win-dow is fully closed after that, the defoggerwill not automatically turn on.

Make sure you turn the defoggers offwhen the surfaces are clear. Leaving thedefoggers on for a long time could causethe battery to discharge, especially duringstop–and–go driving. The defoggers arenot designed for drying rain water or formelting snow.

CAUTION

On some models, since the mirrorsurfaces can get hot, do not touchthem when the defogger switch is on.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the backwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

112


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

113


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSGauges, Meters and Service reminder indicatorsFuel gauge 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine coolant temperature gauge 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer and two trip meters 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 5

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

114


Low fuel levelwarning light

The gauge indicates the approximatequantity of the fuel remaining in thetank when the ignition switch is on.

Nearly full—Needle at “F”Nearly empty—Needle at “E”

It is a good idea to keep the tank over1/4 full.

The needle moves when braking, acceler-ating or making turns. This is caused bythe movement of the fuel in the tank.

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the lowfuel level warning light comes on, fill thefuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gaugeneedle may fluctuate or the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fillthe fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

It is not a malfunction even if the needleof the fuel gauge returns to “E” when theignition switch is turned to the “START”position.

The gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature when the ignition switch ison. The engine operating temperaturewill vary with changes in weather andengine load.

If the needle moves into the red zone,your engine is too hot. If your vehicleoverheats, stop your vehicle and allow theengine to cool.

Your vehicle may overheat during severeoperating conditions, such as:

� Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

� Reducing speed or stopping after highspeed driving.

Fuel gaugeEngine coolant temperaturegauge

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

115


� Idling for a long period with the airconditioning on in stop–and–go traffic.

� Towing a trailer.

It is not a malfunction even if the needleof the engine coolant temperature gaugereturns to “C” when the ignition switch isturned to the “START” position.

NOTICE

� Do not remove the thermostat inthe engine cooling system as thismay cause the engine to overheat.The thermostat is designed to con-trol the flow of coolant to keep thetemperature of the engine withinthe specified operating range.

� Do not continue driving with anoverheated engine. See “If your ve-hicle overheats” on page 282 inSection 4.

The tachometer indicates engine speedin thousands of rpm (revolutions perminute). Use it while driving to selectcorrect shift points and to prevent en-gine lugging and over–revving.

Driving with the engine running too fastcauses excessive engine wear and poorfuel economy. Remember, in most casesthe slower the engine speed, the greaterthe fuel economy.

It is not a malfunction even if the needleof the tachometer returns to the bottomposition when the ignition switch is turnedto the “START” position.

NOTICE

Do not let the indicator needle getinto the red zone. This may causesevere engine damage.

Tachometer

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

116


This meter displays the odometer andtwo trip meters.

1. Odometer—Shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Show two differentdistances independently driven sincethe last time each trip meter was setto zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculatethe fuel economy and the other tomeasure the distance on each trip. Alltrip meter data is cancelled if the elec-trical power source is disconnected.

3. Odometer/two trip meter changeoverbutton—Switches the meter display.

To change the meter display, quicklypush and release the changeover but-ton. The meter display changes in theorder from the odometer to trip meterA to trip meter B, then back to theodometer each time you push.

4. Trip meter reset button—Resets thetwo trip meters to zero.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-play the meter A reading, then pushand hold the button until the meter isset to zero. The same process can beapplied for resetting the trip meter B.

Odometer and two trip meters

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

117


If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a)(indicator and buzzer)

If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b)(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(c) Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(d) Stop and check.

(e) Stop and check.

(f) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(g) Low fuel level warning light Fill up tank.

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

118



(h) Replace engine oil.

(i) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If brake system warning light is also on, stopimmediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(j) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(k) Close all side doors and back door.

(l) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(m) Stop and check.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

119



(n) Add washer fluid.

(o) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

120


(a) Brake System Warning Light andBuzzer

This light comes on in the following caseswhen the ignition key is in the “ON” posi-tion.

� When the parking brake is applied...

This light comes on for a few secondswhen the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position on even after the parkingbrake is released.

� When the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue drivingnormally when the brake fluid level islow.

� When the hydraulic brake boosterfails...

If the hydraulic booster causes a problemresulting in poor braking performance, thewarning light comes on and buzzer soundscontinuously.

Have your vehicle checked at yourToyota dealer in the following cases:

� The light does not come on even if theparking brake is applied when the igni-tion key is in the “ON” position.

� The light does not come on even if theignition key is turned on with the park-ing brake released.


CAUTION

If any of the following conditions oc-curs, immediately stop your vehicle ata safe place and contact your Toyotadealer.

� The light does not turn off evenafter the parking brake is releasedwhile the engine is running.

� The warning buzzer comes on to-gether with the warning light.

In either case, this can indicate thatthe brakes may not work properlyand your stopping distance will be-come longer. Depress the brakepedal firmly and bring the vehicleto an immediate stop.

� The brake system warning light re-mains on together with the “ABS”warning light.

In this case, not only the anti–lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely un-stable during braking.

Any of the following conditions may oc-cur, but do not indicate the malfunc-tion:


� Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the warning light andbuzzer. It is normal if the light turns offand the buzzer stops sounding after afew seconds.

� You may hear a small sound in theengine compartment after the engine isstarted or the brake pedal is depressedrepeatedly. This is a pump pulsatingsound of the brake system, and it isnot a malfunction.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

121


(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Lightand Buzzer

This light and buzzer remind you tobuckle up the driver’s seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or“START”, the reminder light flashes andbuzzer come on if the driver’s seat beltis not fastened. Unless the driver fastensthe belt, the light keeps on flashing andthe buzzer sounds for about 4 to 8 se-conds.

(c) Front Passenger’s Seat BeltReminder Light

This light reminds you to buckle up thefront passenger’s seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or“START”, the reminder light flashes if apassenger sits in the front passenger seatand does not fasten the seat belt. Howev-er, if a front passenger uses an additionalseat cushion, the light may not flash evenwhen the seat belt is not buckled up.

If luggage or other load is placed on thefront passenger seat, depending on itsweight and how it is placed on the seat,built–in sensors in the seat cushion maydetect the pressure, causing the reminderlight to come on.

(d) Discharge Warning Light

This light warns that the battery is beingdischarged.

If it comes on while you are driving, thereis a problem somewhere in the chargingsystem.

The engine ignition will continue to oper-ate, however, until the battery is dis-charged. Turn off the air conditioning,blower, radio, etc., and drive directly tothe nearest Toyota dealer or repair shop.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving if the enginedrive belt is broken or loose.

(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure WarningLight

This light warns that the engine oil pres-sure is too low.

If it flickers or stays on while you aredriving, pull off the road to a safe placeand stop the engine immediately. Call aToyota dealer or qualified repair shop forassistance.

The light may occasionally flicker whenthe engine is idling or it may come onbriefly after a hard stop. There is nocause for concern if it then goes out whenthe engine is accelerated slightly.

The light may come on when the oil levelis extremely low. It is not designed toindicate low oil level, and the oil levelmust be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with thewarning light on—even for one block.It may ruin the engine.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

122


(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the ignitionkey is turned to the “ON” position andgoes off after the engine starts. Thismeans that the warning light system isoperating properly.

If the lamp remains on, or the lampcomes on while driving, first check thefollowings.

� Empty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi-ately.

� Loose fuel tank cap

If the fuel tank cap is loose, securelytighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions.The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips.

If the lamp will not go off even after theseveral trips, contact your Toyota dealeras soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fueltank cap is not loose...

� There is a problem somewhere in theengine, emission control system, elec-tronic throttle control system, automatictransmission electrical system or warn-ing light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.

If the engine speed does not increase withthe accelerator pedal depressed down,there may be a problem somewhere inyour electronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-er, if you depress the accelerator pedalmore firmly and slowly, you can drive yourvehicle at low speeds. Have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronicthrottle control system is corrected duringlow speed driving, the system may not berecovered until the engine is stopped andthe ignition key is turned to “ACC” or“LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-neous pedal operation.

Emissions inspection and maintenance(I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a stateemission inspection if the malfunctionindicator lamp remains on. Contact yourToyota dealer to check your vehicle’semission control system and OBD(On–Board Diagnostics) system beforetaking your vehicle for the inspection.

For details, see “Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs” on page 314in Section 6.

(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel levelin the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill upthe tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

(h) Engine Oil Replacement ReminderLight (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

This light reminds you when to replacethe engine oil.

This light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON” and will go off afterabout a few seconds.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

123


When you drive for about 8000 km (5000miles) after the engine oil replacement,this light illuminates for about 3 secondsand then flashes for about 12 secondswith the ignition key turned to “ON” posi-tion. If you continue driving without theengine oil replacement, and if the drivingrange exceeds 12000 km (7500 miles), thelight will come on after the ignition key isturned to “ON” position. The light will re-main on thereafter.

If the light is flashing, we recommend thatyou replace the engine oil at an earlyopportunity depending on the driving androad condition. If the light comes on, re-place it as soon as possible.

You need to reset the light after the en-gine oil replacement. Reset the light byfollowing the procedure below:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “OFF” posi-tion with the odometer reading shown.(For details, see “Odometer and twotrip meters” on page 116 in this Sec-tion.)

2. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-tion while holding down the trip meterreset button.

Hold down the button until the light goesoff. Before the light goes off, it illuminatesfor 3 seconds, flashes for 2 seconds andilluminates for 1 second.

If the system fails to reset, the light willremain flashing.

(i) “ABS” Warning Light

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti–lock brake system and the brake assistsystem work properly, the light turns offafter a few seconds. Thereafter, if eitherof the systems malfunctions, the lightcomes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), thefollowing systems do not operate, but thebrake system still operates conventionally.


� Brake assist system






When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti–lock brake system does not operate,so that the wheels will lock up during asudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.

If either of the following conditions oc-curs, this indicates a malfunction some-where in the components monitored bythe warning light system. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or remains on.

� The light comes on while you are dri-ving.


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

124


CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the brake system warn-ing light, immediately stop your ve-hicle at a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti–lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.

Either of the following conditions mayoccur, but do not indicate a malfunc-tion:


� Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the light. It is normal if itturns off after a few seconds.

(j) “VSC TRAC” Warning Light

The light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the following.






The light will come on when the ignitionkey turned to “ON”, and will go off aftera few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warninglight may stay on for 60 seconds after theignition key is turned to the “ON” position.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the lights. It is normal if theygo out after a few seconds.

There is no problem when the “VSCTRAC” warning light comes on when thebrake actuator temperature becomes high.

If the light comes on while driving, theabove mentioned systems do not work.However, as conventional braking operateswhen applied, there is no problem to con-tinue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer:

� The warning light does not come onafter the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

� The warning light remains on after theignition key is turned to “ON”.

� The warning light comes on while driv-ing.

The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will comeon when the “VSC TRAC” warning lightcomes on even if the “TRAC OFF” switchis not pushed.

(k) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the sidedoors and back door are completelyclosed.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

125


(l) SRS Warning Light

This light will come on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.After about 6 seconds, the light will gooff. This means the system of the air-bag and front seat belt pretensioner areoperating properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat beltbuckle switch, front seat belt pretensionerassemblies, inflators, warning light, inter-connecting wiring and power sources.

If either of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction somewhere inthe parts monitored by the warning lightsystem. Contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible to service the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion or remains on.


(m) Automatic Transmission FluidTemperature Warning Light

This light warns that the automatic trans-mission fluid temperature is too high.

If this light comes on while you are driv-ing, slow down and pull off the road. Stopthe vehicle at a safe place and put theselector lever in “P”. With the engine id-ling, wait until the light goes off. If thelight goes off, you may start the vehicleagain. If the light does not go off, call aToyota dealer or qualified repair shop forassistance.

NOTICE

Continued driving with the warninglight on may damage the automatictransmission.

(n) Low Windshield Washer Fluid LevelWarning Light (for vehicles sold inCanada)

The light warns that the windshield washerfluid level is too low. Add washer fluid atyour earliest opportunity. (For instructions,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 343 inSection 7–3.)

(o) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer reminds you to remove thekey when you open the driver’s door withthe ignition key in the “ACC” or “LOCK”position.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

126


CHECKING SERVICE REMINDERINDICATORS (except the low fuel levelwarning light and low windshieldwasher fluid level warning light)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the side doors or backdoor.The open door warning light shouldcome on.

3. Close the door.The open door warning light should gooff.

4. Turn the ignition key to “ON”, but donot start the engine.All the service reminder indicators ex-cept the open door warning light shouldcome on.

The following service reminder indica-tors go off after a few seconds:

� Engine oil replacement reminder light

� “ABS” warning light

� “VSC TRAC” warning light

� “TRAC OFF” indicator light (two–wheel drive models)

� “VSC OFF” indicator light (four–wheel drive models)

� Slip indicator light

� Height control indicator lights

� Height control “OFF” indicator light

� Downhill assist control system indicatorlight (four–wheel drive models)

The SRS warning light goes off afterabout 6 seconds.

There may be the case that the “ABS”warning light (brake assist systemwarning light), “VSC TRAC” warninglight and “TRAC OFF” (two–wheel drivemodels) or “VSC OFF” (four–wheeldrive models) indicator light stay on forabout 60 seconds after the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. It isnormal if they go out after a while.

If any service reminder indicator or warn-ing buzzer does not function as describedabove, have it checked by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

127


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSIgnition switch, Transmission and Parking brakeIgnition switch with steering lock 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four–wheel drive system 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traction control system 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active traction control system 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle stability control system 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downhill assist control system 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hill–start assist control system 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear height control air suspension 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 6

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

128


“START”—Starter motor on. The keywill return to the “ON” position whenreleased.

For starting tips, see page 259 in Section3.

It is not a malfunction even if the needleof the tachometer, fuel gauge or enginecoolant temperature gauge returns to thebottom position when the ignition switch isturned to the “START” position.

“ON”—Engine on and all accessorieson.

This is the normal driving position.

It is not a malfunction even if the needleon the speedometer may move when theignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-tion.

“ACC”—Accessories such as the radiooperate, but the engine is off.

If you leave the key in the “ACC” or“LOCK” position and open the driver’sdoor, a buzzer will remind you to removethe key.

“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steeringwheel is locked. The key can be re-moved only at this position.

You must push in the key to turn it from“ACC” to the “LOCK” position. The selec-tor lever must be in the “P” position be-fore pushing the key.

Once you remove the key, the engine im-mobiliser system is automatically set. (See“Engine immobiliser system” on page 12in Section 1–2.)

When starting the engine, the key mayseem stuck at the “LOCK” position. Tofree it, first be sure the key is pushed allthe way in, and then rock the steeringwheel slightly while turning the key gently.

NOTICE

Do not leave the key in the “ON”position if the engine is not running.The battery will discharge and theignition could be damaged.

Ignition switch with steeringlock

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

129


Your automatic transmission has a shiftlock system to minimize the possibility ofincorrect operation. This means you canonly shift out of “P” position when thebrake pedal is depressed (with the ignitionswitch in “ON” position).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on theinstrument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting andkey removal

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving (shifting into overdrive possible)

4: Engine braking (shifting into overdrive not possible)

3, 2: Stronger engine braking

L: Maximum engine braking

Automatic transmission (5–speed)

With the brake pedal depressed(The ignition switch must be in“ON” position.)

Shift normally.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

130


(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “Howto start the engine” on page 260 inSection 3. The transmission must be in“P” or “N”.

When the four–wheel drive control switchknob is in “L4” (low–speed position, centerdifferential locked), the driving pattern se-lector setting has no effect on gear shifttiming. (See “Four–wheel drive system(full–time four–wheel drive models)” onpage 138 in this Section for information ofthe four–wheel drive control.)

2. With your foot holding down the brakepedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, theautomatic transmission system will selectthe most suitable gear for running condi-tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-ing, hard towing, etc.

Always use the “D” position for better fueleconomy and quieter driving. If the enginecoolant temperature is low or when thefour–wheel drive control switch knob is in“L4” (low–speed position, center differentiallocked), the transmission will not shift intothe overdrive gear even in the “D” posi-tion. (See “Four–wheel drive system (full–time four–wheel drive models)” on page138 in this Section for information of thefour–wheel drive control.)

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal. Depress the accelerator pedalslowly for smooth starting.

If the automatic locking operation linkedwith the shift position is set, all the sidedoors and back door are automaticallylocked when the shift lever is moved outof the “P” position with the engine running(including ignition switch in the “ON” posi-tion) and all the side doors and back doorare closed. For details, see “—Automaticdoor locking and unlocking functions” onpage 17 in Section 1–2.

(c) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshiftthe transmission as follows:

� Shift into the “4” position. The trans-mission will downshift to fourth gearand engine braking will be enabled.

� Shift into the “3” position. The trans-mission will downshift to third gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andstronger engine braking will be en-abled.

Two–wheel drive models133 km/h (83 mph)


Four–wheel drive control switchknob at “H4”

133 km/h (83 mph)

Four–wheel drive control switchknob at “L4”

52 km/h (32 mph)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

131


� Shift into the “2” position. The trans-mission will downshift to second gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andstronger engine braking will be en-abled.




90 km/h (56 mph)


35 km/h (22 mph)

� Shift into the “L” position. The trans-mission will downshift to first gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andmaximum engine braking will be en-abled.




47 km/h (29 mph)


18 km/h (11 mph)

When the cruise control is being used,even if you downshift from “D” to “4”,engine braking will not be enabled be-cause the cruise control is not cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,see “Cruise control” on page 164 in thisSection.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on aslippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to spin orskid.

(d) Using “3”, “2” and “L” positions

The “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used forstrong engine braking as described pre-viously.

With the selector lever in ”3”, “2” or “L”,you can start the vehicle in motion aswith the lever in “D”.

With the selector lever in “3” or “2”, thevehicle will start in first gear and automat-ically shift to third gear or second gear.

With the selector lever in “L”, the trans-mission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE

� Be careful not to over–rev the en-gine. Watch the tachometer to keepengine rpm from going into the redzone. The approximate maximum al-lowable speed for each position isgiven below for your reference:

Two–wheel drive models“3” 136 km/h (84 mph). . . . . . . “2” 93 km/h (57 mph). . . . . . . . “L” 54 km/h (33 mph). . . . . . . .

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

132




“3” 136 km/h (84 mph). . . . . . . “2” 93 km/h (57 mph). . . . . . . . “L” 54 km/h (33 mph). . . . . . . .


“3” 53 km/h (32 mph). . . . . . . . “2” 36 km/h (22 mph). . . . . . . . “L” 21 km/h (13 mph). . . . . . . .

� Do not continue hill climbing orhard towing for a long time in the“3”, “2” or “L” position. This maycause severe automatic transmis-sion damage from overheating. Toprevent such damage, “4” positionshould be used in hill climbing orhard towing.

(e) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down withyour foot, shift the selector lever to the“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-hicle is moving.

(f) Parking


2. With the brake pedal pressed down,fully depress the parking brake pedalto apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selectorlever into “P” position under any cir-cumstances while the vehicle is mov-ing. Serious mechanical damage andloss of vehicle control may result.

If the automatic unlocking operation linkedwith the shift position is set, all the sidedoors and back door are automatically un-locked when the selector lever is movedto the “P” position with the ignition switchis in the “ON” position. For details, see“—Automatic door locking and unlockingfunctions” on page 17 in Section 1–2.

(g) Good driving practice

� If the transmission repeatedly shifts upand down between fourth gear andoverdrive when climbing a gentle slope,shift the selector lever to the “4” posi-tion. Be sure to shift the selector leverto the “D” position immediately after-ward.

� When towing a trailer, in order to main-tain engine braking efficiency, do notuse “D” position.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brakepedal while stopped with the enginerunning. This prevents the vehiclefrom creeping.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

133


NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or theparking brake to hold the vehicle onan upgrade. Do not attempt to holdthe vehicle using the accelerator ped-al, as this can cause the transmissionto overheat.

(h) If you cannot shift the selector le-ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever fromthe “P” position even though the brakepedal is depressed, use the shift lockoverride button. For instructions, see “Ifyou cannot shift automatic transmissionselector lever” on page 298 in Section 4.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

134


Your automatic transmission has a shiftlock system to minimize the possibility ofincorrect operation. This means you canonly shift out of “P” position when thebrake pedal is depressed (with the ignitionswitch in “ON” position).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on theinstrument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting andkey removal

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving (shifting into overdrive possible)

3: Engine braking (shifting into overdrive not possible)

2: Stronger engine braking

L: Maximum engine braking

Automatic transmission (4–speed)

With the brake pedal depressed(The ignition switch must be in“ON” position.)

Shift normally.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

135


(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “Howto start the engine” on page 260 inSection 3. The transmission must be in“P” or “N”.

When the multi–mode control switch knobis in “L4” (low–speed position, four–wheeldrive, center differential locked), the driv-ing pattern selector setting has no effecton gear shift timing. (See “Four–wheeldrive system (multi–mode four–wheel drivemodels)” on page 141 in this Section forinformation of the multi–mode control.)

2. With your foot holding down the brakepedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, theautomatic transmission system will selectthe most suitable gear for running condi-tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-ing, hard towing, etc.

Always use the “D” position for better fueleconomy and quieter driving. If the enginecoolant temperature is low or when themulti–mode control switch knob is in “L4”(low–speed position, four–wheel drive,center differential locked), the transmissionwill not shift into the overdrive gear evenin the “D” position. (See “Four–wheel drivesystem (multi–mode four–wheel drive mod-els)” on page 141 in this Section for in-formation of the multi–mode control.)

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal. Depress the accelerator pedalslowly for smooth starting.

If the automatic locking operation linkedwith the shift position is set, all the sidedoors and back door are automaticallylocked when the shift lever is moved outof the “P” position with the engine running(including ignition switch in the “ON” posi-tion) and all the side doors and back doorare closed. For details, see “—Automaticdoor locking and unlocking functions” onpage 17 in Section 1–2.

(c) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshiftthe transmission as follows:

� Shift into the “3” position. The trans-mission will downshift to third gear.

� Shift into the “2” position. The trans-mission will downshift to second gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andstronger engine braking will be en-abled.



Multi–mode control switch knob at“H4”

123 km/h (76 mph)

Multi–mode control switch knob at“L4”

41 km/h (25 mph)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

136


� Shift into the “L” position. The trans-mission will downshift to first gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andmaximum engine braking will be en-abled.



Multi–mode control switch knob at“H4”

59 km/h (36 mph)

Multi–mode control switch knob at“L4”

11 km/h (6 mph)

When the cruise control is being used,even if you downshift from “D” to “3”,engine braking will not be enabled be-cause the cruise control is not cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,see “Cruise control” on page 164 in thisSection.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on aslippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to spin orskid.

(d) Using “2” and “L” positions

The “2” and “L” positions are used forstrong engine braking as described pre-viously.

With the selector lever in “2” or “L”, youcan start the vehicle in motion as with thelever in “D”.

With the selector lever in “2”, the vehiclewill start in first gear and automaticallyshift to second gear.

With the selector lever in “L”, the trans-mission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE

� Be careful not to over–rev the en-gine. Watch the tachometer to keepengine rpm from going into the redzone. The approximate maximum al-lowable speed for each position isgiven below for your reference:

Two–wheel drive models“2” 123 km/h (76 mph). . . . . . . “L” 67 km/h (41 mph). . . . . . . .


Multi–mode control switch knobat “H2” or “H4”

“2” 123 km/h (76 mph). . . . . . . “L” 67 km/h (41 mph). . . . . . . .

Multi–mode control switch knobat “L4”

“2” 48 km/h (29 mph). . . . . . . . “L” 26 km/h (16 mph). . . . . . . .

� Do not continue hill climbing orhard towing for a long time in the“2” or “L” position. This may causesevere automatic transmission dam-age from overheating. To preventsuch damage, “D” or “3” positionshould be used in hill climbing orhard towing.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

137


(e) Backing up


2. With the brake pedal held down withyour foot, shift the selector lever to the“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-hicle is moving.

(f) Parking


2. With the brake pedal pressed down,fully depress the parking brake pedalto apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selectorlever into “P” position under any cir-cumstances while the vehicle is mov-ing. Serious mechanical damage andloss of vehicle control may result.

If the automatic unlocking operation linkedwith the shift position is set, all the sidedoors and back door are automatically un-locked when the selector lever is movedto the “P” position with the ignition switchis in the “ON” position. For details, see“—Automatic door locking and unlockingfunctions” on page 17 in Section 1–2.

(g) Good driving practice

� If the transmission repeatedly shifts upand down between third gear and over-drive when climbing a gentle slope,shift the selector lever to the “3” posi-tion. Be sure to shift the selector leverto the “D” position immediately after-ward.

� When towing a trailer, in order to main-tain engine braking efficiency, do notuse “D” position. The selector levermust be in the “3” position.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brakepedal while stopped with the enginerunning. This prevents the vehiclefrom creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or theparking brake to hold the vehicle onan upgrade. Do not attempt to holdthe vehicle using the accelerator ped-al, as this can cause the transmissionto overheat.

(h) If you cannot shift the selector le-ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever fromthe “P” position even though the brakepedal is depressed, use the shift lockoverride button. For instructions, see “Ifyou cannot shift automatic transmissionselector lever” on page 298 in Section 4.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

138


Four–wheel drive control switch knob

Center differential lock switch

Use the four–wheel drive control switchknob and center differential lock switchto select the transfer and center differ-ential modes.

The “H4” and “L4” positions of the four–wheel drive control switch knob provideeither lock or unlock mode of the centerdifferential depending on the center differ-ential lock switch position.

Use the center differential lock system ifyour wheels get stuck in a ditch, or whenyou are driving on a slippery or bumpysurface. When the center differential islocked, the vehicle stability control systemis automatically turned off and the centerdifferential lock and “VSC OFF” indicatorlights come on because the function thatcontrols engine performance interfereswith the process of freeing your wheels.

NOTICE

As soon as the center differential lockswitch is turned on, the “VSC OFF”indicator light comes on. After thewheels are out of the ditch or off theslippery or bumpy surface, turn thecenter differential lock switch off.Make sure that the center differentiallock indicator light and vehicle stabil-ity control system off indicator lightturn off.

“H4” (high speed position, center differ-ential unlocked): Four–wheel drive controlswitch knob at “H4”, center differentiallock switch left out

Use this for normal driving on all types ofroads, from dry hard–surfaced roads towet, icy or snow–covered roads. Thisposition gives greater economy, quietestride, least wear and better vehicle control.

“H4” (high speed position, center differ-ential locked): Four–wheel drive controlswitch knob at “H4”, center differentiallock switch pushed in

Use this for greater traction when youexperience a loss of power, such aswheel slipping, in the center differentialunlock mode.

Four–wheel drive system (full–timefour–wheel drive models)—(a) Four–wheel drive control

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

139


“L4” (low speed position, center differ-ential unlocked): Four–wheel drive controlswitch knob at “L4”, center differential lockswitch left out

The “4LO” (low speed four–wheel drive)indicator light comes on when the “L4”mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction.Use this for climbing or descending steephills, off–road driving, and hard pulling insand or mud.

In this mode, the braking feeling that oc-curs when the wheels are negotiating asharp corner is further reduced than in the“L4” (low position, center differentiallocked) mode.

“L4” (low speed position, center differ-ential locked): Four–wheel drive controlswitch knob at “L4”, center differential lockswitch pushed in

The “4LO” (low speed four–wheel drive)indicator light comes on when the “L4”mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction.Use this for hard pulling in situations thevehicle cannot negotiate even in the “L4”(low speed position, center differential un-locked) mode. Also, using this mode whendriving down steep off–road inclines willhelp contribute to increased vehicle stabil-ity.

The indicator light tells when the differen-tial lock is engaged. Note that the differ-ential is not still locked as long as theindicator light remains off.

When the operation is not completed, theindicator blinks. If the indicator light doesnot go off when you push out the centerdifferential lock switch, drive straightahead while accelerating or decelerating,or drive in reverse.

If the center differential lock system op-eration is not completed within 5 secondswhile the cruise control system is set,cancel the cruise control system. To can-cel the cruise control system, see “Cruisecontrol” on page 164 in Section 1–6.

If the indicator blinks even if doing so,contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. There may be a trouble in thecenter differential lock system.

See “(b) Shifting procedure” for further in-structions.

Advice for driving on slippery roads in“L4” (low speed position) mode

If the four–wheel drive control switch knobis in the “L4” and the automatic transmis-sion selector lever is in the “2” or “3”when you drive in steep off–road areas,the output of the brake can be controlledeffectively by the active traction controlsystem, which assists the driver to controlthe driving power of 4 wheels.

Use the “L” position of the automatictransmission selector lever for maximumpower and traction when your wheels getstuck or when you drive down a steepincline. In the following cases, the outputof the brake can be controlled by theactive traction control system if the enginespeed is under 3000 rpm (normally enginespeed is under 3000 rpm when the wheelsget unstuck).

� The four–wheel drive control switchknob in the “L4” position and the auto-matic transmission selector lever in the“L” position

� The four–wheel drive control switchknob in the “L4” position and the auto-matic transmission selector lever in the“D”, “4”, “3” or “2” with the transmis-sion downshifting to first gear

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

140


� The four–wheel drive control switchknob in the “L4” position and the auto-matic transmission selector lever in the“R” position

(As for the automatic transmission selec-tor lever positions, see “Automatic trans-mission (5–speed)” on page 129 in thisSection.)

SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” (UNLOCKED)AND “H4” (LOCKED)

To shift between unlock and lockmodes in “H4”, push the center differen-tial lock switch.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “L4” (UNLOCKED)AND “L4” (LOCKED)

To shift between unlock and lockmodes in “L4”, push the center differen-tial lock switch.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” AND “L4”

To shift from “H4” to “L4”, bring thevehicle to a complete stop with the brakepedal held down with your foot, shift theautomatic transmission selector lever into“N” and push and turn the four–wheeldrive control switch knob fully clockwise.

To shift from “L4” to “H4”, bring thevehicle to a complete stop with the brakepedal held down with your foot, shift theautomatic transmission selector lever into“N” and turn the four–wheel drive controlswitch knob fully counterclockwise.

If the “4LO” (low speed four–wheel drive)indicator light continues to blink when youoperate the four–wheel drive controlswitch knob to the “H4” or “L4” position,drive forward or backward in a short dis-tance, then stop the vehicle completely,shift the automatic transmission selectorlever securely into “N” and operate theswitch knob again.

If the indicator continues to blink even ifdoing so, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible. There may be a troublein the four–wheel drive system.

CAUTION

Never operate the four–wheel drivecontrol switch knob if the wheels areslipping. Stop the slipping or spin-ning before operating.

(b) Shifting procedure

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

141


Multi–mode control switch knob

Center differential lock switch

Use the multi–mode control switchknob and center differential lock switchto select the transfer and center differ-ential modes.

The “H4” and “L4” positions of the multi–mode control switch knob provide eitherlock or unlock mode of the center differen-tial depending on the center differentiallock switch position.

Use the center differential lock system ifyour wheels get stuck in a ditch, or whenyou are driving on a slippery or bumpysurface. When the center differential islocked, the vehicle stability control systemis automatically turned off and the centerdifferential lock and “VSC OFF” indicatorlights come on because the function thatcontrols engine performance interfereswith the process of freeing your wheels.

NOTICE

As soon as the center differential lockswitch is turned on, the “VSC OFF”indicator light comes on. After thewheels are out of the ditch or off theslippery or bumpy surface, turn thecenter differential lock switch off.Make sure that the center differentiallock indicator light and vehicle stabil-ity control system off indicator lightturn off.

Four–wheel drive system(multi–mode four–wheel drivemodels)—(a) Multi–mode control

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

142


“H2” (high speed position, two–wheeldrive, center differential unlocked): Mul-ti–mode control switch knob at “H2”, cen-ter differential lock switch left out

Use this for normal driving on dry hard–surfaced roads. This position gives greatereconomy, quietest ride, least wear andbetter vehicle control.

“H4” (high speed position, four–wheeldrive, center differential unlocked): Mul-ti–mode control switch knob at “H4”, cen-ter differential lock switch left out

The four–wheel drive indicator light comeson when the “H4” mode is selected.

Use this for normal driving on all types ofroads, from dry hard–surfaced roads towet, icy or snow–covered roads. Thisposition provides greater traction thantwo–wheel drive.

“H4” (high speed position, four–wheeldrive, center differential locked): Multi–mode control switch knob at “H4”, centerdifferential lock switch pushed in

The four–wheel drive indicator light comeson when the “H4” mode is selected.

Use this for greater traction when youexperience a loss of power, such aswheel slipping, in the center differentialunlock mode.

“L4” (low speed position, four–wheeldrive, center differential unlocked): Mul-ti–mode control switch knob at “L4”, cen-ter differential lock switch left out

The four–wheel drive and “4LO” (lowspeed four–wheel drive) indicator lightscome on when the “L4” mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction.Use this for climbing or descending steephills, off–road driving, and hard pulling insand or mud.

In this mode, the braking feeling that oc-curs when the wheels are negotiating asharp corner is further reduced than in the“L4” (low speed position, four–wheel drive,center differential locked) mode.

“L4” (low speed position, four–wheeldrive, center differential locked): Multi–mode control switch knob at “L4”, centerdifferential lock switch pushed in

The four–wheel drive and “4LO” (lowspeed four–wheel drive) indicator lightscome on when the “L4” mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction.Use this for hard pulling in situations thevehicle cannot negotiate even in the “L4”(low speed position, four–wheel drive, cen-ter differential unlocked) mode. Also, usingthis mode when driving down steep off–road inclines will help contribute to in-creased vehicle stability.

The indicator light tells when the differen-tial lock is engaged. Note that the differ-ential is not still locked as long as theindicator light remains off.

When the operation is not completed, theindicator blinks. If the indicator light doesnot go off when you push out the centerdifferential lock switch, drive straightahead while accelerating or decelerating,or drive in reverse.

If the center differential lock system op-eration is not completed within 5 secondswhile the cruise control system is set,cancel the cruise control system. To can-cel the cruise control system, see “Cruisecontrol” on page 164 in Section 1–6.

If the indicator blinks even if doing so,contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. There may be a trouble in thecenter differential lock system.

See “(c) Shifting procedure” for further in-structions.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

143


Advice for driving on slippery roads in“L4” (low speed position) mode

If the multi–mode control switch knob isin the “L4” and the automatic transmissionselector lever is in the “2” when you drivein steep off–road areas, the output of thebrake can be controlled effectively by theactive traction control system, which as-sists the driver to control the driving pow-er of 4 wheels.

Use the “L” position of the automatictransmission selector lever for maximumpower and traction when your wheels getstuck or when you drive down a steepincline. In the following cases, the outputof the brake can be controlled by theactive traction control system if the enginespeed is under 3000 rpm (normally enginespeed is under 3000 rpm when the wheelsget unstuck).

� The multi–mode control switch knob inthe “L4” position and the automatictransmission selector lever in the “L”position

� The multi–mode control switch knob inthe “L4” position and the automatictransmission selector lever in the “D”,“3” or “2” with the transmission down-shifting to first gear

� The multi–mode control switch knob inthe “L4” position and the automatictransmission selector lever in the “R”position

(As for the automatic transmission selec-tor lever positions, see “Automatic trans-mission (4–speed)” on page 134 in thisSection.)

The A.D.D. can be engaged or disen-gaged by the shifting operations de-scribed in “(c) Shifting procedure”.

You should drive in four–wheel drive forat least 16 km (10 miles) each month.This will assure that the front drive com-ponents are lubricated.

(b) A.D.D. (automatic disconnectingdifferential)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

144


SHIFTING BETWEEN “H2” AND “H4”(UNLOCKED)

To shift from “H2” to “H4” (unlocked),reduce the vehicle speed to less than 100km/h (62 mph) and turn the multi–modecontrol switch knob fully clockwise.

If the four–wheel drive indicator light con-tinues to blink when you operate the mul-ti–mode control switch knob from the “H2”to the “H4” position, this reminds you thatthe transfer mode is not securely in “H4”mode. Drive straight ahead while acceler-ating or decelerating.

If the four–wheel drive indicator light con-tinues to blink and the buzzer soundswhen you operate the multi–mode controlswitch knob from the “H2” to the “H4”position, this reminds you that the transfermode is not in “H4” mode. Stop the ve-hicle or reduce the vehicle speed to lessthan 100 km/h (62 mph). Operate theswitch knob again.

To shift from “H4” (unlocked) to “H2”,turn the multi–mode control switch knobfully counterclockwise.

This can be done at any speed.

If the four–wheel drive indicator light con-tinues to blink when you operate the mul-ti–mode control switch knob from the “H4”to the “H2” position, this reminds you thatthe transfer mode is not securely in “H2”mode. Drive straight ahead while acceler-ating or decelerating, or drive forward orbackward in a short distance.

If the indicator light continues to blinkeven if doing so, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible. There may bea trouble in the four–wheel drive system.

CAUTION

Never operate the multi–mode controlswitch knob if the wheels are slip-ping. Stop the slipping or spinningbefore operating.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” (UNLOCKED)AND “H4” (LOCKED)

To shift between unlock and lockmodes in “H4”, push the center differen-tial lock switch.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “L4” (UNLOCKED)AND “L4” (LOCKED)

To shift between unlock and lockmodes in “L4”, push the center differen-tial lock switch.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” AND “L4”

To shift from “H4” to “L4”, bring thevehicle to a complete stop with the brakepedal held down with your foot, shift theautomatic transmission selector lever into“N” and push and turn the multi–modecontrol switch knob fully clockwise.

To shift from “L4” to “H4”, bring thevehicle to a complete stop with the brakepedal held down with your foot, shift theautomatic transmission selector lever into“N” and turn the multi–mode control switchknob counterclockwise.

(c) Shifting procedure

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

145


If the “4LO” (low speed four–wheel drive)indicator light continues to blink when youoperate the multi–mode control switchknob to the “H4” or “L4” position, driveforward or backward in a short distance,then stop the vehicle completely, shift theautomatic transmission selector lever se-curely into “N” and operate the switchknob again.

If the indicator continues to blink even ifdoing so, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible. There may be a troublein the four–wheel drive system.

CAUTION

Never operate the multi–mode controlswitch knob if the wheels are slip-ping. Stop the slipping or spinningbefore operating.

The traction control system automatical-ly helps prevent the spinning of rearwheels when the vehicle is started oraccelerated on slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-tions, full traction of the vehicle andpower to the rear wheels cannot bemaintained, even though the tractioncontrol system is in operation. Do notdrive the vehicle under any speed ormaneuvering conditions which maycause the vehicle to lose tractioncontrol. In situations where the roadsurface is covered with ice or snow,your vehicle should be fitted withsnow tires or tire chains. Alwaysdrive at an appropriate and cautiousspeed for the present road condi-tions.

NORMAL DRIVING MODE

Leave the system on during ordinarydriving so that it can operate whenneeded.

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehiclebegins to move. This means that the trac-tion control system is in the self–checkmode, but does not indicate a malfunction.

When the traction control system is oper-ating, the following conditions occur:

� The system controls the spinning of therear wheels. At this time, the slip indi-cator light blinks.

Traction control system(two–wheel drive models)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

146


� You may feel vibration or noise in yourvehicle, caused by operation of thebrakes. This indicates the system isfunctioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition key is turnedto “ON”. If the indicator light does notcome on when the ignition is turned on,contact your Toyota dealer.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF MODE

If your wheels get stuck in an ditchwhen you are driving on a severe offroad and sand, turn off the tractioncontrol system. This system that con-trols engine performance may interferewith the process of freeing yourwheels.

To turn off: Push “TRAC OFF” switch.

The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will comeon.

The vehicle stability control system is al-ways activated, even if the traction controlsystem is turned off.

To turn on: Push “TRAC OFF” switchonce again.

The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will go off.

The traction control system will automati-cally go on, and the “TRAC OFF” indicatorlight will go off when you drive over 30km/h (19 mph) even if the “TRAC OFF”switch is pushed to cancel the tractioncontrol system.

“TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on fora few seconds when the ignition key isturned to “ON”. It will come on againwhen you push the “TRAC OFF” switch toturn off the system.

The light may come on for 60 secondsafter the ignition key is turned to “ON”. Itis normal if they go out after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the “TRAC OFF” indicatorlight. It is normal if it goes out after a fewseconds.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

147



� The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition key is turned to“ON”.

� The indicator light remains on after theignition key is turned to “ON”.

� The indicator light comes on with thenormal driving mode while driving.

“VSC TRAC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the following.

� Traction control system



When the system is normal and the igni-tion key is turned to “ON”, the warninglight will come on and will go off after afew seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warninglight may stay on for 60 seconds after theignition key is turned to “ON”.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the light. It is normal if itgoes out after a few seconds.

The brake actuator temperature increasesduring continuous operation of the abovementioned systems such as on slipperyroads. If the brake actuator temperaturebecomes too high while any of the sys-tems is operating, a buzzer will start tosound intermittently to indicate that thetraction control system can no longer op-erate. In this case, immediately stop yourvehicle at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, thebuzzer sound changes from intermittent tocontinuous. (The continuous buzzersounds for about 3 seconds.)

At the time the “VSC TRAC” warning lightwill come on and the traction control sys-tem temporarily stops operating in order toprotect the brake actuator. (Although thetraction control system does not operate,there is no problem to continue your driv-ing.) The system will be automatically re-stored after a short time and the “VSCTRAC” warning light goes out.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

148


If the light comes on while driving, thetraction control system does not work.However, as normal braking operateswhen being applied, there is no problemto continue your driving.





The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will comeon when the “VSC TRAC” warning lightcomes on even if the “TRAC OFF” switchis not pushed.

The active traction control system auto-matically helps prevent the spinning of4 wheels when the vehicle is started oraccelerated on slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-tions, full traction of the vehicle andpower to the 4 wheels cannot bemaintained, even though the tractioncontrol system is in operation. Do notdrive the vehicle under any speed ormaneuvering conditions which maycause the vehicle to lose tractioncontrol. In situations where the roadsurface is covered with ice or snow,your vehicle should be fitted withsnow tires or tire chains. Alwaysdrive at an appropriate and cautiousspeed for the present road condi-tions.

Leave the system on during the ordi-nary driving so that it can operatewhen needed.

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehiclebegins to move. This means that the ac-tive traction control system is in the self–check mode, but does not indicate a mal-function.

When the active traction control system isoperating, the following conditions occur:

� The system controls the spinning of the4 wheels. At this time, the slip indica-tor light blinks.

Active traction control system


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

149


� You may feel vibration or noise in yourvehicle, caused by operation of thebrakes. This indicates the system isfunctioning properly.



This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the following.

� Active traction control system


� Downhill assist control system





The brake actuator temperature increasesduring continuous operation of the abovementioned systems such as on slipperyroads. If the brake actuator temperaturebecomes too high while any of the sys-tems is operating, a buzzer will start tosound intermittently to indicate that theactive traction control system can no lon-ger operate. In this case, immediately stopyour vehicle at a safe place.


At the time, the “VSC TRAC” warning lightwill come on and the active traction con-trol system temporarily stops operating inorder to protect the brake actuator. (Al-though the active traction control systemdoes not operate, there is no problem tocontinue your driving.) The system will beautomatically restored after a short timeand the “VSC TRAC” warning light goesout.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

150


If the light comes on while driving, theactive traction control system does notwork. However, as normal braking oper-ates when being applied, there is no prob-lem to continue your driving.





The vehicle stability control systemhelps provide integrated control of thesystems such as anti–lock brake sys-tem, traction control, engine control,etc. This system automatically controlsthe output of the brakes or engine tohelp prevent the vehicle from skiddingwhen cornering on a slippery road sur-face or operating steering wheel abrupt-ly.

The vehicle stability control activateswhen the vehicle speed is more than 15km/h (9 mph).

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehiclebegins to move. This means that the sys-tem is in the self–check mode, but doesnot indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

� Do not rely excessively on the ve-hicle stability control system. Evenif the vehicle stability control sys-tem is operating, you must alwaysdrive carefully and attentively toavoid serious injury. Reckless driv-ing will result in an unexpected ac-cident. If the slip indicator lightblinks and an alarm sounds, specialcare should be taken while driving.

� Only use tires of specified size. Thesize, manufacturer, brand and treadpattern for all 4 tires should be thesame. If you use the tires otherthan specified, or different type orsize, the vehicle stability controlsystem may not function correctly.When replacing the tires or wheels,contact your Toyota dealer. (See“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 333 in Section 7–2.)

Vehicle stability controlsystem

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

151


If the vehicle is going to skid during driv-ing, the slip indicator light blinks and analarm sounds intermittently. Special careshould be taken while driving.


Four–wheel drive models only—

Pushing the center differential lockswitch automatically turns the vehiclestability control system off. At thistime, the “VSC OFF” indicator comeson with the center differential lock indi-cator light.

“VSC OFF” indicator light comes on for afew seconds when the ignition key isturned to “ON”. It will come on againwhen you push the center differential lockswitch to turn off the system.


� The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition key is turned to“ON”.

� The indicator light remains on after theignition key is turned to “ON”.

� The indicator light comes on when thesystem is on while driving.

NOTICE

Make sure that the center differentiallock indicator light goes off beforenormal driving.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

152



This light warns that when there is aproblem somewhere in the following.



� Active traction control system(four–wheel drive models)

� Downhill assist control system(four–wheel drive models)


The light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON”, and will go off afterabout a few seconds.

The light may come on for 60 secondsafter the ignition key is turned to “ON”. Itis normal if they go out after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the light. It is normal if theygo out after a few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, thevehicle stability control system does notwork. However, as normal braking oper-ates when being applied, there is no prob-lem to continue your driving.





Two–wheel drive models only—The “TRACOFF” indicator light will come on when the“VSC TRAC” warning light comes on evenif the “TRAC OFF” switch is not pushed.

The downhill assist control system is asystem that assists the deceleration ofthe engine brake when you drive downa steep hill. When you are driving downa hill with the four–wheel drive controlswitch knob (full–time four–wheel drivemodels) or multi–mode control switchknob (multi–mode four–wheel drivemodels) in the “L4” position, push the“DAC” switch to limit the vehicle’s ac-celeration. If the vehicle is traveling ata speed of 25 km/h (15 mph) or less,you can descend at a constant speed.

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on the down-hill assist control system. It may notbe able to maintain a low speed overroad surfaces or off–road surfaces onwhich sliding can easily occur, suchas extremely steep slopes or icy ormuddy roads.

Downhill assist control system(four–wheel drive models)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

153


TO ACTIVATE THE DOWNHILL ASSISTCONTROL SYSTEM

1. Full–time four–wheel drive models—Turn the four–wheel drive controlswitch knob to the “L4” position.

The system will not operate if the four–wheel drive control switch knob is in the“H4” position.

Multi–mode four–wheel drive mod-els—Turn the multi–mode controlswitch knob to the “L4” position.

The system will not operate if the multi–mode control switch knob is in the “H4”position.

2. In order to make full use of the en-gine brake, putting the transmissionin “L” or “2” is recommended.

5–speed automatic transmission—The sys-tem will operate even if the transmissionselector lever is in “D”, “4”, “3” or “N”.However, when it is in “L” or “2” the en-gine brake can also be utilized enablingthe system to operate more effectively.

4–speed automatic transmission—The sys-tem will operate even if the transmissionselector lever is in “D”, “3” or “N”. Howev-er, when it is in “L” or “2” the enginebrake can also be utilized enabling thesystem to operate more effectively.

3. Push the “DAC” switch to turn thesystem on. The downhill assist con-trol system indicator light on the in-strument panel will come on.

Full–time four–wheel drive models—If thedownhill assist control system indicatorlight flashes, the selector lever may be in“N” or the four–wheel drive control switchknob may be in the “H4” position.

If the indicator light does not come onwhen the switch is pushed, contact yourToyota dealer.

Multi–mode four–wheel drive models—Ifthe downhill assist control system indica-tor light flashes, the selector lever may bein “N” or the multi–mode control switchknob may be in the “H2” or “H4” position.

If the indicator light does not come onwhen the switch is pushed, contact yourToyota dealer.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

154


With the vehicle traveling at a speed of25 km/h (15 mph) or less, release yourfoot from the accelerator or brake pedalto activate the system. The vehicle willdescend the hill at a low speed. While thesystem is operating, the slip indicator lighton the instrument panel will flash and thestop lights and high mounted stoplight willbe lit.

If you push the “DAC” switch to turn thesystem off while it is in operation, thesystem will stop operating gradually. Thedownhill assist control system indicatorlight will flash to alert the driver. To con-tinue driving at a low speed, push the“DAC” switch to turn the system on.

The slip indicator light and downhill assistcontrol system indicator light come on fora few seconds when the ignition key isturned to “ON”. If any of the indicatorlights does not come on when the ignitionis turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the system is used frequently, thebrake actuator temperature may becometoo high and a buzzer will sound inter-mittently.

If this happens, the downhill assist controlsystem indicator light will flash and abuzzer will sound intermittently. When thetemperature of the brake actuator goesdown, the system will begin to operateagain. Until it restarts, the active tractioncontrol system and hill–start assist controlsystem will not operate; however, the con-ventional brake can be operated.

If there is any abnormality in the sys-tem, the “VSC TRAC” warning light willcome on. When the “DAC” switch ispushed, the downhill assist control sys-tem indicator light also flash.

If the “VSC TRAC” warning light comeson, there may be an abnormality in anyof the following systems in addition to thedownhill assist control system.


� Active traction control system


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

155




It is not a malfunction that the warninglight may stay on for 60 seconds after theignition key is turned to the “ON” position.


The brake actuator temperature increasesduring continuous operation of the abovementioned system on such as slipperyroads. If the brake actuator temperaturebecomes too high while any of the sys-tems is operating, a buzzer will start tosound intermittently to indicate that thedownhill assist control system can no lon-ger operate. In this case, stop your ve-hicle immediately at a safe place.


At this time, the “VSC TRAC” warninglight will come on and the downhill assistcontrol system stops operating temporarilyin order to protect the brake actuator. (Al-though the downhill assist control systemdoes not operate, it is no problem to con-tinue your driving.) The system will beautomatically restored after a short timeand the “VSC TRAC” warning light goesout.

If the warning light comes on while driv-ing, the system does not work. However,as normal braking operates when beingapplied, it is no problem to continue yourdriving.





The hill–start assist control system as-sists you in starting to move up asteep or slippery hill. When you startto move up the hill slope, the systemhelps to prevent the vehicle from roll-ing backward in the interval while youmove your foot from the brake pedal tothe accelerator pedal.

CAUTION

� Do not rely excessively on the h ill–start assist control system. The ve-hicle may not be able to startsmoothly on road surfaces or off–road surfaces such as extremelysteep slopes or icy roads, on whichsliding can occur very easily.

� Do not use the hill–start assist con-trol system to stop the vehicle. Thissystem is not designed as a func-tion for stopping the vehicle on auphill slope.

Hill–start assist controlsystem

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

156


The hill–start assist control system willoperate for 5 seconds maximally whenall of the following conditions apply.

� 5–speed automatic transmission—When the transmission is in any ofpositions “D”, “4”, “3”, “2” or “L”

4–speed automatic transmission—When the transmission is in any ofpositions “D”, “3”, “2” or “L”

� When the brake pedal is not de-pressed

The system is designed to operate whenthe vehicle is starting on an uphill slope;therefore, if the transmission is in “P” or“N” it will not operate. It will not operateeither if the vehicle starts to move inreverse on a slope with the transmissionin the “R”.

When the hill–start assist control systemis operating, the slip indicator light flashesand an alarm sounds intermittently. At thesame time, the stop lamps and highmounted stoplight are lit.


Keep in mind the following when driv-ing.

� The hill–start assist control system op-erates for 5 seconds maximally. If boththe brake and accelerator pedals re-main undepressed for longer than 5seconds, the buzzer will sound at morefrequent intervals and the system willgradually stop operating.

� The hill–start assist control system isnot designed as a function for stoppingthe vehicle on a uphill slope. Whenstopping the vehicle, be sure to de-press the brake pedal.

If the system is used frequently, thebrake actuator temperature may becometoo high and a buzzer will sound inter-mittently.

In this case, a buzzer will sound intermit-tently. When the temperature of the brakeactuator goes down, the system will beginto operate again. Until it restarts, the trac-tion control system (two–wheel drive mod-els), active traction control system (four–wheel drive models) and downhill assistcontrol system will not operate; however,the conventional brake can be operated.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

157


If there is any abnormality in the sys-tem, the “VSC TRAC” warning light willcome on.

If the system malfunctions, the “VSCTRAC” warning light will come on.

If the “VSC TRAC” warning light comeson, there may be an abnormality in anyof the following systems in addition to thehill–start assist control system.


� Traction control system(two–wheel drive models)

� Active traction control system(four–wheel drive models)






The brake actuator temperature increasesduring continuous operation of the abovementioned system on such as slipperyroads. If the brake actuator temperaturebecomes too high while any of the sys-tems is operating, a buzzer will start tosound intermittently to indicate that thehill–start assist control system can no lon-ger operate. In this case, stop your ve-hicle immediately at a safe place.


At this time, the “VSC TRAC” warninglight will come on and the hill–start assistcontrol system stops operating temporarilyin order to protect the brake actuator. (Al-though the hill–start assist control systemdoes not operate, it is no problem to con-tinue your driving.) The system will beautomatically restored after a short timeand the “VSC TRAC” warning light goesout.

If the warning light comes on while driv-ing, the system does not work. However,as normal braking operates when beingapplied, it is no problem to continue yourdriving.





’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

158


This rear height control air suspensioncontrols the vehicle height dependingon the vehicle driving conditions. Selectyour desired height among the “HI”(high), “N” (normal) and “LO” (low)modes with the height select switch.

(a) Vehicle height modes

“N” (normal) mode—

The vehicle height in this mode is standard.Regardless of the number of occupants or theluggage loading condition, the vehicle heightis always automatically adjusted to a fixedheight in this mode while the engine isrunning.

This mode is suitable for ordinary driving.

“HI” (high) mode—

The vehicle height is about 40 mm (1.6 in.)higher at rear than the “N” mode height.

This mode is suitable when driving on thebumpy roads and through water.

However, when the vehicle speed exceedsabout 30 km/h (19 mph) or over in the“HI” mode, the “N” mode is automaticallyselected.

CAUTION

The “HI” mode should be used forsevere off–road driving conditiononly. Because the vehicle’s center ofgravity is higher in this setting, thevehicle may become unstable whenturning abruptly, resulting in accident.

“LO” (low) mode—

The vehicle height is about 20 mm (0.8 in.)lower at rear than the “N” mode height.

This mode allows you easy access to thevehicle (getting in and out) and easy load-ing and unloading operation.

This mode is available when the vehiclespeed is under about 12 km/h (7 mph).

NOTICE

Use the “LO” mode when the vehicleis stopped. Otherwise, when the ve-hicle speed exceeds about 12 km/h (7mph), “N” mode is selected automati-cally. So be careful when you drive inany place where the overhead heightis limited.

(b) Vehicle height mode changing con-dition

To change the vehicle height, it is necessaryto meet the following conditions.

� The engine should be running.

� The height control “OFF” indicator lightshould go off.

Rear height control airsuspension

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

159


� When selecting a mode, there is a ve-hicle speed limit. Refer to the followingtable.

Yes = The mode can be selected.No = The mode cannot be selected.

“LO”mode

“N”mode

“HI”mode

Under about12 km/h (7 mph)

Yes Yes Yes

Under about30 km/h (19 mph)

No Yes Yes

About 30 km/h (19 mph) orover

No Yes No

In the following cases, the rear heightcontrol suspension will not operate.

� The underbody of the vehicle hastouched the surface on bumpy roads.

� The area around the rear suspensionis coated with ice.

If the vehicle is moved to its usual loca-tion or the ice is removed and the heightselect switch is pressed, the vehicleheight control cannot be operated. In thiscase, turn off and restart the engine, thenpush the control switches.

(c) Vehicle height adjustment

To change the mode, push the heightselect switch on either side of “ �”(higher) or “ �” (lower).

The height control indicator light indicateswhich mode is selected. (See “(e) Heightcontrol indicator light” described below.)

Selecting the “HI” mode—

Push the height select switch on the “�”side when the vehicle speed is underabout 30 km/h (19 mph).

To change the “N” mode to “HI”, pushthe switch once.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

160


To change the “LO” mode to “HI”, pushthe switch twice. It takes about 30 sec-onds until the “LO” mode changes to the“HI” mode.

Selecting the “N” mode—

To change the “HI” mode to “N”, pushthe height select switch on the “�” sideonce.

To change the “LO” mode to “N”, pushthe height select switch on the “�” sideonce.

Selecting the “LO” mode—

Push the height select switch on the “�”side while the vehicle is stopped.

To change the “N” mode to “LO”, pushthe switch once.

To change the “HI” mode to “LO”, pushthe switch twice.

Even if the engine is stopped while the ve-hicle height is being lowered, the operationcontinues for up to 25 seconds. If, withinthis 25 seconds, any of the side doors or theback door is opened, operation will continuefor a further 15 seconds.

NOTICE

� If the vehicle height is changed fre-quently when the vehicle is heavilyloaded, the compressor may over-heat, causing the vehicle height ad-justment operation to stop.

� Before you lower the vehicle heightwith the height select switch, checkunder the vehicle to make surenothing to damage the vehicle orno one to be injured is there andthat the underbody of the vehicledoes not touch the ground.

� After unloading, the height of a ve-hicle equipped with the rear heightcontrol air suspension becomesslightly higher than the normal ve-hicle height. Take sufficient carewhere the overhead height is re-stricted.

� Do not select the “LO” mode in thebumpy roads. If the underbody ofthe vehicle touches the rugged roadsurface, the vehicle may be dam-aged.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

161


(d) Turning off the rear height controlair suspension

To turn off the rear height control airsuspension with the vehicle stopped,push the “HEIGHT CONTROL OFF”switch. The height control “OFF” indi-cator light comes on and the vehicleheight is fixed in the same mode as theheight control switch is pushed.

This status is memorized in the systemeven after the engine is stopped.

If you push the switch again, the heightcontrol “OFF” indicator light goes out andthe rear height control air suspension isturned on.

Even after the rear height control air suspen-sion is turned off with the “HEIGHT CON-TROL OFF” switch, if the vehicle speed ex-ceeds 30 km/h (19 mph), the rear heightcontrol air suspension automatically selectsthe “N” mode.

CAUTION

If you drive through deep water overabout 700 mm (28 in.) in depth, putthe vehicle height in the “HI” modewith the height select switch and thenturn off the rear height control airsuspension by pushing the “HEIGHTCONTROL OFF” switch.

NOTICE

� When jacking up or insta lling tirechains, be sure to turn off the rearheight control air suspension bypushing the “HEIGHT CONTROLOFF” switch and stop the engine.Otherwise, the vehicle height maychange because of the automaticleveling function, resulting in an un-expected accident.

� If your vehicle must be towed, putthe vehicle height in the “N” modeand turn off the rear height controlair suspension. Otherwise, the ve-hicle height may change because ofthe automatic leveling function, re-sulting in an unexpected accident.

� If your vehicle gets ditched, turn offthe rear height control air suspen-sion with the “HEIGHT CONTROLOFF” switch. Otherwise, the vehicleheight may change because of theautomatic leveling function resultingin an unexpected accident.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

162


(e) Height control indicator lights

1. Height control indicator lights

2. Height control “OFF” indicator light

When the ignition switch is turned on, all theindicator lights come on. The indicator lightshowing the present mode only remains onand all other lights go off after a few sec-onds. This means the system operates correct-ly.

If you change the vehicle height mode,the indicator lights change as follows:

When changing the vehicle height fromthe “N” mode to “HI”:

1. The “N” mode indicator light goes offand the “HI” mode indicator light blinks.

2. After the vehicle height control reachesthe “HI” mode, the “HI” mode indicatorlight remains on.

If the underbody of the vehicle hastouched the surface on bumpy roads orthe area around the rear suspension iscoated with ice, the vehicle height cannotbe lowered with the height select switch.The height control indicator lights changeas follows:

1. The present mode indicator light goesoff and the selected mode indicatorlight blinks.

2. The selected mode indicator light goesoff. (The vehicle height does notchange.) The present mode indicatorlight comes on again.

In this case, even if the vehicle is movedto its usual location or the ice is removedand the height select switch is pressed,vehicle height control cannot be operated.Turn off the engine once and then restartit.

Height control “OFF” indicator light:When the ignition switch is turned on, thislight comes on. If it goes out after a fewseconds, the rear height control air sus-pension operates correctly. If you push the“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch, the rearheight control air suspension is turned off.The height control “OFF” indicator lightcomes on.

In the following cases, there is a problemsomewhere in the rear height control airsuspension. Although there is no problemto continue normal driving, have the rearheight control air suspension checked byyour Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

163


� The height control “OFF” indicator lightdoes not come on when the ignitionswitch is turned on.

� The height control “OFF” indicator lightblinks.

(f) Parking and stopping tips

If you immediately stop the engine to parkthe vehicle after off–road driving, the ve-hicle height is lowered slightly as the ve-hicle becomes cool. When parking, makesure there is nothing that will be in con-tact with the underbody of the vehicle.When you start the engine, the vehiclereturns to the previous height.

If you park the vehicle for a long time,the vehicle height may be gradually low-ered. When parking for a long time, makesure there is nothing that will be in con-tact with the underbody of the vehicle.When you start the engine, the vehiclereturns to the previous height.

If you stop the engine, the vehicle heightmay change in accordance with thechange in the temperature. When youstart the engine, the vehicle returns to theprevious height.

(g) Rear height control failure warning

If there is a problem somewhere in therear height control air suspension, the “N”mode is automatically selected. If this oc-curs, the height control “OFF” indicatorlight blinks and the vehicle height controlcannot be activated until the malfunctionis corrected. If this is the case, bring yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible and have it checked.

When parking, firmly apply the parkingbrake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Fully depress the parking brakepedal. For better holding power, first de-press the brake pedal and hold it whilesetting the parking brake.To release: Depress the parking brakepedal once again.

To remind you that the parking brake isset, the parking brake reminder light inthe instrument panel remains on until yourelease the parking brake.

Parking brake

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

164


CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parkingbrake is fully released and the park-ing brake reminder light is off.

The cruise control allows you to cruisethe vehicle at a desired speed over 40km/h (25 mph) even with your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

Your cruising speed can be maintained upor down grades within the limits of engineperformance, although a slight speedchange may occur when driving up ordown the grades. On steeper hills, agreater speed change will occur so it isbetter to drive without the cruise control.

CAUTION

� To help maintain maximum controlof your vehicle, do not use thecruise control when driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slip-pery (rainy, icy or snow–covered) orwinding roads.

� Avoid vehicle speed increases whendriving downhill. If the vehiclespeed is too fast in relation to thecruise control set speed, cancel thecruise control then downshift thetransmission to use engine brakingto slow down.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON

To operate the cruise control, press the“ON–OFF” button. This turns the systemon. The indicator light in the instrumentpanel shows that you can now set thevehicle at a desired cruising speed. Anoth-er press will turn the system completelyoff.

CAUTION

To avoid accidental cruise control en-gagement, keep the “ON–OFF” buttonoff when not using the cruise control.

Cruise control

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

165


SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED

The transmission must be in “D” beforeyou set the cruise control speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,push the lever down in the “– SET” direc-tion and release it. This sets the vehicleat that speed. If the speed is not satisfac-tory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,or tap it down for a slower speed. Eachtap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

If you need acceleration—for example,when passing—depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceedthe set speed. When you release it, thevehicle will return to the speed set priorto the acceleration.

CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED

You can cancel the preset speed by:

a. Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL” di-rection and releasing it.

b. Depressing the brake pedal.

If the vehicle speed falls below about 40km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will auto-matically cancel out.

If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10mph) below the preset speed, the presetspeed will also automatically cancel out.

If the preset speed automatically cancelsout other than for the above cases, haveyour vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-er at the earliest opportunity.

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the “+ RES” directionand hold it. Release the lever when thedesired speed is attained. While the leveris held up, the vehicle will gradually gainspeed.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac-celerate the vehicle and then push thelever down in the “– SET” direction.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the “– SET” direc-tion and hold it. Release the lever whenthe desired speed is attained. While thelever is held down, the vehicle speed willgradually decrease.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-press the brake pedal and then push thelever down in the “– SET” direction.

Even if you downshift from “D” to “4”(5–speed automatic transmission) or “3”(4–speed automatic transmission), with thecruise control on, engine braking will notbe enabled because the cruise control isnot cancelled. To decrease the vehiclespeed, reset to a slower speed with thecruise control lever or depress the brakepedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruisecontrol is cancelled.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

166


RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED

If the preset speed is cancelled by pullingthe control lever or by depressing thebrake pedal, pushing the lever up in the“+ RES” direction will restore the speedset prior to cancellation.

However, once the vehicle speed falls be-low about 40 km/h (25 mph), the presetspeed will not be resumed.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If the “CRUISE” indicator light in theinstrument cluster flashes when using thecruise control, press the “ON–OFF” buttonto turn the system off and then press itagain to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc-curs, there is some trouble in the cruisecontrol system.

� The indicator light does not come on.

� The indicator light flashes again.

� The indicator light goes out after itcomes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyotadealer and have your vehicle inspected.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

167


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSCar audio systemReference 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using your audio system 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio remote controls 185. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seat audio system 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Car audio system operating hints 195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to theseparate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

SECTION 1– 7

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

168


Type 1: AM·FM radio/cassette player/com-pact disc player (with compact discchanger controller)

Type 2: AM·FM radio/cassette player/com-pact disc player with changer

This section describes some of the basicfeatures on Toyota audio systems. Someinformation may not pertain to your sys-tem.

Your audio system works when the ignitionkey is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off.

Push “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE”, “DISC” or“LOAD” to turn on that function withoutpushing “PWR·VOL”. To turn on the cas-sette or compact disc player, a cassetteor compact disc must be loaded in theplayer.

You can turn on each player by insertinga cassette tape or compact disc.

You can turn off each player by ejectingthe cassette tape or compact disc. If theaudio system was previously off, then theentire audio system will be turned offwhen you eject the cassette tape or com-pact disc. If the another function was pre-viously playing, it will come on again.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE”, “DISC” or“LOAD” if the system is already on butyou want to switch from one function toanother.

ReferenceUsing your audio system——Some basics

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

169


TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your system’s tone andbalance controls, see the description ofyour own system.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds toyou is largely determined by the mix ofthe treble, midrange and bass levels. Infact, different kinds of music and vocalprograms usually sound better with differ-ent mixes of treble, midrange and bass.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereochannels and of the front and rear soundlevels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening toa stereo recording or broadcast, changingthe right/left balance will increase the vol-ume of one group of sounds while de-creasing the volume of another.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

Your vehicle has an antenna printed onthe inside of the rear quarter window.

NOTICE

Attaching the film (especially conduc-tive or metallic type) on the rearquarter glass will noticeably reducethe sensitivity of the radio.

YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER

When you insert a cassette, the exposedtape should face to the right.

NOTICE

Do not oil any part of the player anddo not insert anything other than cas-sette tapes into the slot, or the tapeplayer may be damaged.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1)

When you insert a disc, gently push it inwith the label side up. (The player willautomatically eject a disc if the label sideis down.) The player will play from track1 through the end of the disc. Then it willplay from track 1 again.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything other than com-pact discs into the slot.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

170


YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITHCHANGER (type 2)

When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”button and gently push the disc in withthe label side up. (The player will auto-matically eject a disc if the label side isdown.) This compact disc player can storeup to six discs. The player will play fromtrack 1 through the end of the disc. Thenit will play from track 1 of the next disc.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE

� Do not stack up two discs for in-sertion, or it will cause damage tothe compact disc player. Insert onlyone compact disc into slot at atime.

� Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything except a com-pact disc into the slot.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

171


Details of specific buttons, controls andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallist that follows.

—Controls and features�Type 1

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

172


1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station. (See “TUNE” or“SEEK”.) Push and hold down the buttonuntil you hear a beep—this will set thestation to the button. The button numberwill appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the buttonfor the station you want. The button num-ber and station frequency will appear onthe display.

These systems can store one AM and twoFM stations for each button. (The displaywill show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when youpush “AM” or “FM” button.)

(Eject button)

Push the cassette tape eject button toeject a cassette. Push the compact disceject button to eject a compact disc.

(Program)

Push “ ” (preset button 4) to selectthe other side of a cassette tape. Thedisplay indicates which side is currently

selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”indicates the bottom side).

Auto–reverse feature: After the cassetteplayer reaches the end of a tape side, itautomatically reverses and begins to playthe other side. This is true whether thecassette was playing or fast forwarding.

(Reverse/Fast forward button)

Cassette player

Push “ ” (preset button 6) to fast for-ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on

the display. Push “ ” (preset button 5)to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear onthe display.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-

ing, push “ ” or “TAPE” button. To stop

the tape while it is rewinding, push “ ”or “TAPE” button.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassetteplayer will stop and then play that sameside. If a tape fast forwards completely,the cassette will play the other side of thetape using the auto–reverse feature.

Compact disc player

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“ ” (preset button 5) to fast forward orreverse within a compact disc. When yourelease the button, the compact disc play-er will resume playing.

AM

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radioand select the AM band. “AM” will appearon the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-ance adjustment function)

By using the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob,you can adjust the tone and sound bal-ance. On some models, you can also turnon or off the surround function.

Each time you push this knob, the modechanges. To adjust the tone and balanceand turn on or off the surround function,turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts low–pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from –5 to 5.

MID: Adjusts mid–pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from –5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high–pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from –5 to 5.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

173


FAD: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe front and rear speakers. The displayranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe right and left speakers. The displayranges from L7 to R7.

SURROUND: Turn on or off the surroundfunction. “SURROUND ON” or“SURROUND OFF” will appear on thedisplay.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC” button to play a compactdisc.

When the audio system is set into com-pact disc operation, the display shows thetrack, or track and disc number currentlybeing played.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display one of the six followingerror messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unitmay be too hot. Allow the player to cooldown.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-aged or inserted incorrectly (up–sidedown). Clean the disc and re–insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer ofseparate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem insidethe system. Eject the disc or magazine.Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over–current. Ask yourToyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changerlid of separate unit is open. Close thecompact disc changer lid.

If the malfunction still exists, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer.

� DISC �

With compact disc changer only—

Use these buttons to select the disc youwant to listen to.

Push “�” (preset button 3) or “�” (presetbutton 4) until the number of the disc youwant to listen appears on the display.

Dolby � B NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that wasrecorded with Dolby� B Noise Reduction,push “ ” (preset button 3). “ ” willappear on the display. Push the buttonagain to turn off Dolby� B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noiseby about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-tion, play your tapes with this button onor off according to the mode used to re-cord the tape.∗: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and thedouble D symbol are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

FM

Push the “FM” button to turn on the radioand select the FM band. “FM1” or “FM2”will appear on the display. This systemallows you to set twelve FM stations, twofor each of the preset button.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.

RAND (Random)

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on one compactdisc in random order, or listen to thetracks on all the compact discs in themagazine in random order.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

174


To play the tracks on one disc in randomorder: Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay and the player will perform thetracks on the disc you are listening to inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this button again.


To play all the tracks in the magazine inrandom order:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display and the player willperform all the tracks on all the discs inthe magazine in random order. To turn offthe random feature, push this buttonagain.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette player

Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while the

track is playing. “ ” will appear onthe display. When the track ends, it willautomatically rewind and replay. To turnoff the repeat feature, push this buttonagain.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks in order for the re-peat feature to work correctly.

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—You caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the track is playing.

“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically replay.To turn off the repeat feature, push thisbutton again.


Repeating a disc:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall the tracks on the disc you are listeningto. When the disc ends, the player willautomatically go back to the top track ofthe disc and replay. To turn off the repeatfeature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. The radio will tune inthe next preset station up the band, staythere for 5 seconds, and then move to thenext preset station. To stop scanning,push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. The radio will find the next station upthe station band, stay there for 5 seconds,and then scan again to the next station.To stop scanning, push this button again.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

175


Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. “SCAN” will appear on the displayand the player will scan all the tracks onthe disc you are listening to. To stopscanning, push this button again. If theplayer scanned all the tracks on the disc,it will stop scanning.


Scanning the first tracks of all the discsin the magazine:Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a

beep. “ ·SCAN” will appear on the dis-play and the player will scan the firsttrack of the next disc. To stop scanning,push this button again. If the player hasscanned all the discs, it will stop scan-ning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to find thestation after that.

Cassette Player

Use this button to skip up or down tolocate a song or recording.

You can select up to nine recordings (in-cluding current one).

A blank space of at least 3 seconds isconsidered to be a start of a recording.

When a beginning of a tape is reached,the player automatically resumes play.

When the end of the tape is reached, theplayer automatically reverses sides andresumes normal play.

In addition, the feature may not work wellwith some spoken word, live, or classicalrecordings.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to adifferent track.

Push “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of thetrack you want to listen to appears on thedisplay. If you want to return to the begin-ning of the current track, quickly push thedown side of the button one time.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TAPE

Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassettetape.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

176


TEXT

This button is used to change the displayfor the compact disc that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while the com-pact disc is playing. The display changesin the order from the elapsed time to disctitle to track title, then back to theelapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compactdisc that does not contain text data isplaying, “NO TITLE” will appear on thedisplay.

If the entire disc or track title does notappear on the display, push and hold thebutton until you hear a beep. The rest ofthe title will appear.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to stepup the frequency. Turn the knob counter-clockwise to step down the frequency.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

177


Details of specific buttons, controls andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallist that follows.

�Type 2

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

178


1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station. (See “TUNE” or“SEEK”.) Push and hold down the buttonuntil you hear a beep—this will set thestation to the button. The preset buttonnumber will appear on the display.

RDS stations will be preset to the buttonswhen you turn on the RDS. (See “RDS”button.)

To recall a preset station: Push the buttonfor the station you want. The preset but-ton number and station frequency will ap-pear on the display.

This radio can store one AM, two FM andRDS stations for each button. (The displaywill show “AM”, “FM1”, “FM2” or “FMTYPE” when you push “AM” or “FM” but-ton.)

(Eject button)

Cassette player

This button is used to eject a cassette.

Compact disc player

This button is used to eject one or allcompact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, pushand release the compact disc eject button.

To eject a specific disc, push “�” (presetbutton 3) or “�” (preset button 4) until thenumber of the disc you want to eject isdisplayed. Push and release the eject but-ton.

To eject all discs at a time, press andhold the eject button until you hear abeep. The last compact disc played beforepushing the button will be ejected first. Ifthe ejected disc is not removed for a longtime, the eject function will be cancelled.

(Program)

Push “ ” (preset button 4) to selectthe other side of a cassette tape. Thedisplay indicates which side is currently

selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”indicates the bottom side).


(Reverse/Fast forward button)

Cassette player

Push “ ” (preset button 6) to fast for-ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on

the display. Push “ ” (preset button 5)to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear onthe display.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-

ing, push “ ” or “TAPE” button. To stop

the tape while it is rewinding, push “ ”or “TAPE” button.


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

179


Compact disc player

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“ ” (preset button 5) to fast forward orreverse within a compact disc. When yourelease the button, the compact disc play-er will resume playing.

AM

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radioand select the AM band. “AM” will appearon the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-ance adjustment function)

By using the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob,you can adjust the tone and sound bal-ance, and turn on or off the surroundfunction.

Each time you push this knob, the modechanges. To adjust the tone and balanceand turn on or off the surround function,turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts low–pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from –5 to 5.

MID: Adjusts mid–pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from –5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high–pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from –5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe front and rear speakers. The displayranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe right and left speakers. The displayranges from L7 to R7.

SURROUND: Turn on or off the surroundfunction. “SURROUND ON” or “SUR-ROUND OFF” will appear on the display.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC” button to play a compactdisc.

When the audio system is set into com-pact disc operation, the display shows thetrack, or track and disc number currentlybeing played.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display one of the six followingerror messages.


“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-aged or inserted incorrectly (up–sidedown). Clean the disc and re–insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer ofseparate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem insidethe system. Eject the disc or magazine.Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over–current. Ask yourToyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changerlid of separate unit is open. Close thecompact disc changer lid.


� DISC �

Use these buttons to select a disc youwant to listen to.

Push “�” (preset button 3) or “�” (presetbutton 4) until the number of the disc youwant to listen appears on the display.

Dolby � B NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that wasrecorded with Dolby� B Noise Reduction,

push “ ” (preset button 3). “ ” willappear on the display. Push the buttonagain to turn off Dolby� B NR.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

180


The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noiseby about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-tion, play your tapes with this button onor off according to the mode used to re-cord the tape.∗: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and thedouble D symbol are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

FM

Push the “FM” button to turn on the radioand select the FM band. “FM1”, “FM2” or“FM TYPE” will appear on the display.This system allows you to set twelve FMand six RDS stations, three for each ofthe preset button. If the RDS is off orRDS stations are not preset to the presetbuttons, “FM TYPE” will not appear on thedisplay.

LOAD

This button is used to load the compactdiscs in the compact disc player. Thisplayer can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quicklypush and release the button, then inserta compact disc. After the disc is loaded,the shutter of the slot will close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.

To load multiple compact discs, push andhold the button (until you hear a beepwhen the audio system is on), then insertthe first compact disc. After the disc isloaded, the shutter of the slot will close.After a few seconds, the shutter will auto-matically open again so the next disc canbe inserted. The same process can beapplied for loading the rest of the discs.If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL”will appear on the display.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.

RDS (Radio Data System)

Your audio system is equipped with RadioData System (RDS). RDS station providinggood reception is automatically selected ifcurrent reception worsens.

The “RDS” button turns the RDS on andoff. This button is operational except inAM mode.

To turn on the RDS, push and hold thisbutton until you hear a beep and “RDS”will appear on the display. At this time,the radio starts to search the RDS sta-tions and “RDS SEARCH” will flash on thedisplay.

Quickly push and release this button whenthe RDS turns on, the radio starts tosearch the RDS stations and “RDSSEARCH” will flash on the display.

When the RDS stations are found,“FOUND” and the number of the RDS sta-tions will appear on the display, and youwill hear two beeps. The stations will bepreset to the preset buttons.

If the RDS stations can not be found, “NORDS ST” will appear on the display andyou will hear a beep, and the displayreturns to the previous mode.

To turn the RDS off, push the button untilyou hear a beep again.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

181


RAND (Random)

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on one compactdisc in random order, or listen to thetracks on all the compact discs in themagazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in randomorder: Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay and the player will perform thetracks on the disc you are listening to inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine inrandom order:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display and the player willperform all the tracks on all the discs inthe magazine in random order. To turn offthe random feature, push this buttonagain.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette player

Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while the

track is playing. “ ” will appear onthe display. When the track ends, it willautomatically rewind and replay. To turnoff the repeat feature, push this buttonagain.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks in order for the re-peat feature to work correctly.

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—You caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the track is playing.

“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically replay.To turn off the repeat feature, push thisbutton again.

Repeating a disc:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall the tracks on the disc you are listeningto. When the disc ends, the player willautomatically go back to the top track ofthe disc and replay. To turn off the repeatfeature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold “�” or “�” side of the“SCAN” button until you hear a beep. Theradio will tune in the next preset stationup or down the band, stay there for 5seconds, and then move to the next pre-set station. To stop scanning, push thisbutton again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release “�” or “�” sideof the “SCAN” button. The radio will findthe next station up or down the stationband, stay there for 5 seconds, and thenscan again to the next station. To stopscanning, push this button again.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

182


Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release “�” or “�” sideof the “SCAN” button. “SCAN” will appearon the display and the player will scan upor down all the tracks on the disc you arelistening to. To stop scanning, push thisbutton again. If the player scanned all thetracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discsin the magazine:Push “�” or “�” side of the “SCAN” but-

ton until you hear a beep. “ ·SCAN” willappear on the display and the player willscan up or down the first track of thenext disc. To stop scanning, push thisbutton again. If the auto changer hasscanned all the discs, it will stop scan-ning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to find thestation after that.

Cassette Player



A blank space of at least 3 seconds isconsidered to be a start of a recording.



In addition, the feature may not work wellwith some spoken word, live, or classicalrecordings.

Compact disc player


Push “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of thetrack you want to listen to appears on thedisplay. If you want to return to the begin-ning of the current track, quickly push thedown side of the button one time.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TAPE

Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassettetape.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

183


TEXT

Radio

This button is operational only in RDSmode.

When an RDS radio station transmits atext message, “TEXT” will be displayed. Atthis time, push the “TEXT” button to viewthe text message. The message displaywill be canceled if any button that affectsthe display is pushed. To view the mes-sage again, push this button again. Afterthe entire message has been displayed,the message will disappear.

The RDS audio system has memory tostore three 64–character messages. Tostore a message in memory, push andhold the “TEXT” button until you hear abeep.

If three messages are already stored inmemory, the oldest message will be over-written by the new message.

To recall a radio text message, push the“TEXT” button momentarily. This will dis-play the most recent message. Each pushof the button will display messages in theorder of most to least recent.

If no messages have been stored, or ifthere are no more messages to be re-called, “NO MESSAGE” will appear on thedisplay, and the message display will becanceled.

The message display will be canceled ifyou activate any function that affects thedisplay.

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the displayfor the compact disc that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while the com-pact disc is playing. The display changesin the order from the elapsed time to disctitle to track title, then back to theelapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compactdisc that does not contain text data isplaying, “NO TITLE” will appear on thedisplay.

If the entire disc or track title does notappear on the display, push and hold thebutton until you hear a beep. The rest ofthe title will appear.

TRAF (Traffic)

This button turns the traffic announcement(TA) feature on and off. This button isoperational only in FM mode.

By pushing the “TRAF” button, “TRAFSEEK” will flash on the display and theradio will start seeking any traffic programstation.

When a traffic program station is found,“TRAF” will be displayed and you will heara beep.

After the traffic announcement program isover, the display returns to the previousmode.

If no traffic program station is found, “NOTRAF INFO” appears on the display for afew seconds and the display returns tothe previous mode.

To cancel the traffic announcement, pushthis button again.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to stepup the frequency. Turn the knob counter-clockwise to step down the frequency.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

184


TYPE (Program Types)

When you push the “TYPE” button whilereceiving an RDS station, the current pro-gram type appears on the display.

Each time you push this button, the pro-gram type changes as in the following:

� ROCK

� EASY LIS (Easy listening)

� CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)

� R&B (Rhythm and Blues)

� INFORM (Information)

� RELIGION

� MISC (Miscellaneous)

� ALERT (Emergency message)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

185


Some parts of the audio system can beadjusted using the switches on the steer-ing wheel.

Details of the specific switches, controls,and features are described below.

1. Volume control switch

2. “��” switch

3. “MODE” switch

Audio remote controls (steering switches)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

186


1. Volume control switch

Push “+” to increase the volume. The vol-ume continues to increase while theswitch is being pushed.

Push “–” to decrease the volume. Thevolume continues to decrease while theswitch is being pushed.

2. “ ��” switch

Radio

This switch has the following features—

To select a preset station:Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch. Do this again to selectthe next preset station.

To seek a station:Push and hold the “�” or “�” side of theswitch until you hear a beep. Do thisagain to find the next station. If you pushthe switch on either side during the seekmode, seeking will be cancelled.

Cassette player

This switch has the following features—

To skip to a different track in either direc-tion:Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch. “FF 1” or “REW 1” willappear on the display.

Next, push either side of the track switchuntil the track you want to listen to is set.If you push the switch ten times, the skipfunction will turn off. (You can skip up tonine tracks at a time.)

When counting the number of the tracksyou want to rewind, remember to countthe current track as well. For example, ifyou want to rewind to a song that is twotracks before the song you are listeningto, push the “�” side of the switch threetimes.

If you push the track switch further thanyou wanted to, push the other side of theswitch. The track number will be in-creased or reduced.

The track number you select is not validif it is higher than the number of thetracks remaining on the current side ofthe cassette.

� When the tape reaches to the begin-ning, the player will automatically startplaying that side.

� After the tape reaches to the end, theplayer will automatically reverse andstart playing the other side.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks for the track switchto work correctly. In addition, the featuremay not work well with some spoken, live,or classical recordings.

To fast forward or reverse:Push and hold the “�” side of the switchto fast forward a cassette tape. “FF” willappear on the display. Push and hold the“�” side of the switch to rewind a tape.“REW” will appear on the display.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-ing, push the “�” side of the switch. Tostop the tape while it is rewinding, pushthe “�” side of the switch.


Compact disc player

Use this switch to skip up or down to adifferent track in either direction.

Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch until the track you wantto listen to is set. If you want to returnto the beginning of the current track, pushthe “�” side of the switch once, quickly.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

187



Push and hold the “�” or “�” side of theswitch until the disc you want to listen tois set.

3. “MODE” switch

Push “MODE” switch to select an audiomode. Each push changes the mode se-quentially if the desired mode is ready touse.

To turn the audio system on, push the“MODE” switch.

To turn the audio system off, push andhold the “MODE” switch until the systemturns off.

The rear seat audio system is designedfor the rear seat passengers to enjoy theaudio sound separately between the frontseats and rear seats.

The rear seat audio system can be turnedon with the rear audio system controllereven if the front audio system is off.When the front audio is turned off, therear audio system will be turned off simul-taneously.

The rear passengers can enjoy all themodes (AM and FM radio, cassette tapeplayer, compact disc player, compact discplayer with changer and DVD player) withthe rear seat audio system when a cas-sette tape and discs are loaded in thefront audio system.

When the same mode is selected on thefront and rear audio systems at the sametime, the system can be operated on thefront audio system.

If the radio mode is selected on the frontand rear audio systems at the same time,AM and FM modes cannot be changed onthe rear seat audio system.

You can enjoy the rear seat audio systemwith a special headphone. For details, re-fer to the manufacturer’s instructions.

The wireless headphone can be used with-in a radius of approximately 7 m (23 ft.)from the rear seat audio system. If thesignal becomes weak, the headphone willmute.

You can purchase a wireless headphoneat a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

� Do not drive with using the head-phone. Otherwise, you may be hardto hear the sound from the outsidewhile using the headphone and maycause an accident.

� With DVD player:

Conversational speech on someDVDs is recorded at a low volumeto emphasize the impact of soundeffects. If you adjust the volumeassuming that the conversationsrepresent the maximum volume lev-el that the DVD will play, you maybe startled by louder sound effectsor when you change to a differentaudio source. Be sure to adjust thevolume with this in mind.

Make sure the volume is not in-creased, before you turn on theheadphone.

Rear seat audio system—

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

188


The rear seat audio system consists offollowing components.

1. Front audio system

2. Rear seat audio system display

3. Rear seat audio system controller

4. Controller holder

The rear seat audio system can be oper-ated with the rear seat audio system con-troller.

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or modify thecontroller. It may cause an accident,fire or electric shock.

NOTICE

Keep the controller away from directsunlight, high heat and high humidity.These conditions could cause thecase to deform or the battery to ex-plode or leak.

—Rear seat audio systemcontroller

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

189


BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER(for new vehicle owners)

A battery is already set in the control-ler with an insulating sheet, which pre-vents the battery from being dis-charged. Before using the controller,remove the insulating sheet.

USING THE CONTROLLER

To use the rear seat audio system con-troller, direct the signal output portionof the controller to the signal receptionportion of the rear seat audio systemdisplay.

The rear seat audio system controller canbe operated when the ignition switch is inthe “ACC” or “ON” position.

The controller does not operate properlywhen the signal reception portion of thedisplay is exposed to direct sunlight.Block the display from direct sunlight.

Details of specific buttons, controls, andfeatures of the controller, see“CONTROLLER FEATURES” on page 191in this Section.

NOTICE

Observe the followings, otherwise thecontroller may be damaged.

� Do not drop or strongly knock thecontroller against hard objects.

� Do not sit on or place heavy ob-jects on the controller.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

190


CONTROLLER HOLDER

The controller can be stowed in theholder when it is not in use. The holdercan be hooked on the back of the driv-er’s or front passenger’s seatback.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stopwhile driving, stow the controller inthe holder when it is not in use.

NOTICE

Do not leave the controller exposedto high temperatures (such as on theinstrument panel) for a long time,otherwise the controller may be dam-aged.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

191


CONTROLLER FEATURES

1. “ ” and “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG) buttons

2. “ ” and “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) buttons

3. “ON/SOURCE” button

4. “OFF” button

1. “ ” and “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG) but-tons

Radio

You can scan only the preset stations forthe band of the front audio system. (Forinstructions, see “—Controls and features”on page 171 in this Section.)

To scan the preset stations:Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)button. The radio will tune in the nextpreset station up or down the band. Thestation frequency will appear on the dis-play.

Cassette tape player

Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)button to select the other side of a cas-sette tape. The display indicates whichside is currently selected. (“ ” indicatesthe top side, “ ” indicates the bottomside.)


Compact disc player and DVD player

With disc changer only—Use these buttons to select the disc youwant to listen to.

Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)button until the number of the disc youwant to listen to appears on the display.

2. “ ” and “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) buttons

Radio

Use the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-ton to tune or seek.

Tuning:

Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ”(TUNE/TRACK) button briefly. Each timeyou push the button, the radio will step upor down to another frequency. If you pushand hold the button and the radio will gointo the seek mode.

Seeking:

Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button. The radio will seek up ordown for a station of the nearest frequen-cy and will stop on reception. Each timeyou push the button, the stations will besearched automatically one after another.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

192


Cassette tape player

To fast forward a cassette tape, push andhold the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button until“FF” will appears on the display. Push andhold the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button until“REW” appears on the display to rewinda tape.



Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-ton. “FF 1” or “REW 1” will appear on thedisplay.

Next, push either side of the track buttonuntil the number on the display reachesthe number of tracks you want to skip. Ifyou push the button 10 times, the skipfeature will be turned off.

For the skip feature to work correctly ablank space of at least 3 seconds is con-sidered to be a start of a recording.



In addition, the feature may not work wellwith some spoken, live, or classical re-cordings.

Compact disc player and DVD player


Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) but-ton until the number of the track or chap-ter you want to listen to appears on thedisplay. If you want to return to the begin-ning of the current track or chapter, quick-ly push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) buttonone time.

Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button to fast forward or reversewithin a disc. When you release the but-ton, the disc player will resume playing.

With disc changer only—You can either scan the tracks or chap-ters on a specific disc or scan the firsttracks or chapters of all the discs in thechanger.

Scanning the tracks or chapters on a disc:Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ”(TUNE/TRACK) button. “LOAD” will appearon the display and the player will scan allthe tracks or chapters on the disc you arelistening to. To stop scanning, push thisbutton again. If the player scanned all thetracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks or chapters of allthe discs in the changer:Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button. The player will scan thefirst track or chapter of the next disc. Tostop scanning, release the button. If theplayer has scanned all the discs, it willstop scanning.

3. “ON/SOURCE” button

Push the “ON/SOURCE” button to turn onthe rear seat audio system.

Use the “ON/SOURCE” button to select anaudio mode when the rear seat audio sys-tem is on. Each time you push this but-ton, the system changes between the ra-dio, cassette player, compact disc player,compact disc changer and DVD changer.

When you change the mode, the displayindicates which mode is selected.

When a cassette tape and discs are notloaded in the front audio system, only aradio mode can be selected in the rearseat audio system.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

193


If you push the “ON/SOURCE” button onrear seat audio system controller to selectthe casette tape player mode or disc play-er mode in that case, a beep sounds fromfront audio system and “INVALID” flasheson the display for 6 seconds, and then therear audio system returns to the radiomode.

If you push the “ON/SOURCE” buttonwhile receiving an emergency broadcast,a beep sounds and “INVALID” appears onthe display to indicate that no button canbe operated.

Radio

AM mode

When you select the AM mode, “AM” willappear on the display.

FM mode

When you select the FM mode, “FM1” or“FM2” will appear on the display.

If the front audio system receives a trafficannouncement (TA) while the rear seataudio system is in the radio mode,“TRAF” will flash on the display and therear seat audio system will turn off. Whenthe front audio receives a traffic an-nouncement (TA), the rear seat audio sys-tem cannot select the AM/FM mode.

Tape mode

“TAPE” appears on the display while thismode is selected.

Disc players

Compact disc mode

“CD” appears on the display while thismode is selected.

The display shows the track, or track anddisc number currently being played.

DVD video disc mode

“DVD” appears on the display while thismode is selected.

The display shows the track or chapter, ortrack or chapter and disc number currentlybeing played.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display one of the five followingerror messages.


“ERR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damagedor inserted incorrectly (up–side down).Clean the disc and re–insert it.

“ERR 2”: The compact disc changer ofseparate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERR 3”: There is a problem inside thesystem. Eject the disc or magazine. Setthe disc or magazine again.

“ERR 4”: Over–current. Ask your Toyotadealer to inspect.

“OPEN”: The compact disc changer lid ofseparate unit is open. Close the compactdisc changer lid.


4. “OFF” button

Push “OFF” button to turn off the rearseat audio system.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

194


REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY

For replacement, use a CR2025 lithiumbattery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken thatsmall children do not swallow the re-moved battery or components.

NOTICE

� When replacing the battery, be care-ful not to lose the components.

� Replace only with the same orequivalent type of battery recom-mended by a Toyota dealer.

� Dispose of used batteries accordingto the local regulations.

Replace the battery by using the followingprocedures:

1. Pull the case out while pushing thelock release button to the side.

2. Remove the discharged battery.

3. Put a new battery with the positive (+)side up.

Put in the case securely.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

195


NOTICE

� Make sure that the positive side ofthe controller battery is facing cor-rectly.

� Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause rust.

� Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside of the controller, or itmay interfere with proper operation.

� Be careful not to bend the electrodeof the controller battery insertionand that dust or oil does not ad-here to the transmitter case.

� Close the battery case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that thecontroller operates properly. If the control-ler still does not operate properly, contactyour Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

To ensure correct audio system op-erations:

� Be careful not to spill beveragesover the audio system.

� Do not put anything other than acassette tape or compact disc intothe slot.

� The use of a cellular phone insideor near the vehicle may cause anoise from the speakers of the au-dio system. This does not indicatea malfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withyour radio—it is just the normal result ofconditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terraincan interfere with FM reception. Powerlines or telephone wires can interfere withAM signals. And of course, radio signalshave a limited range. The farther you arefrom a station, the weaker its signal willbe. In addition, reception conditionschange constantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception prob-lems that probably do not indicate a prob-lem with your radio:

FM

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, theeffective range of FM is about 40 km (25miles). Once outside this range, you maynotice fading and drifting, which increasewith the distance from the radio transmit-ter. They are often accompanied by distor-tion.

Multi–path—FM signals are reflective,making it possible for two signals to reachyour antenna at the same time. If thishappens, the signals will cancel each oth-er out, causing a momentary flutter orloss of reception.

Static and fluttering—These occur whensignals are blocked by buildings, trees, orother large objects. Increasing the basslevel may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal youare listening to is interrupted or weak-ened, and there is another strong stationnearby on the FM band, your radio maytune in the second station until the origi-nal signal can be picked up again.

Car audio system operatinghints

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

196


AM

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected bythe upper atmosphere—especially at night.These reflected signals can interfere withthose received directly from the radio sta-tion, causing the radio station to soundalternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected sig-nal and a signal received directly from aradio station are very nearly the samefrequency, they can interfere with eachother, making it difficult to hear the broad-cast.

Static—AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as hightension power lines, lightening, or electri-cal motors. This results in static.

CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYERAND TAPES

For the best performance for your cas-sette player and tapes:

Clean the tape head and other parts regu-larly.

� A dirty tape head or tape path candecrease sound quality and tangle yourcassette tapes. The easiest way toclean them is by using a cleaning tape.(A wet type is recommended.)

Use high–quality cassettes.

� Low–quality cassette tapes can causemany problems, including poor sound,inconsistent playing speed, andconstant auto–reversing. They can alsoget stuck or tangled in the cassetteplayer.

� Do not use a cassette if it has beendamaged or tangled or if its label ispeeling off.

� Do not leave a cassette in the playerif you are not listening to it, especiallyif it is hot outside.

� Store cassettes in their cases and outof direct sunlight.

� Avoid using cassettes with a total play-ing time longer than 100 minutes (50minutes per side). The tape used inthese cassettes is thin and could getstuck or tangled in the cassette player.

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISCPLAYER AND DISCS

� Your compact disc player is intendedfor use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

� Extremely high temperatures can keepyour compact disc player from working.On hot days, use the air conditioningto cool the vehicle interior before youlisten to a disc.

� Bumpy roads or other vibrations maycause your compact disc player toskip.

� If moisture gets into your compact discplayer, you may not hear any soundeven though your compact disc playerappears to be working. Remove thedisc from the player and wait until itdries.

CAUTION

Compact disc players use an invisiblelaser beam which could cause hazard-ous radiation exposure if directedoutside the unit. Be sure to operatethe player correctly.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

197


� Use only compact discs marked asshown above. The following productsmay not be playable on your compactdisc player.

Copy–protected CDCD–R (CD–Recordable)CD–RW (CD–Re–writable)CD–ROM

Special shaped discs

Low quality discs

Labeled discs

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the player orchanger, do not use special shaped,low quality or labeled discs such asthose shown in the illustrations.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

198


Correct Wrong

� Handle compact discs carefully, espe-cially when you are inserting them.Hold them on the edge and do notbend them. Avoid getting fingerprintson them, particularly on the shiny side.

� Dirt, scrapes, warping, pin holes, orother disc damage could cause theplayer to skip or to repeat a section ofa track. (To see a pin hole, hold thedisc up to the light.)

� Remove discs from the compact discplayer when you are not listening tothem. Store them in their plastic casesaway from moisture, heat, and directsunlight.

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with asoft, lint–free cloth that has been damp-ened with water. Wipe in a straight linefrom the center to the edge of the disc(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,lint–free cloth. Do not use a conventionalrecord cleaner or anti–static device.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

199


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSAir conditioning systemControls 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating tips 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel and rear vents 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 8

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

200


1. Fan speed selector

2. “AUTO” button

3. Temperature selector

4. “A/C” button

5. Air flow selector

6. Air intake selector

7. “OFF” button

Controls (without “DUAL” button)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

201


“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the air condi-tioning, push the “AUTO” button. An indi-cator light will illuminate to show that theautomatic operation mode has been se-lected.

In the automatic operation mode, the airconditioning selects the most suitable fanspeed, air flow, air intake and on–off ofthe air conditioning according to the tem-perature.

When you push the “AUTO” button withthe air intake mode at FRESH, internalcirculation may be applied for maximumcooling.

You may use manual controls if you wantto select your own settings.

To turn off the automatic operation, pushthe “OFF” button.

Fan speed selector

Select the mode button you desire to ad-just the fan speed and push it. An indica-tor light will illuminate to show which fanspeed mode is being selected.

In automatic operation, you do not haveto adjust the fan speed unless you desireanother fan speed mode.

Temperature selector

To increase the temperature, push the“UP” side, to decrease it, push the“DOWN” side.

“LO” appears when you adjust to maxi-mum cooling, and “HI” appears when youadjust to maximum warming.

“OFF” button

Push the “OFF” button to turn off the airconditioning system.

Air flow selector

Push one of the buttons to select thevents used for air flow. An indicator lightwill illuminate to show which air flowmode is being selected.

In automatic operation, you do not haveto select the air flow unless you desireanother air flow mode.

1. Panel—Air flows from the instrumentpanel vents and rear vents.

2. Bi–level— Air flows from both the floorvents, the instrument panel vents andrear vents.

3. Floor— Air flows mainly from the floorvents.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

202


4. Floor/Windshield— Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents.

5. Windshield— Air flows mainly from thewindshield vents.

When this button is pressed, air flowsmainly from the windshield vents andturns on the defogging function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.

Pressing this button once again returnsthe air flow mode to the last one used.

This button allows the air intake toselect FRESH automatically. This is toclean up the front view more quickly.If you want to return the setting toRECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-take selector button once again.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clearsthe front view more quickly.

For details about air flow selector settings,see “Air flow selector settings” describedbelow.

Air intake selector

Push the button to select the air source.An indicator light will illuminate to showwhich the air source is being selected.

1. Recirculate— Recirculates the air insidethe vehicle.

2. Fresh— Draws outside air into the sys-tem.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,the air intake mode may change automati-cally to FRESH depending on the condi-tion of the air conditioning system.

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, push the“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicatorwill come on. To turn the air conditioningoff, push the button again.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, thereis a problem in the air conditioning systemand the air conditioning automaticallyshuts off. If this happens, take your ve-hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

203


1. Fan speed selector

2. Temperature selector (at the independent mode: for driver)(at the linked mode: for driver andfront passenger)

3. “AUTO” button

4. “DUAL” button

5. Temperature selector (for front passenger)

6. Air flow selector

7. Air intake selector

8. “A/C” button

9. “OFF” button

Controls (with “DUAL” button)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

204


“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the air condi-tioning, push the “AUTO” button. An indi-cator light will illuminate to show that theautomatic operation mode has been se-lected.

In the automatic operation mode, the airconditioning selects the most suitable fanspeed, air flow, air intake and on–off ofthe air conditioning according to the tem-perature.

When you push the “AUTO” button withthe air intake mode at FRESH, internalcirculation may be applied for maximumcooling.

You may use manual controls if you wantto select your own settings.

To turn off the automatic operation, pushthe “OFF” button.

Fan speed selector

Select the mode button you desire to ad-just the fan speed and push it. An indica-tor light will illuminate to show which fanspeed mode is being selected.

In automatic operation, you do not haveto adjust the fan speed unless you desireanother fan speed mode.

Temperature selector

To increase the temperature, push the “�”side, to decrease it, push the “�” side.

“LO” appears when you adjust to maxi-mum cooling, and “HI” appears when youadjust to maximum warming.

“DUAL” button

This button is used to set the tempera-tures independently for the driver’s seatand front passenger seat.

Pushing the button changes the modefrom independent and linked.

Independent mode: Temperatures can beset independently for the driver’s seat andfront passenger’s seat. An indicator lightwill illuminated to show that the indepen-dent mode has been selected.

Linked mode: The same temperature isset for the driver’s seat and front passen-ger’s seat.

When the temperature for the front pas-senger’s seat is changed in linked mode,the mode is changed automatically to in-dependent mode.

“OFF” button

Push the “OFF” button to turn off the airconditioning system.

Air flow selector

Push one of the buttons to select thevents used for air flow. An indicator lightwill illuminate to show which air flowmode is being selected.

In automatic operation, you do not haveto select the air flow unless you desireanother air flow mode.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

205


1. Panel—Air flows from the instrumentpanel vents and rear vents.

2. Bi–level— Air flows from both the floorvents, the instrument panel vents andrear vents.

3. Floor— Air flows mainly from the floorvents.

4. Floor/Windshield— Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents.

5. Windshield— Air flows mainly from thewindshield vents.

When this button is pressed, air flowsmainly from the windshield vents andturns on the defogging function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.

Pressing this button once again returnsthe air flow mode to the last one used.

This button allows the air intake toselect FRESH automatically. This is toclean up the front view more quickly.If you want to return the setting toRECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-take selector button once again.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clearsthe front view more quickly.

For details about air flow selector settings,see “Air flow selector settings” describedbelow.

Air intake selector

Push the button to select the air source.An indicator light will illuminate to showwhich the air source is being selected.

1. Recirculate— Recirculates the air insidethe vehicle.

2. Fresh— Draws outside air into the sys-tem.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,the air intake mode may change automati-cally to FRESH depending on the condi-tion of the air conditioning system.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

206


“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, push the“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicatorwill come on. To turn the air conditioningoff, push the button again.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, thereis a problem in the air conditioning systemand the air conditioning automaticallyshuts off. If this happens, take your ve-hicle to your Toyota dealer for service.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

207


� To cool off your Toyota after it hasbeen parked in the hot sun, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes.This vents the hot air, allowing the airconditioning to cool the interior morequickly.

� Make sure the air intake grilles in frontof the windshield are not blocked (byleaves or snow, for example).

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield. The windshield couldfog up because of the difference in airtemperature on the inside and outsideof the windshield.

� Keep the area under the front seatsclear to allow air to circulate through-out the vehicle.

� On cold days, set the fan speed tohigh for a minute to help clear theintake ducts of snow or moisture. Thiscan reduce the amount of fogging onthe windows.

� When driving on dusty roads, close allwindows. If dust thrown up by the ve-hicle is still drawn into the vehicle afterclosing the windows, it is recommendedthat the air intake selector be set toFRESH and the fan speed selector toany setting.

Air flow selector settings Operating tips

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

208


� If following another vehicle on a dustyroad, or driving in windy and dustyconditions, it is recommended that theair intake selector be temporarily set toRECIRCULATE, which will close off theoutside passage and prevent outsideair and dust from entering the vehicleinterior.

Heating

For best results, set controls as follows:

For automatic operation—

Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature— To the desired

temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air conditioning—OFF

For manual operation—

Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards WARMAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—FLOORAir conditioning—OFF

� For quick heating, select recirculatedair for a few minutes. To keep thewindows from fogging, select fresh af-ter the vehicle interior has been war-med.

� Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-fied heating.

� Choose floor/windshield air flow to heatthe vehicle interior while defrosting ordefogging the windshield.

Air conditioning



Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature— To the desired

temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air conditioning—ON


Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards COLDAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—ON

� For quick cooling, select recirculatedair for a few minutes.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

209


Ventilation



Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature— Towards low temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air conditioning—OFF


Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards COLDAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—OFF

Defogging and defrosting

—The inside of the windshield


—For automatic operation

Temperature— Towards high temperatureto heat; low temperatureto cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

—For manual operation

Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards high temperature

to heat; low temperatureto cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Pressing the windshield air flow buttonturns on the defogging function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.

When pressing the windshield air flow but-ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-matically. This is to clean up the frontview more quickly.

If you want to return the setting to RE-CIRCULATE mode, press the air intakeselector button once again.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clears thefront view more quickly.

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield—the difference be-tween the outside and inside tempera-tures could make the fogging worse.

—The outside of the windshield


—For automatic operation

Temperature— Towards high temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

—For manual operation

Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards high temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

210


Pressing the windshield air flow buttonturns on the defogging function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.

When pressing the windshield air flow but-ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-matically. This is to clean up the frontview more quickly.

If you want to return the setting to RE-CIRCULATE mode, press the air intakeselector button once again.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clears thefront view more quickly.

� To heat the vehicle interior while de-frosting the windshield, choosefloor/windshield air flow.

Center vents

Side vents

Rear vents

If air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe instrument panel vents and rear vents.The instrument panel vents and rear ventsmay be opened or closed as shown.

Instrument panel and rearvents

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

211


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOther equipmentMulti–information display 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compass 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlet 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box 222. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener 223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary boxes 226. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear console box 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tissue box holder 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coin holder 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trash holder 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front cup holders 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear cup holders and tray 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bottle holders 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tie–down hooks 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grocery bag hooks 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo net hooks 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage cover 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double deck 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roof luggage carrier 238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat 239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 9

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

212


1. “RESET” button

2. “MODE” button

3. Air conditioning system without “DUAL”button—Cruise information display

Air conditioning system with “DUAL”button—Outside temperature and cruiseinformation display

4. Clock

5. Air conditioning system without “DUAL”button only—Outside temperaturedisplay

6. “:00” button

7. “M” button

8. “H” button

Multi–information display—

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

213


Operate the multi–information displaywith the ignition switch on.

When the ignition switch is turned to“ON”, the last previously used mode dis-played just before the ignition switch isturned off will appear.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the multi–informationdisplay, the display will automatically beset to the initial mode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

The digital clock indicates the time.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position.

To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.

If quick adjustment to a full hour is de-sired, push the “:00” button.

For example, if the “:00” button is de-pressed when the time is between1:01—1:29, the time will change to 1:00.If the time is between 1:30—1:59, thetime will change to 2:00.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the clock, the time dis-play will automatically be set to 1:00 (oneo’clock).

The outside temperature display indi-cates the outside air temperature. Thedisplayed value is updated.

The displayed temperature ranges from–30�C (–22�F) up to 50�C (122�F).

If there is some abnormality in the con-nection of the outside air temperature sen-sor, “––�C” (“––�F”) will appear on thedisplay. If “––�C” (“––�F”) appears on thedisplay, contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that “––�C” (“––�F”)appears momentarily when the ignition isquickly turned to “ON”. It is normal if itgoes out soon.

—Before using themulti–information display —Clock

—Outside temperature display(air conditioning system without“DUAL” button)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

214


Air conditioning system with“DUAL” button only—

The outside temperature display (airconditioning system with “DUAL” but-ton) and cruise information display indi-cates the following information.

Every time you push the “MODE” but-ton, the display toggles through thisinformation.

1. Outside temperature

2. Driving range

3. Average fuel consumption

4. Average vehicle speed

5. Display off

The displayed values in the cruise infor-mation display indicate general drivingconditions. Accuracy varies with drivinghabits and road conditions.

1. Outside temperature (“OUTSIDE �C”or “OUTSIDE �F”)

The outside temperature display indi-cates the outside air temperature.

The displayed value is updated every 1second.

The displayed temperature ranges from–30�C (–22�F) up to 50�C (122�F).

If there is some abnormality in the con-nection of the outside air temperature sen-sor, “––�C” (“––�F”) will appear on thedisplay. If “––�C” (“––�F”) appears on thedisplay, contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that “––�C” (“––�F”)appears momentarily when the ignition isquickly turned to “ON”. It is normal if itgoes out soon.

—Cruise information display

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

215


2. Driving range(“RANGE MI” or “RANGE km”)

The distance the vehicle can travel withthe remaining fuel is calculated anddisplayed based on the quantity of re-maining fuel and past fuel consumption.

The driving range display indicates theapproximate distance that you can driveuntil the fuel gauge reaches “E”. It isdifferent from the actual distance traveled.

The displayed value is updated about ev-ery 10 seconds.

Every time you refuel the vehicle, the cal-culation is reset.

The actual driving range varies with driv-ing habits and road conditions. If fuel con-sumption is good, the driving range will belonger. If fuel consumption is poor, thedriving range will be shorter.

If the low fuel level warning light comeson, refuel even if the display indicatesthat the vehicle can be driven further.

3. Average fuel consumption(“AVG. MPG” or “AVG. L/100 km”)

Average fuel consumption is calculatedand displayed based on total drivingdistance and total fuel consumptionwith the engine running.


To reset the calculation, push the“RESET” button about 1 second.

4. Average vehicle speed(“AVG. MPH” or “AVG. km/h”)

Average vehicle speed is calculated anddisplayed based on total driving dis-tance and total driving time with theengine running.


To reset the calculation, push the“RESET” button about 1 second.

The direction is indicated on the insiderear view mirror.

If the ignition switch was turned off withthe system on, the system will automati-cally turn back on when the ignition switchis turned on.

Push the “COMP” switch to turn the com-pass system on and off.

Compass

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

216


The compass indicates the directionthat the vehicle is heading. In theabove case, it shows that the vehicle isheading north.

Displays Directions

NNEE

SES

SWW

NW

NorthNortheast

EastSoutheast

SouthSouthwest

WestNorthwest

The compass may not show the correctdirection in the following conditions:

� The vehicle is stopped immediately af-ter turning.

� The compass does not adjust while thevehicle is stopped.

� The ignition switch is turned off imme-diately after turning.

� The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

� The vehicle is in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

� The vehicle is magnetized. (There is amagnet or a metal object on or nearthe inside rear view mirror.)

� The battery has been disconnected.

Your vehicle is out of the set zone. Referto the “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS” be-low to set the zone number.

The compass works to calibrate the direc-tion automatically while the vehicle is inmotion, if deviation is small.

For additional precision or for completecalibrating, see “CALIBRATING THECOMPASS” below.

Compass sensor

The compass sensor is on the wind-shield.

NOTICE

Do not put magnets or a metal objecton or near the inside rear view mirrorof the vehicle. Doing this may causemalfunction of the compass sensor.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

217


CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviationcalibration)

The direction display on the compassdeviates from the true direction deter-mined by the earth’s magnetic field. Theangle of deviation varies according to thegeographic position of the vehicle.

To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle,then push and hold the “COMP” switchuntil the zone number appears on the dis-play. Then push the “COMP” switch, refer-ring to the following map to select thenumber of the zone where the vehicle is.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

218


Zone number

After calibration, leaving the system forseveral seconds returns it to the compassmode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

Hawaii: 5Samoa: 5Guam: 8Saipan: 8

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

219


CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circlingcalibration)

Sometimes the direction display on thecompass may not change after a turn. Torectify this, stop the vehicle and push andhold the “COMP” switch until “C” appearson the display.

If “C” appears on the display because ofa drastic change in the magnetic field,perform circling calibration.

Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h (5mph) or less. If there is not enough spaceto drive in a circle, drive around theblock.

After driving 1 to 3 circles in the abovemethod, calibration is completed when thedirection is shown on the display.

If calibration cannot be performed becauseof the magnetized vehicle etc., take yourvehicle to Toyota dealer.

Perform circling calibration just afteryou have purchased your Toyota. Andthen always perform circling calibrationafter the battery has been removed, re-placed or disconnected.

� Do not perform circling calibration ofthe compass in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

� During calibration, do not operate elec-tric systems (moon roof, power win-dows, etc.) as they may interfere withthe calibration.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

220


CAUTION

� When doing the circling calibration,be sure to secure a wide space,and watch out for people and ve-hicles in the neighborhood. Do notviolate any local traffic rules whileperforming circling calibration.

� Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

Rear console box

Luggage compartment

The power outlets are designed forpower supply for car accessories.

In the rear console box—To use thepower outlet, push the lid of the auxil-iary box to open.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position for the power outlet to be used.

Power outlet (12 VDC)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

221


NOTICE

� To prevent the fuse from beingblown, do not use the electricityover the total vehicle capacity of 12VDC/120W.

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlets longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

� Close the power outlet lids whenthe power outlets are not in use.Inserting a foreign object other thanthe appropriate plug that fits theoutlet, or allowing any liquid intothe outlet may cause electrical fail-ure or short circuits.

This power outlet is designed for useas a power supply for electric ap-pliances in the vehicle.

The key must be in the “ON” position forthe power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out-let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt touse an appliance that requires more than115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuitwill activate and cut the power supply.The power supply will restart automaticallywhen you use an appliance that operateswithin the 115 VAC/100W limits.

To use the power outlet, push the mainswitch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicatethat the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turnthe power outlet off. When the power out-let is not in use, make sure that the mainswitch is turned off.

Power outlet (115 VAC)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

222


NOTICE

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlet longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

� Close the power outlet lid when thepower outlet is not in use. Insertinga foreign object other than the ap-propriate plug that fits the outletmay cause electrical failure or shortcircuits.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following electric appliances eventhough their power consumption is un-der 115 VAC/100W. These appliancesmay not operate properly.

� Appliances with high initial peak watt-age: cathode–ray tube type televisions,compressor–driven refrigerators, electricpumps, electric tools, etc.

� Measuring devices which process pre-cise data: medical equipment, measur-ing instruments, etc.

� Other appliances requiring an extremelystable power supply: microcomputer–controlled electric blankets, touch sen-sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may causeradio noise.

To use the glove box, do this.

To open: Pull the lever.

With the instrument panel lights on, theglove box light will come on.

To lock: Insert the master key and turn itclockwise.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the glove box doorclosed while driving.

Glove box

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

223


On some models, an auxiliary box islocated inside the glove box.

To increase the capacity of the glove box,raise the lower panel of the auxiliary box.

The garage door opener ( �

Universal Transceiver) is manufacturedunder license from HomeLink � and canbe programmed to operate garagedoors, gates, entry doors, door locks,home lighting systems, and securitysystems, etc.

Garage door opener

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

224


(a) Programming the HomeLink �

The HomeLink � in your vehicle has 3buttons and you can store one programfor each button.

To ensure correct programming into theHomeLink�, install a new battery in thehand–held transmitter prior to program-ming.

The battery side of the hand–held trans-mitter must be pointed away from theHomeLink� during the programming pro-cess.

For Canadian users, follow the procedurein “Programming an entrance gate/pro-gramming all devices in the Canadianmarket”.

1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink� buttonsyou want to program.

2. Place your hand–held garage transmit-ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away fromthe surface of the HomeLink�.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink�

in view while programming.

3. Simultaneously press and hold thehand–held garage transmitter buttonalong with the selected HomeLink� but-ton.

4. When the indicator light on theHomeLink� changes from a slow to arapid flash after 20 seconds, you canrelease both buttons.

5. Test the operation of the HomeLink� bypressing the newly programmed button.If programming a garage door opener,check to see if the garage door opensand closes.

If the garage door does not operate, iden-tify if your garage transmitter is of the“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold theprogrammed HomeLink� button. The ga-rage door has the rolling code feature ifthe indicator light (on the HomeLink�)flashes rapidly and then remains lit after2 seconds. If your garage transmitter isthe “Rolling Code” type, proceed to theheading “Programming a rolling code sys-tem”.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother device.

Programming a rolling code system

If your device is “Rolling Code”equipped, it is necessary to followsteps 1 through 4 under the heading“Programming the HomeLink �” beforeproceeding with the steps listed below.

1. Locate the “training” button on the ceil-ing mounted garage door opener motor.The exact location and color of thebutton may vary by brand of garagedoor opener. Refer to the owner’sguide supplied by the garage dooropener manufacturer for the location ofthis “training” button.

2. Press the “training” button on the ceil-ing mounted garage door opener motor.

Following this step, you have 30 secondsin which to initiate step 3 below.

3. Press and release the vehicle’s pro-grammed HomeLink� button twice. Thegarage door may open. If the doordoes open, the programming process iscomplete. If the door does not open,press and release the button a thirdtime. This third press and release willcomplete the programming process byopening the garage door.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

225


The ceiling mounted garage door openermotor should now recognize theHomeLink� unit and be able activate thegarage door up/down.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother rolling code system.

Programming an entrance gate/program-ming all devices in the Canadian market

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink� but-tons you want to program.

2. Place your hand–held gate/devicetransmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)away from the surface of theHomeLink�.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink�

in view while programming.

3. Press and hold the selectedHomeLink� button.

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)the hand–held gate/device transmitterbutton every two seconds until step 5is complete.

5. When the indicator light on theHomeLink� changes from a slow to arapid flash after 20 seconds, you canrelease both buttons.

6. Test the operation of the HomeLink� bypressing the newly programmed button.Check to see if the gate/device oper-ates correctly.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother device.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as homesecurity systems, home door locks orlighting, contact your authorized Toyotadealer for assistance.

Reprogramming a button

Individual HomeLink� buttons cannot beerased, however, to reprogram a singlebutton, follow the procedure “Programmingthe HomeLink�”.

(b) Operating the HomeLink �

To operate the HomeLink�, press theappropriate HomeLink� button to activatethe programmed device. The HomeLink�

indicator light should come on. TheHomeLink� continues to send the signalfor up to 20 seconds as long as thebutton is pressed.

(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink �

memory (all three programs)

To erase all previously programmed codesat one time, press and hold down the 2outside buttons for 20 seconds until theindicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erasethe programs stored in the HomeLink�

memory.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

226


CAUTION

� When programming the HomeLink �

Universal Transceiver, you may beoperating a garage door or otherdevice. Make sure people and ob-jects are out of the way of the ga-rage door or other device to pre-vent potential harm or damage.

� Do not use this HomeLink � Univer-sal Transceiver with any garagedoor opener that lacks the safetystop and reverse feature as re-quired by federal safety standards.(This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured beforeApril 1, 1982.) A garage door open-er which cannot detect an object(signaling the door to stop and re-verse), does not meet current feder-al safety standards. Using a garagedoor opener without these featuresincreases risk of serious injury ordeath.

FCC ID: CB2300NHL3CANADA: 2791032088

This device complies with FCC RulesPart 15. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence that may be received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

WARNING: This transmitter has beentested and complies with FCC andDOC/MPAC rules. Changes or modifi-cations not expressly approved by thepartly responsible for compliancecould void the user’s authority to op-erate the device.

To use the auxiliary bo xes, open thelids as shown in the following illustra-tions.

CAUTION

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop, always keep the auxiliary boxclosed while driving.

� Type A—As this holder is designedfor holding a light object such aseyeglasses, do not place any heavyobjects in them. Heavy objects maycause the holder to open and thecontents to fly out resulting in inju-ries.

NOTICE

Type A—During hot weather, the inte-rior of the vehicle becomes very hot.Do not leave anything flammable ordeformable such as a lighter, glasses,etc. inside.

Auxiliary boxes—

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

227


Type A (over head console)

Type B (instrument panel)

Type C (rear console box)

Type D (rear tire house)

Type E (right side of luggage compart-ment)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

228


The right side of luggage compartmentauxiliary box is equipped with a belt tohold the objects.

To use the belt, do the following.

1. To loosen: Pull the buckle forward.

2. To tighten: Pull on the belt.

Make sure the objects are securely held.

CONSOLE BOX TABLE

To use the console box table, open it.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the table closed whiledriving.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the table, donot place any object heavier than 1kg (2.20 lb.) on it, and do not leaveany object on the table for a longtime.

—Using the holding belts Rear console box

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

229


CONSOLE BOX

To access the rear console box, pull upthe console box lid while pushing thelock release button.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the console box closedwhile driving.

The rear console box is equipped witha tissue box holder on the inside of therear console box lid.

To use the tissue box holder:

1. Pull up the console box lid while push-ing the lock release button.

2. Place a tissue box in the lid.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stopwhile driving, keep the console boxlid closed when it is not in use.

Tissue box holder

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

230


The rear console box is equipped witha coin holder.

To use the coin holder:

1. Pull up the console box lid while push-ing the lock release button.

2. Push coins down into the holder.

The coin holder is detachable.

Coin holder Trash holder

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

231


The trash holder is designed to use thegrocery bag as a trash bag.

To use the trash holder:

1. Raise the trash holder.

2. Fit the grocery bag onto the holder byhanging its handles on the two hooksindicated at the left and right.

The trash holder can support to 1 kg(2.20 lb.).

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stopwhile driving, keep the trash holderclosed when it is not in use.

If the trash holder is pulled strongly orstepped on, it will detach from the rearconsole box to protect it from damag-ing.

If the trash holder becomes detached, re-install it in a horizontal direction as indi-cated in the illustration. It cannot beinstalled in any other direction.

NOTICE

Do not deliberately pull or step onthe trash holder, as it may be dam-aged or broken.

Front cup holders

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

232


The cup holders are designed for hold-ing cups or drink–cans securely.

The cup holder can be adjustable to thesize of the cups or drink–cans bychanging the holder position and thearm position, as shown.

With the instrument panel lights on, thefront cup holder position indicator lightswill come on.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other thancups or drink–cans in the cup holder,as such items may be thrown aboutin the compartment and possibly in-jured people in the vehicle duringsudden braking or in an accident.

1. To use the rear cup holders and tray,pull the armrest out.

Rear cup holders and tray

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

233


The cup holders are designed for hold-ing cups or drink–cans securely.

2. To use the rear cup holder, push andpull it out.

3. To use the tray, pull it out.

CAUTION

� Do not place anything else otherthan cups or drink–cans in the cupholder, as such items may bethrown about in the compartmentand possibly injure people in thevehicle during sudden braking or inan accident.

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stopwhile driving, keep the cup holderclosed when it is not in use.

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop, always keep the tray closedwhile driving.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the tray, do notplace any object heavier than 2 kg(4.40 lb.) on it, and do not leave anyobject on the tray for a long time.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

234


Front doors

Rear doors

The bottle holders are designed to holdbottles securely.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to use the holder forany other purpose for which it wasintended. Inappropriately sized orshaped objects may be thrown aboutin the compartment and possibly in-jure people in the vehicle during asudden braking or an accident.

NOTICE

Do not put a cup or open bottle inthe bottle holder because the con-tents may spill when the door opensor closes.

To secure your luggage, use the tie–down hooks as shown above.

See “Luggage stowage precautions” onpage 253 in Section 2 for precautionswhen loading luggage.

CAUTION

To avoid personal injury, keep the tie–down hooks folded in place on thefloor when not in use.

NOTICE

Do not use the seat anchors insteadof the tie–down hooks.

Bottle holders Tie–down hooks

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

235


These hooks are designed to hangthings like grocery bags.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hook, donot hang any object heavier than 1 kg(2.20 lb.) in it.

These hooks are designed to hang thecargo net.

To hang the cargo net, use the cargo nethooks and rear tie–down hooks.

Although the cargo net itself is not in-cluded as an original equipment, thesehooks can be used to hang the cargo net.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hook, avoidhanging things other than a cargo neton it.

Grocery bag hooks Cargo net hooks Luggage cover

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

236


USING LUGGAGE COVER

To use the luggage cover:

1. Attach the front hooks of the lug-gage cover to the head restraint.

2. Pull out the rear luggage cover andhook it on the anchors.

CAUTION

Do not place anything on the luggagecover. Such items may be thrownabout and possibly injure people inthe vehicle during sudden braking oran accident. REMOVING LUGGAGE COVER

To remove the luggage cover, detach itshooks from the head restraint. Then,retract and release both ends, and re-move the luggage cover.

After you remove the luggage cover, placeit somewhere other than the passengercompartment. This will prevent passengersfrom injury in the event of a sudden stopor accident.

To use the double deck:

1. Turn the left and right knobs fromthe “LOCK” position to the“UNLOCK” position.

Double deck

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

237


2. Hold the handle and raise the doubledeck on the rear tire houses.

3. Turn the left and right knobs fromthe “UNLOCK” position to the“LOCK” position.

Make sure the double deck is securelylocked.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stop,make sure that the double deckknobs are always in the “LOCK” posi-tion when the double deck is in theraised or lowered position.

NOTICE

When using the double deck at theraised position, do not place any ob-ject heavier than 30 kg (66 lb.).

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

238


The roof luggage carrier consists ofroof rails (1) attached to the roof andsliding cross rails (2).

To adjust the positions of cross rails, dothis.

1. Turn the knobs counterclockwise toloosen the cross rails.

2. Slide the cross rails to the desiredposition for loading the luggages ofvarious sizes.

3. After adjusting, be sure to tighten thecross rails by turning knobs clockwise.

Follow the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions when installing the attach-ments or their equivalent.

Paint mark

When there is no luggage on the roofluggage carrier, Toyota recommends thatthe front and rear cross rails be securedin the positions indicated in the illustra-tion, according to the following procedure.This may diminish wind noise during driv-ing.

1. Turn the knobs counterclockwise toloosen the cross rails.

2. Slide the ends of the cross rails to thepaint mark.

3. Be sure to tighten the cross rails byturning knobs clockwise.

CAUTION

When you load cargo on the roof lug-gage carrier, observe the following:

� Place the cargo so that its weightis distributed evenly between thefront and rear axles.

� If loading long or wide cargo, neverexceed the vehicle overall length orwidth. (See “Dimensions and cargoload” on page 352 in Section 8 forinformation on your vehicle overalllength and width.)

� Before driving, make sure the cargois securely fastened on the roofluggage carrier.

� Loading cargo on the roof luggagecarrier will make the center of thevehicle gravity higher. Avoid highspeeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,sudden braking or abrupt maneu-vers, otherwise it may result in lossof control or vehicle rollover due tofailure to operate this vehicle cor-rectly.

Roof luggage carrier

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

239


� If driving for a long distance, onrough roads, or at high speeds,stop the vehicle now and then dur-ing the trip to make sure the cargoremains in its place.

� Do not exceed 54 kg (120 lb.) cargoweight on the roof luggage carrier.

NOTICE

When loading the luggages, be carefulnot to scratch the surface of themoon roof. Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the floor carpet and floor mat have 2holes, then they are designed for use withlocking clips. Fix the floor mat with lock-ing clips into the holes in the floor carpet.

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properlyplaced on the floor carpet. If the floormat slips and interferes with themovement of the pedals during driv-ing, it may cause an accident.

Floor mat

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

240


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

315


DO–IT–YOURSELF MAINTENANCEIntroductionEngine compartment overview 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse locations 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Do–it–yourself service precautions 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts and tools 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7– 1

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

316


1. Windshield and back window washerfluid tank

2. Power steering fluid reservoir

3. Engine oil level dipstick

4. Engine coolant reservoir

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Fuse block

8. Battery

9. Condenser

10. Radiator

Engine compartment overview�1GR–FE engine

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

317


1. Windshield and back window washerfluid tank

2. Power steering fluid reservoir

3. Engine coolant reservoir

4. Engine oil level dipstick

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Fuse block

8. Battery

9. Condenser

10. Radiator

�2UZ–FE engine

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

318


Sparefuses

If you perform maintenance by yourself,be sure to follow the correct proceduregiven in this Section.

You should be aware that improper or in-complete servicing may result in operatingproblems.

Performing do–it–yourself maintenanceduring the warranty period may affect yourwarranty coverage. Read the separateToyota Warranty statement for details andsuggestions.

This Section gives instructions only forthose items that are relatively easy for anowner to perform. As explained in Section6, there are still a number of items thatmust be done by a qualified technicianwith special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do–it–yourself maintenance, see “Parts andtools” on page 320 in this Section.

Utmost care should be taken when work-ing on your vehicle to prevent accidentalinjury. Here are a few precautions thatyou should be especially careful to ob-serve:

Fuse locationsDo–it–yourself serviceprecautions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

319


CAUTION

� When the engine is running, keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom the moving fan and enginedrive belts. (Removing rings,watches, and ties is advisable.)

� Right after driving, the enginecompartment—the engine, radiator,exhaust manifold, power steeringfluid reservoir and spark plugboots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-ful not to touch them. Oil, fluidsand spark plugs may also be hot.

� If the engine is hot, do not removethe radiator cap or loosen the drainplugs to prevent burning yourself.

� Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames around fuel or thebattery. Their fumes are flammable.

� Do not get under your vehicle withjust the body jack supporting it. Al-ways use automotive jack stands orother solid supports.

� Use eye protection whenever youwork on or under your vehiclewhere you may be exposed to flyingor falling material, fluid spray, etc.

� Used engine oil contains potentiallyharmful contaminants which maycause skin disorders such as in-flammation or skin cancer, so careshould be taken to avoid prolongedand repeated contact with it. To re-move used engine oil from yourskin, wash thoroughly with soapand water.

� Do not leave used oil within thereach of children.

� Dispose of used oil and filter onlyin a safe and acceptable manner.Do not dispose of used oil and fil-ter in household trash, in sewers oronto the ground. Call your dealer ora service station for informationconcerning recycling or disposal.

� Be extremely cautious when work-ing on the battery. It contains poi-sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.


NOTICE

� Remember that battery and ignitioncables carry high currents or volt-ages. Be careful of accidentallycausing a short circuit.

� Add only demineralized or distilledwater to fill the radiator. And if youspill some of the coolant, be sureto wash it off with water to preventit from damaging the parts or paint.

� Do not allow dirt or anything elseto fall through the spark plug holes.

� Use only spark plugs of the speci-fied type. Using other types willcause engine damage, loss of per-formance or radio noise.

� Do not reuse iridium–tipped sparkplugs by cleaning or regapping.

� Do not overfill automatic transmis-sion fluid, or the transmissioncould be damaged.

� Do not drive with the air cleanerfilter removed, or excessive enginewear could result. Also backfiringcould cause a fire in the enginecompartment.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

320


� Be careful not to scratch the glasssurface with the wiper frame.

� When closing the engine hood,check to see that you have not for-gotten any tools, rags, etc.

Here is a list of parts and tools you willneed to perform do–it–yourself mainte-nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-signed in metric sizes, so your tools mustbe metric.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

� “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-lent

See page 325 in Section 7–2 for de-tails about engine oil selection.

Tools:

� Rag or paper towel

� Funnel (only for adding oil)

CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANTLEVEL


� “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” orequivalent

See page 326 in Section 7–2 for de-tails about coolant type selection.

� Demineralized or distilled water

Tools:

� Funnel (only for adding coolant)

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID


� SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3brake fluid

Tools:


� Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID


� Automatic transmission fluidDEXRON�II or III

Tools:


� Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION

Tools:

� Warm water

� Baking soda

� Grease

� Conventional wrench (for terminalclamp bolts)

Parts and tools

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

321


CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

� Fuse with same amperage rating asoriginal

ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts:

� Water

� Washer fluid containing antifreeze (forwinter use)

Tools:

� Funnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

Parts:

� Bulb with same number and wattagerating as original (See charts in “Re-placing light bulbs” on page 344 inSection 7–3.)

Tools:

� Screwdriver

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

322


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

323


DO–IT–YOURSELF MAINTENANCEEngine and ChassisChecking the engine oil level 324. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the engine coolant level 326. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the radiator and condenser 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking brake fluid 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking power steering fluid 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing the air conditioning filter 330. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire pressure 332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing tires 333. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating tires 334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing snow tires and chains 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wheels 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum wheel precautions 337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7– 2

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

324


Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

1GR–FE engine

Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

2UZ–FE engine

With the engine at operating tempera-ture and turned off, check the oil levelon the dipstick.

1. To get a true reading, the vehicleshould be on a level ground. After turn-ing off the engine, wait a few minutesfor the oil to drain back into the bottomof the engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag underthe end and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as faras it will go, or the reading will not becorrect.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oillevel while holding a rag under theend.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex-haust manifold.

NOTICE

Be careful not to drop the engine oilon the vehicle components.

If the oil level is below or only slightlyabove the low level, add engine oil ofthe same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engineoil in small quantities at a time, checkingthe dipstick. We recommend that you usea funnel when adding oil.

The approximate quantity of oil needed tofill between the low level and the full levelon the dipstick is indicated below for ref-erence.

When the level reaches within the correctrange, install the filler cap hand–tight.

Oil quantity, L (qt., lmp. qt.):1.5 (1.6, 1.3)

NOTICE

� Be careful not to spill the engineoil on the vehicle components.

� Avoid overfilling, or the enginecould be damaged.

� Check the oil level on the dipstickonce again after adding the oil.

Checking the engine oil level

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

325


ENGINE OIL SELECTION

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is filled inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade andviscosity.

Oil grade:API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” orILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity:SAE 5W–30

Outside temperature

SAE 5W–30 is the best choice for goodfuel economy and good starting in coldweather.

If SAE 5W–30 is not available, SAE10W–30 may be used. However, itshould be replaced with SAE 5W–30 atthe next oil change.

API service symbol

ILSAC certification mark

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

326


Oil identification marks

Either or both API registered marks areadded to some oil containers to helpyou select the oil you should use.

The API Service Symbol is located any-where on the outside of the container.

The top portion of the label shows the oilquality by API (American Petroleum Insti-tute) designations such as SL. The centerportion of the label shows the SAE viscos-ity grade such as SAE 5W–30. “Energy–Conserving” shown in the lower portion,indicates that the oil has fuel–saving ca-pabilities.

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-fication Mark is displayed on the front ofthe container.

To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-mance for your engine, “Toyota GenuineMotor Oil” is available, which has beenspecifically tested and approved for allToyota engines.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details about “Toyota Genuine MotorOil”.

Look at the see–through coolant reser-voir when the engine is cold. The cool-ant level is satisfactory if it is betweenthe “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir.If the level is low, add ethylene–glycoltype coolant for a proper corrosionprotection of aluminum components.

The coolant level in the reservoir will varywith engine temperature. However, if thelevel is on or below the “L” line, addcoolant. Bring the level up to the “F” line.

Always use ethylene–glycol type coolantfor a proper corrosion protection of alumi-num components. See information in thenext column.

If the coolant level drops within a shorttime after replenishing, there may be aleak in the system. Visually check theradiator, hoses, radiator cap and draincock and water pump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyotadealer test the cap pressure and checkfor leaks in the cooling system.

Checking the engine coolantlevel

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

327


CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do notremove the radiator cap when the en-gine is hot.

Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damageyour engine cooling system. Your coolantmust contain ethylene–glycol type coolantfor proper corrosion protection of yourengine that contains aluminumcomponents.

We have used “Toyota Genuine Long LifeCoolant” in your Toyota vehicle. In orderto avoid technical problems, we stronglyrecommend using “Toyota Genuine LongLife Coolant” or equivalent.

In addition to preventing freezing andsubsequent damage to the engine, thistype of coolant will also prevent corrosion.Further supplemental inhibitors or additivesare neither needed nor recommended.

Read the coolant container for informationon freeze protection. Follow the manufac-turer’s directions for how much to mixwith plain water (preferably demineralizedwater or distilled water). The total capacityof the cooling system is given on page353 in Section 8.

We recommend a 50% solution for yourToyota, to provide protection down toabout –35�C (–31�F). When it is extreme-ly cold, to provide protection down toabout –50�C (–58�F), a 60% solution isrecommended. Do not use more than 70%solution for better coolant performance.

NOTICE


The engine cooling system is integral tomaximizing performance of your Toyotavehicle. In line with this, it is stronglyrecommended that you use “ToyotaGenuine Long Life Coolant” for protectingthe system, as it is an ethylene–glycolbased premium antifreeze coolant withexcellent corrosion protection propertiesthat has been specifically formulated foruse in Toyota vehicles.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details about “Toyota Genuine LongLife Coolant”.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

328


If any of the above parts are extremelydirty or you are not sure of their condi-tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be care-ful not to touch the radiator or con-denser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiatorand condenser, do not perform thework by yourself.

To check the fluid level, simply look atthe see–through reservoir. The levelshould be between the “MAX” and“MIN” lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to godown slightly as the brake pads wear orwhen the fluid level in the accumulator ishigh.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, itmay indicate a serious mechanical prob-lem.

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 orFMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to thebrake reservoir.

Refilling brake fluid:

1. Turn the ignition switch off.

2. Depress the brake pedal more than 40times.

3. Remove the reservoir cover by hand.Add brake fluid up to the “MAX” line.

If you do not follow the procedure above,the reservoir may overflow.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Onceopened, brake fluid absorbs moisture fromthe air, and excess moisture can cause adangerous loss of braking.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the r eservoirbecause brake fluid can harm youreyes and damage painted surfaces. Iffluid gets in your eyes, flush youreyes with clean water immediately. Ifyou still feel uncomfortable with youreyes, go to the doctor.

Checking the radiator andcondenser Checking brake fluid

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

329


NOTICE

If you spill the fluid, be sure to washit off with water to prevent it fromdamaging the parts or paint.

If cold O.K.If hot O.K.

If coldadd

If hotadd

CloseOpen

Check the fluid level through the reser-voir. If necessary, add automatic trans-mission fluid DEXRON �II or III.

If the vehicle has been driven around 80km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a littlemore in frigid temperatures), the fluid ishot (60�C—80�C or 140�F—175�F). Youmay also check the level when the fluidis cold (about room temperature,10�C—30�C or 50�F—85�F) if the enginehas not been run for about five hours.

Clean all dirt from outside of the reservoirtank and look at the fluid level. If the fluidis cold, the level should be in the “COLD”range. Similarly, if it is hot, the fluid levelshould be in the “HOT” range. If the levelis at the low side of either range, addautomatic transmission fluid DEXRON�IIor III to bring the level within the range.

To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun-terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,turn it clockwise. After replacing the reser-voir cap, visually check the steering boxcase, vane pump and hose connectionsfor leaks or damage.

CAUTION

The reservoir tank may be hot so becareful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE

Avoid overfilling, or the power steer-ing could be damaged.

Checking power steering fluid

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

330


The air conditioning filter is behind theglove box.

The air conditioning filter may clog af-ter long use. The filter may need to bereplaced if the air flow of the air condi-tioning and heater experiences extremereductions in operating efficiency, or ifthe windows begin to fog up easily.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,inspect and replace the air conditioningfilter according to the maintenance sched-ule. (For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, please refer to the “Scheduled Main-tenance Guide” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement”.)

1. Open the glove box. Remove thescrew with a Phillips–head screw-driver and slide the hook as shown.

2. Push each side of the glove box todisconnect the claws.

Checking and replacing theair conditioning filter

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

331


3. Remove the filter case by holdingboth sides.

4. Remove the filter from the filtercase.

5. Inspect the filter on the surface.

If it is the just moderately dusty, it maybe cleaned by blowing compressed airfrom the reverse surface. Do not wash oroil the filter.

If it is dirty, it should be replaced.

When setting the filter to the filter case,ensure that the flat side of the filter isdown and the ribbed side is up.

Position the filter case so that the “↑UP”mark is pointing up and install it in thevehicle.

INFORMATION

The air filter should be installed prop-erly in position. The use of air condi-tioning with the air filter removedmay cause deteriorated dustproof per-formance and then affect air condi-tioning performance.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

332


Keep your tire pressures at the properlevel.

The recommended cold tire pressures, tiresize and the cargo load are given onpages 352 and 356 in Section 8. They arealso on the tire pressure label as shown.

You should check the tire pressure everytwo weeks, or at least once a month. Anddon’t forget the spare!

Incorrect tire pressure may waste fuel,reduce the comfort of driving, reduce tirelife and make your vehicle less safe todrive.

If a tire frequently needs refilling, have itchecked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Keep your tire pressure properly in-flated. Otherwise, the following condi-tions may occur and cause an acci-dent resulting in death or serious in-juries.

Low tire pressure (underinflation)—

� Excessive wear

� Uneven wear

� Poor handling

� Possibility of blowouts from over-heated tire

� Poor sealing of the tire bead

� Wheel deformation and/or tire sepa-ration

High tire pressure (overinflation)—

� Poor handling

� Excessive wear at the center of thetire tread

� A greater possibility of tire damagefrom road hazards

Checking tire pressure

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

333


The following instructions for checkingtire pressure should be observed:

� The pressure should be checked onlywhen the tires are cold. If your ve-hicle has been packed for at least 3hours and has not been driven formore than 1.5 km or 1 mile since, youwill get an accurate cold tire pressurereading.

� Always use a tire pressure gauge.The appearance of a tire can be mis-leading. Besides, tire pressures thatare even just a few pounds off candegrade ride and handling.

� Do not bleed or reduce tire pressureafter driving. It is normal for the tirepressure to be higher after driving.

� Never exceed the vehicle capacityweight. The passenger and luggageweight should be located so that thevehicle is balanced.

� Be sure to reinstall the tire inflationvalve caps. Without the valve caps,dirt or moisture could get into the valvecore and cause air leakage. If the capshave been lost, have new ones put onas soon as possible.

Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRES

Check the tire tread for the tread wearindicators. If the indicators show, re-place the tires.

The tires on your Toyota have built–intread wear indicators to help you knowwhen the tires need replacement. Whenthe tread depth wears to 1.6 mm (0.06in.) or less, the indicators will appear. Ifyou can see the indicators in two or moreadjacent grooves, the tire should be re-placed. The lower the tread, the higherthe risk of skidding.

The effectiveness of snow tires is lostif the tread wears down below 4 mm(0.16 in.).

If you have tire damage such as cuts,splits, cracks deep enough to exposethe fabric, or bulges indicating internaldamage, the tire should be replaced.

If a tire often goes flat or cannot be prop-erly repaired due to the size or locationof a cut or other damage, it should bereplaced. If you are not sure, consult withyour Toyota dealer.

If an air loss occurs while driving, do notcontinue driving with a deflated tire. Driv-ing even a short distance can damage atire beyond repair.

Any tires which are over 6 years oldmust be checked by a qualified techni-cian even if damage is not obvious.

Tires deteriorate with age even if theyhave never or seldom been used.

This also applies to the spare tire andtires stored for future use.

Checking and replacing tires

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

334


REPLACING YOUR TIRES

When replacing a tire, use a tire of thesame size and construction, and thesame or greater load capacity as theoriginally installed tires. Also, on four–wheel drive models, all the tires mustbe the same brand and have the sametread patterns.

Using any other size or type of tire mayseriously affect handling, ride, speedome-ter/odometer calibration, ground clearance,and clearance between the body and tiresor snow chains.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.Otherwise, an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

� Do not mix radial, bias belted, orbias–ply tires on your vehicle, asthis may cause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting in loss ofcontrol.

� Do not use tires other than themanufacturer’s recommended size,as this may cause dangerous han-dling characteristics resulting inloss of control.

� Four–wheel drive models:Do not use tires of different brands,sizes, construction or tread pat-terns, as this may cause dangeroushandling characteristics resulting inloss of control.

Toyota recommends all four tires, or atleast both front or rear tires be re-placed as a set.

See “If you have a flat tire” on page 283in Section 4 for tire change procedure.

When a tire is replaced, the wheelshould always be balanced.

An unbalanced wheel may affect vehiclehandling and tire life. Wheels can get outof balance with regular use and shouldtherefore be balanced occasionally.

When replacing a tubeless tire, the airvalve should also be replaced with anew one.

To equalize the wear and help extendtire life, Toyota recommends that yourotate your tires according to the main-tenance schedule. (For scheduled main-tenance information, please refer to the“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.) Howev-er, the most appropriate timing for tirerotation may vary according to yourdriving habits and road surface condi-tions.

See “If you have a flat tire” on page 283in Section 4 for tire change procedure.

Rotating tires

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

335


When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear is usu-ally caused by incorrect tire pressure, im-proper wheel alignment, out–of–balancewheels, or severe braking.

WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES ORCHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommendedwhen driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tiresprovide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select tires ofthe same size, construction and loadcapacity as the originally installed tires.Also, on four–wheel drive models, allthe tires must be the same brand andhave the same tread patterns.

Do not use tires other than those men-tioned above. Do not install studded tireswithout first checking local regulations forpossible restrictions.

CAUTION


� Do not use snow tires other thanthe manufacturer’s recommended si-ze, as this may cause dangeroushandling characteristics resulting inloss of control.

� Four–wheel drive models:Do not use snow tires of differentbrands, sizes, construction or treadpatterns, as this may cause danger-ous handling characteristics result-ing in loss of control.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on allwheels.

Installing snow tires on the front wheelsonly can lead to an excessive differencein road grip capability between the frontand rear tires which could cause loss ofvehicle control.

When storing removed tires, you shouldstore them in a cool dry place.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sureto install them in the same direction whenreplacing.

CAUTION

� Do not drive with the snow tiresincorrectly inflated.

� Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)with any type of snow tires.

Installing snow tires andchains

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

336


TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Use the tire chains of correct size.

Regulations regarding the use of tirechains vary according to location ortype of road, so always check the localregulations before installing chains.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the rear tires astightly as possible. Do not use tirechains on the front tires. Retightenchains after driving 0.5—1.0 km(1/4—1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care-fully follow the instructions of the chainmanufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will bescratched by the chain band, so removethe covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

� Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) orthe chain manufacturer’s recom-mended speed limit, whichever islower.

� Drive carefully avoiding bumps,holes, and sharp turns, which maycause the vehicle to bounce.

� Avoid sharp turns or locked–wheelbraking, as use of chains may ad-versely affect vehicle handling.

� When driving with chains installed,be sure to drive carefully. Slowdown before entering curves toavoid losing control of the vehicle.Otherwise an accident may occur.

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such asbending, cracks or heavy corrosion, thewheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,the tire may slip off the wheel or causeloss of handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should betaken to ensure that the wheels are re-placed by ones with the same load ca-pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

Correct replacement wheels are availableat your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type mayadversely affect handling, wheel and bear-ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-eter calibration, stopping ability, headlightaim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-ance, and tire or snow chain clearance tothe body and chassis.

Replacing wheels

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

337


Replacement with used wheels is not rec-ommended as they may have been sub-jected to rough treatment or high mileageand could fail without warning. Also, bentwheels which have been straightened mayhave structural damage and thereforeshould not be used. Never use an innertube in a leaking wheel which is designedfor a tubeless tire.

CAUTION


� Do not use wheels other than themanufacturer’s recommended size,as this may cause dangerous han-dling characteristics resulting inloss of control.

� Four–wheel drive models:Do not use wheels of differentbrands, sizes and types, as thismay cause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting in loss ofcontrol.

� When installing aluminum wheels,check that the wheel nuts are tightafter driving your vehicle the first 1600km (1000 miles).

� If you have rotated, repaired orchanged your tires, check that thewheel nuts are still tight after driving1600 km (1000 miles).

� When using tire chains, be careful notto damage the aluminum wheels.

� Use only the Toyota wheel nuts andwrench designed for your aluminumwheels.

� When balancing your wheels, use onlyToyota balance weights or equivalentand a plastic or rubber hammer.

� As with any wheel, periodically checkyour aluminum wheels for damage. Ifdamaged, replace immediately.

Aluminum wheel precautions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

338


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

339


DO–IT–YOURSELF MAINTENANCEElectrical componentsChecking battery condition 340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery recharging precautions 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing fuses 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding washer fluid 343. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing light bulbs 344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7– 3

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

340


CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable andexplosive hydrogen gas.

� Do not cause a spark from the bat-tery with tools.

� Do not smoke or light a match nearthe battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonousand corrosive sulfuric acid.

� Avoid contact with eyes, skin orclothes.

� Never ingest electrolyte.

� Wear protective safety glasses whenworking near the battery.

� Keep children away from the bat-tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

� If electrolyte gets in your eyes,flush your eyes with clean waterimmediately and get immediatemedical attention. If possible, con-tinue to apply water with a spongeor cloth while en route to the medi-cal office.

� If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contact area. Ifyou feel pain or burning, get medi-cal attention immediately.

� If electrolyte gets on your clothes,there is a possibility of its soakingthrough to your skin, so immediate-ly take off the exposed clothing andfollow the procedure above, if nec-essary.

� If you accidentally swallow electro-lyte, drink a large quantity of wateror milk. Follow with milk of magne-sia, beaten raw egg or vegetableoil. Then go immediately for emer-gency help.


Terminals

Hold–downclamp

Ground cable

Check the battery for corroded or looseterminal connections, cracks, or loosehold–down clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it offwith a solution of warm water and bak-ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-nals with grease to prevent further cor-rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose,tighten their clamp nuts—but do notovertighten.

c. Tighten the hold–down clamp onlyenough to keep the battery firmly inplace. Overtightening may damage thebattery case.

Checking battery c ondition——Precautions —Checking battery exterior

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

341


NOTICE

� Be sure the engine and all accesso-ries are off before performing main-tenance.

� When checking the battery, removethe ground cable from the negativeterminal (“–” mark) first and rein-stall it last.

� Be careful not to cause a short cir-cuit with tools.

� Take care no solution gets into thebattery when washing it.

If the battery is disconnected or rundown, the power window, power back win-dow and moon roof may not operate auto-matically and the jam protection functionwill not function correctly, and does notopen the back door after you reconnect,replace or recharge the battery. In any ofthese cases, you should normalize thepower window, power back window, backdoor and moon roof. To normalize them,see “Power windows” on page 23, “Powerback window” on page 26, “Back door” onpage 29 and “Electric moon roof” on page35 in Section 1–2.

Type A

Type B

Green DarkClear or lightyellow

Blue White Red

CHECKING BY INDICATOR

Check the battery condition by the indi-cator color.

Indicator colorCondition

Type A Type BCondition

Green Blue Good

Dark White

Charging necessary.Have batterychecked by yourToyota dealer.

Clear orlight

yellowRed

Have batterychecked by yourToyota dealer.

During recharging, the battery is pro-ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installedon the vehicle, be sure to disconnectthe ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the re-charger is off when connecting thecharger cables to the battery and whendisconnecting them.

CAUTION

� Always charge the battery in an un-confined area. Do not charge thebattery in a garage or closed roomwhere there is not sufficient ventila-tion.

� Only do a slow charge (5 A orless). Charging at a quicker rate isdangerous. The battery may ex-plode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while theengine is running. Also, be sure allaccessories are turned off.

—Checking battery c ondition Battery recharging pr ecautions

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

342


Type A

Type B

Type C

Good Blown

Good

Good

Blown

Blown

If the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work, check thefuses. If any of the fuses are blown,they must be replaced.

See “Fuse locations” on page 318 in Sec-tion 7–1 for locations of the fuses.

Turn the ignition switch and inoperativecomponent off. Pull a suspected fusestraight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing theproblem. The lid of the fuse box showsthe name of the circuit for each fuse. Seepage 356 in Section 8 of this manual forthe functions controlled by each circuit.

Type A fuses can be pulled out by usingthe pull–out tool. The location of the pull–out tool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse hasblown, try replacing the suspected fusewith one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuseinto the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in anemergency you can pull out the “PWROUTLET” or “HEATER NO.2” fuse, whichmay be dispensable for normal driving,and use it if its amperage rating is thesame.

If you cannot use one of the same amper-age, use one that is lower, but as closeas possible to the rating. If the amperageis lower than that specified, the fusemight blow out again but this does notindicate anything wrong. Be sure to getthe correct fuse as soon as possible andreturn the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set ofspare fuses and keep them in your ve-hicle for emergencies.

Checking and replacing fuses

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

343


If the new fuse immediately blows out,there is a problem with the electrical sys-tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it assoon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am-perage rating, or any other object, inplace of a fuse. This may cause ex-tensive damage and possibly a fire.

If any washer does not work, the wash-er tank may be empty. Check the wash-er fluid level on the level gauge. If thewasher fluid level is below “LOW” oronly slightly above the “LOW” level,add washer fluid.

For vehicles sold in Canada—If any washer does not work or lowwindshield washer fluid level warninglight comes on, the washer tank may beempty. Add washer fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.However, in cold areas where tempera-tures range below freezing point, usewasher fluid containing antifreeze. Thisproduct is available at your Toyota dealerand most auto parts stores. Follow themanufacturer’s directions for how much tomix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Adding washer fluid

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

344


The following illustrations show how togain access to the bulbs. When replacinga bulb, make sure the ignition switch andlight switch are off. Use bulbs with thewattage ratings given in the table.

CAUTION

� To prevent burning yourself, do notreplace the light bulbs while theyare hot.

� Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and require special handling.They can burst or shatter ifscratched or dropped. Hold a bulbonly by its plastic or metal case.Do not touch the glass part of abulb with bare hands.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

The inside of the lens of exterior lightssuch as headlights may temporarily fog upwhen the lens becomes wet in the rain orin a car wash. This is not a problembecause the fogging is caused by thetemperature difference between the outsideand inside of the lens, just like thewindshield fogged up in the rain. However,if there is a large drop of water on theinside of the lens, or if there is waterpooled inside the light, contact yourToyota dealer.

Replacing light bulbs—

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

345


A: HB3 halogen bulbs B: HB4 halogen bulbsC: Wedge base bulbs (clear)D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)E: Double end bulbs

9005

TypeWBulb No.Light bulbs

Headlights (high beam)

Headlights (high and low beams)

Front fog lights

Parking and front side marker lights

Front turn signal lights (without daytime running light system)

Front turn signal lights (with daytime running light system)

Rear turn signal lights

Stop/tail and rear side marker lights

Back–up lights

License plate lights

High mounted stoplight

Interior light

Personal lights

Vanity lights

Door courtesy lights

Glove box light

Luggage compartment light

Running board lights

9006

9006

168

—

—

—

—

921

—

—

—

—

—

921

168

—

4157NAK

60

51

51

5

21

27/8

21

21/5

16

5

16

8

5

3

3.8

1.2

8

3.8

A

B

B

D

D

D

D

C

C

C

C

E

C

E

C

C

E

C

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

346


Low beam(outside)

High beam(inside)

1. Turn the bulb base counterclockwiseto the front of the vehicle as shown.

2. Unplug the connector while depress-ing the lock release.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

3. Install a new bulb and connectorinto the mounting hole and turnthem clockwise to the front of thevehicle.

Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

—Headlights

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

347


1. Turn the bulb base counterclockwiseto the front of the vehicle as shown.

2. Unplug the connector while depress-ing the lock release.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

3. Install a new bulb and connectorinto the mounting hole and turnthem clockwise to the front of thevehicle.

—Front fog lights

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

348


Use a flat–bladed screwdriver which iswrapped with a cloth.

—Parking and front sidemarker lights —Front turn signal lights

—Rear turn signal, stop/tail,rear side marker and back–uplights

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

349


a: Rear turn signal lightb: Stop/tail and rear side marker lightc: Back–up light

Use a Phillips–head screwdriver.

Clips

Disconnect the clips by using a flat–bladed screwdriver which is wrapped witha cloth.

—License plate lights —High mounted stoplight

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

350


Check one: ■■ Same owner, name and/or address has changed ■■ New owner, purchased vehicle used

■■ Same owner, additional driver who should receive product/safety updates

■■ Mr. ■■ Mrs. ■■ Ms. ■■ Miss ■■ Dr.

Owner Information Change Form

EVV

First name M.I. Last name

Company name

Street address or P.O. Box Apt. or suite number

City State Zip code

Home phone number Work phone number Extension

Vehicle Identification Number (required to process change) Mo. Day Year

–

– – – –

– –

/ /

Check here if address belowis for company

■■

This information is obtained solely for the use of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.Toyota occasionally sends special promotional offers to registered owners. Check here if you prefer not to receive these offers. ■■

/

Effective date ofthis information

Social Security Number(optional; for Toyota customer reference only) 20

0300452-02003-REV1 Printed in U.S.A. 11/02w

ww

.toy

ota.

com Owner’s

Warranty

Information

If your name

or address has

changed or you

purchased your

Toyota as a used

vehicle, please

complete and

mail the attached

card, even if your

warranty coverage

has expired. This

will enable Toyota

to contact you

with important

product or safety

updates concern-

ing your vehicle.

If the card is no

longer attached,

please call the

Toyota Customer

Assistance Center at

(800) 331-4331.

1

Table of Contents

Introduction

Satisfaction Down the Road 2

Transportation Assistance 3

If You Need Assistance 4

Warranty Coverages at a Glance 6

Your Warranties in Detail

General Warranty Provisions 7

New Vehicle Limited Warranty 9

Federal Emission Control Warranty 14

California Emission Control Warranty 20

Tire Limited Warranty 26

Your Responsibilities

Operation and Maintenance 27

Obtaining Warranty Service 29

t Toyota, our top priority is always our customers. We knowyour Toyota is an important part of your life and something youdepend on every day. That’s why we’re dedicated to building

products of the highest quality and reliability.

Our excellent warranty coverage is evidence that we stand behind thequality of our vehicles. We’re confident — as you should be — that yourToyota will provide you with many years of enjoyable driving.

To further demonstrate our commitment to our customers’ satisfaction,occasionally we may establish a special policy adjustment to pay for spe-cific repairs that are no longer covered by warranty. When we establishsuch a policy adjustment, we mail details to all applicable owners wehave on record. That’s why it’s important to send in the card at the backof this booklet if you change your address or if you’ve purchased thisvehicle from a previous owner.

To provide you with added protection against unexpected service costs,we offer Toyota Extra Care vehicle service agreements and Toyota AutoCare pre-paid maintenance programs. Both offer plans to meet a wide

variety of needs. Your dealership can help you select the plan that’s bestfor you.

Our goal is for every Toyota customer to enjoy outstanding quality,dependability and peace of mind throughout their ownership experi-ence. We want you to be a satisfied member of the Toyota family formany miles to come.

This booklet describes the terms of Toyota warranty coverage as well as general owner responsibilities. A separate publication found in your glove box, the Scheduled Maintenance Guide,describes your vehicle’s maintenance requirements. Be sure toreview this publication carefully, since proper maintenance isrequired to ensure that warranty coverage remains intact.

All information in this booklet is the latest available at the time of pub-lication and, with the exception of the emission control warranties, issubject to change without notice.

A

Introduction2

Satisfaction Down the Road

e realize that your confidence in the quality and reliability of our products was a key factor in your decision to buy aToyota. We also know how disruptive the loss of transportation

can be to your daily routine. That’s why we’re pleased to offer you thebenefits of our Transportation Assistance Policy.

Under this policy, you are eligible for transportation assistance if yourToyota must be kept overnight for warranty-covered repairs. The policyapplies when your vehicle must be kept overnight for any of the follow-ing reasons:

• The warranty repairs will take longer than one day to complete.

• The warrantable condition requires extensive diagnosis.

• The parts needed for the warranty repairs are not readily availableand your vehicle is inoperative or unsafe to drive.

The policy does not apply when warranty repairs can be completed in one day but the vehicle must be kept overnight due to dealer orowner scheduling conflicts.

The Transportation Assistance Policy applies for the duration of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. The policy applies to all 2003 model-yearToyotas sold and serviced by authorized Toyota dealerships in the mainland United States and Alaska.

For further details, please consult your Toyota dealer.

W

Introduction 3

Transportation Assistance

Both Toyota and your Toyota dealer are dedicated to serving yourautomotive needs. Your complete satisfaction is our first priority. Shouldyou have a problem or concern — either during or after the warrantyperiod — please take the following steps to ensure the quickest possibleresponse:

Step 1Discuss the situation with a dealership manager, such as the servicemanager or customer relations manager. In most cases, a satisfactorysolution can be reached at this step.

Step 2If the dealership does not address your concern to your satisfaction, call the Toyota Customer Assistance Center at (800)331–4331. If you are hearing- or speech-impaired, call (800)443-4999 (TDD).

Please have the following information ready when you call:

• Your Toyota’s vehicle identification number (located on the driver’s side corner of the dashboard, under the window)

• Current mileage on your vehicle

• Name of your Toyota dealership

A Toyota customer relations representative will assist you in working with the dealership to find a satisfactory solution.

Step 3If your concern has still not been resolved to your satisfaction, Toyotaoffers additional assistance through the Dispute Settlement Program, a dispute resolution program administered by the National Center forDispute Settlement. The purpose of the Dispute Settlement Program is to resolve disputes through arbitration — a process by which two parties authorize an independent third party to hear and resolve a dis-pute. The program is informal and free of charge. To request that your

If You Need Assistance

Introduction4

case be reviewed through the program, complete the customer claimform in the Owner's Warranty Rights Notification booklet (found in yourglove box) and mail it to:

National Center for Dispute SettlementP.O. Box 561109Dallas, TX 75356-1109

If you would like to request a customer claim form, call the ToyotaCustomer Assistance Center at (800)331-4331. When you call, pleasehave your vehicle identification number, the current mileage on yourToyota and the names of your selling and servicing dealerships.

Important: You must use the Dispute Settlement Program before seekingremedies through a court action pursuant to the Magnuson-MossWarranty Act. You may also be required to use the Dispute SettlementProgram before seeking remedies under the “Lemon Laws” of your state.Please check the appropriate page of the Owner’s Warranty RightsNotification booklet for the requirements applicable to your state.

This information about the Dispute Settlement Program is correctas of the date of printing. However, the program may be changedwithout notice. For the most current information about the DisputeSettlement Program, call the Toyota Customer Assistance Center at(800)331-4331.

Introduction 5

If You Need Assistance

10 months

months

20 30 40 50 60 70 80

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

36 months / 36,000 miles



60 months / Unlimited miles

Basic

Powertrain

Restraint Systems

Corrosion Perforation

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emission Control Warranty


1 Specific components may have longer coverage under terms of the Powertrain Warranty.

36 months / 36,000 miles1




36 months / 50,000 miles1


PerformanceSpecific Components

DefectSpecific Components

Performance

Short-Term Defect

Long-Term Defect

Fede

ral

Calif

orni

a2,3

2 Also applies to Massachusetts and Vermont vehicles equipped with a California Certified Emission Control System. Vehicles covered by this warranty are also covered by the Federal Emission Control Warranty.

3 For 4-cylinder Camry models certified as partial zero-emission vehicles (PZEV), if any, coverage is 15 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

Introduction6

Warranty Coverages at a Glance

Who Is the WarrantorThe warrantor for these limited warranties is Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,Inc. (“Toyota”), 19001 South Western Avenue, Torrance, California90509-2991, a California corporation.

Which Vehicles Are CoveredThese warranties apply to all 2003 model-year vehicles registered andnormally operated in the United States, U.S. territories and Canada.Warranty coverage is automatically transferred at no cost to subsequentvehicle owners.

Multiple Warranty ConditionsThis booklet contains warranty terms and conditions that may varydepending on the part covered. A warranty for specific parts or systems,such as the Powertrain Warranty or Emission Performance Warranty, isgoverned by the coverage set forth in that warranty as well as theGeneral Warranty Provisions.

When Warranty BeginsThe warranty period begins on the vehicle’s in-service date, which is thefirst date the vehicle is either delivered to an ultimate purchaser, leased,or used as a company car or demonstrator.

Repairs Made at No ChargeRepairs and adjustments covered by these warranties are made at nocharge for parts and labor.

Parts ReplacementAny needed parts replacement will be made using new or remanufac-tured parts. The decision whether a part should be repaired or replacedwill be made by the servicing Toyota dealership and/or Toyota. Partsscheduled to be replaced as required maintenance are warranted untiltheir first replacement only.

Your Warranties in Detail 7

General Warranty Provisions

LimitationsThe performance of necessary repairs and adjustments is the exclusiveremedy under these warranties or any implied warranties. Toyota doesnot authorize any person to create for it any other obligation or liabilityin connection with this vehicle.

Any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particularpurpose is limited to the duration of these written warranties.Some states do not allow restrictions on how long an implied warrantylasts, so this limitation may not apply to you.

Your Rights Under State LawThese warranties give you specific legal rights. You may also have otherrights that vary from state to state.

Your Warranties in Detail8

General Warranty Provisions

Basic WarrantyThis warranty covers repairs and adjustments needed to correct defects inmaterials or workmanship of any part supplied by Toyota, subject to theexceptions indicated under “What Is Not Covered” on pages 11–12.

Coverage is for 36 months or 36,000 miles, whichever occurs first, withthe exception of wheel alignment and wheel balancing, which are cov-ered for 12 months or 20,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

Powertrain WarrantyThis warranty covers repairs needed to correct defects in materials orworkmanship of any component listed in the next column and suppliedby Toyota, subject to the exceptions indicated under “What Is NotCovered” on pages 11–12.

Coverage is for 60 months or 60,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

EngineCylinder block and head and all internal parts, intake manifold, timinggears and gaskets, timing chain/belt and cover, flywheel, valve covers, oil pan, oil pump, engine mounts, turbocharger housing and all internalparts, supercharger housing and all internal parts, engine control com-puter, water pump, fuel pump, seals and gaskets.

Transmission and TransaxleCase and all internal parts, torque converter, clutch cover, transmissionmounts, transfer case and all internal parts, engine control computer,seals and gaskets.

Front-Wheel-Drive SystemFinal drive housing and all internal parts, axle shafts, drive shafts, constant velocity joints, front hub and bearings, seals and gaskets.

Rear-Wheel-Drive SystemAxle housing and all internal parts, propeller shafts, U-joints, axleshafts, drive shafts, bearings, supports, seals and gaskets.

WHAT IS COVERED AND HOW LONG



Corrosion Perforation WarrantyThis warranty covers repair or replacement of any original body panelthat develops perforation from corrosion (rust-through), subject to theexceptions indicated under “What Is Not Covered” on pages 11–12.

Coverage is for 60 months, regardless of mileage.

For information on how to protect your vehicle from corrosion, see thesection entitled “Corrosion Prevention and Appearance Care” in theOwner’s Manual.

Restraint Systems WarrantyThis warranty covers repairs needed to correct defects in materials orworkmanship of any seatbelt or air bag system supplied by Toyota, subject to the exceptions indicated under “What Is Not Covered” onpages 11–12.

Coverage is for 60 months or 60,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

For vehicles sold and registered in the state of Kansas, the warranty forseatbelts and related components is 10 years, regardless of mileage.

TowingWhen your vehicle is inoperable due to failure of a warranted part, towing service to the nearest authorized Toyota dealership is covered.



This warranty does not cover damage or failures resulting directly orindirectly from any of the following:

• Fire, accidents or theft

• Abuse or negligence

• Misuse — for example, racing or overloading

• Improper repairs

• Alteration or tampering, including installation of non-Genuine Toyota Accessories

• Lack of or improper maintenance, including use of fluids otherthan those specified in the Owner’s Manual

• Installation of non-Genuine Toyota Parts

• Airborne chemicals, tree sap, road debris (including stone chips), rail dust, salt, hail, floods, wind storms, lightning and otherenvironmental conditions

• Water contamination

This warranty also does not cover the following:

Tires

Tires are covered by a separate warranty provided by the tire manufac-turer. See page 26.

Normal Wear and TearNoise, vibration, cosmetic conditions and other deterioration caused bynormal wear and tear.

Maintenance ExpenseNormal maintenance services such as:

• Engine tune-ups

• Replacement of fluids and filters

• Lubrication

• Cleaning and polishing

• Replacement of spark plugs and fuses

• Replacement of worn wiper blades, brake pads/linings and clutch linings

WHAT IS NOT COVERED



Maintenance ExpenseNormal maintenance services such as:

• Engine tune-ups

• Replacement of fluids and filters

• Lubrication

• Cleaning and polishing

• Replacement of spark plugs and fuses

• Replacement of worn wiper blades, brake pads/linings and clutch linings

Noise, vibration, cosmetic conditions and other deterioration caused bynormal wear and tear.

Normal Wear and Tear

Tires are covered by a separate warranty provided by the tire manufac-turer. See page 26.

Vehicles With Altered OdometerFailure of a vehicle on which the odometer has been altered so thatactual vehicle mileage cannot be readily determined.

Salvage or Total-Loss VehiclesAny vehicle that has ever been issued a “salvage” title or similar titleunder any state’s law; or has ever been declared a “total loss” or equiva-lent by a financial institution or insurer, such as by payment for a claim inlieu of repairs because the cost of repairs exceeded the cash value of thevehicle. This exclusion does not apply to the emission control warranties.

Incidental DamagesIncidental or consequential damages associated with a vehicle failure.Such damages include but are not limited to inconvenience; the cost oftransportation, telephone calls and lodging; the loss of personal or com-mercial property; and the loss of pay or revenue.

Disclaimer of Extra Expenses and DamagesThe performance of necessary repairs and adjustments is the exclu-sive remedy under this warranty or any implied warranty. Toyotadoes not authorize any person to create for it any other obligationor liability in connection with this vehicle. Toyota shall not be liablefor incidental or consequential damages resulting from breach ofthis written warranty or any implied warranty. Any implied war-ranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose is limitedto the duration of this written warranty, except in states where thislimitation is not allowed.



If a dispute arises regarding your warranty coverage, please follow thesteps described under “If You Need Assistance” on pages 4–5. Pleasenote that you must use the Dispute Settlement Program before seekingremedies through a court action pursuant to the Magnuson-MossWarranty Act. You may also be required to use the Dispute SettlementProgram before seeking remedies under the “Lemon Laws” of your state.Please check the appropriate page of the Owner’s Warranty RightsNotification booklet (located in your glove box) for the requirementsapplicable to your state.



DISPUTE RESOLUTION

Emission Defect WarrantyToyota warrants that your vehicle:

• Was designed, built and equipped to conform at the time of sale withapplicable federal emissions standards.

• Is free from defects in materials and workmanship that may cause thevehicle to fail to meet these standards.

Federal regulations require that this warranty be in effect for two years or 24,000 miles from the vehicle’s in-service date, whichever occursfirst. However, under the terms of the Basic Warranty, Toyota providescoverage of three years or 36,000 miles, whichever occurs first. Speci-fic components may have longer coverage under the terms of thePowertrain Warranty. Additionally, components marked “8/80” in theparts list on pages 15–16 have coverage of eight years or 80,000 miles,whichever occurs first.

Emission Performance WarrantySome states and localities have established vehicle inspection and main-tenance (I/M) programs to encourage proper vehicle maintenance. If anEPA-approved I/M program is in force in your area, you are eligible forEmission Performance Warranty coverage.

Under the terms of the Emission Performance Warranty and federal regulations, Toyota will make all necessary repairs if both of the following occur:

• Your vehicle fails to meet applicable emissions standards as determined by an EPA-approved emissions test.

• This failure results or will result in some penalty to you — such as a fine or denial of the right to use your vehicle — under local, state or federal law.

This warranty is in effect for two years or 24,000 miles from the vehicle’sin-service date, whichever occurs first. Additionally, components marked“8/80” in the parts list on pages 15–16 have coverage of eight years or80,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

WHAT IS COVERED AND HOW LONG


Federal Emission Control Warranty

These warranty obligations do not apply to failures or non-compliancecaused by:

• The use of replacement parts not certified in accordance with aftermarket parts certification regulations.

• The use of replacement parts not equivalent in quality or design to original equipment parts.

Provisions under the “What Is Not Covered” section of the New VehicleLimited Warranty also apply to this warranty.

Air/Fuel Metering System• Air/fuel ratio feedback control system

• Cold-start enrichment system

• Deceleration control system

• Electronic fuel injection system components— Airflow sensor— Engine control module (8/80)— Throttle body— Other components

Air Induction System• Intake manifold and intake air surge tank

Catalyst System• Catalytic converter and protector (8/80)

• Constricted fuel filler neck

• Exhaust manifold

• Exhaust pipe (manifold to catalyst and/or catalyst to catalyst)

WHAT IS NOT COVERED WARRANTY PARTS LIST

8/80 = Covered for eight years or 80,000 miles, whichever occurs first.



*

Evaporative Control System• Charcoal canister

• Diaphragm valve

• Fuel filler cap

• Fuel tank

• Vapor liquid separator

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System• EGR gas temperature sensor

• EGR valve

• Associated parts

Ignition System• Distributor and internal parts

• Ignition coil and ignitor

• Ignition wires

• Spark plugs*

Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System• Oil filler cap

• PCV valve or orifice

Other Parts Used in Above Systems• Data link connector (8/80)

• Hoses, clamps, fittings, tubing and mounting hardware

• Malfunction indicator light and bulb (8/80)

• Pulleys, belts and idlers

• Sealing gaskets and devices

• Sensors, switches and valves

Warranted until first required maintenance under terms of theCalifornia Emission Control Warranty.

8/80 = Covered for eight years or 80,000 miles, whichever occurs first.



You are responsible for performance of the required maintenance indi-cated in the Owner’s Manual and the Scheduled Maintenance Guide.Toyota will not deny a warranty claim solely because you do not haverecords to show that you maintained your vehicle. However, any failureor noncompliance caused by lack of maintenance is not covered by thiswarranty.

When maintenance and repairs are paid for by you, these servicesmay be performed by you or by any automotive service provider youchoose. Toyota will not deny a warranty claim simply because youused a service provider other than a Toyota dealership for mainte-nance and repairs. However, any failure or non-compliance caused byimproper maintenance or repairs is not covered by this warranty.

To ensure optimum performance and maintain the quality built intoyour vehicle’s emission control systems, Toyota recommends the use ofGenuine Toyota Parts when servicing or repairing the systems.

Warranty coverage is not dependent upon the use of any particularbrand of replacement parts and you may elect to use non–GenuineToyota Parts for maintenance and repairs. However, use of replace-ment parts that are not equivalent in quality to Genuine ToyotaParts may impair the effectiveness of the emission control systems.

If you use replacement parts that have maintenance or replacementschedules different from those of Genuine Toyota Parts, you must followthe maintenance and replacement schedules for the parts you are using.In addition, you should ensure that such parts are warranted by theirmanufacturers to be equivalent to Genuine Toyota Parts.

MAINTENANCE REPLACEMENT PARTS



If your vehicle fails an EPA-approved emissions test, you may make aclaim under the Emission Performance Warranty. To do so, take yourvehicle to an authorized Toyota dealership and present a copy of theemissions test report. Also, take your maintenance records in case theyare needed.

If your claim qualifies for coverage, the dealership will repair your vehi-cle within 30 days (unless a shorter period is required by law). If yourclaim is denied, Toyota will notify you in writing of the reason within the same period. If we fail to do so, we will repair your vehicle free ofcharge. The only exceptions allowed are when you request or agree to adelay, or a delay is caused by factors beyond the control of Toyota or thedealership.

For information on how to obtain service under the Emission DefectWarranty, see page 29, “Obtaining Warranty Service.”

If you have questions or concerns about your vehicle’s federal emissionwarranty coverage, please follow the steps described under “If You NeedAssistance” on pages 4–5. In the case of the Emission PerformanceWarranty, you may also request information from or report complaints to:

U.S. Environmental Protection AgencyVehicle Programs & Compliance Division (6405J)Attn: Warranty Complaints401 M Street SWWashington, D.C. 20460

Vehicles equipped with a California Certified Emission Control Systemthat are registered and operated in California or any state thatadopts California emission warranty provisions are also covered bythe California Emission Control Warranty (see page 20). Currently,Massachusetts and Vermont are the only other states to which theCalifornia Emission Control Warranty applies.

IF YOUR VEHICLE FAILS AN EMISSIONS TEST IF YOU HAVE QUESTIONS



We (the dealership) want you to know that at the time your new Toyotavehicle is being delivered:

1) On the basis of written notification furnished by Toyota, we haveknowledge that the vehicle is covered by an EPA Certificate ofConformity.

2) We have visually inspected those emission control devices or portionsthereof that are visible without removing or adjusting any compo-nents or systems, emissions-related or otherwise. On the basis of thisinspection, there are no apparent deficiencies in the installation ofemission control devices by Toyota. (For purposes of this certificate,“emission control devices” is limited to devices installed on a vehiclefor the sole or primary purpose of controlling emissions and whichwere not in general use before 1968.)

3) We have performed all emission control system preparations requiredby Toyota prior to the sale of the vehicle as set forth in Toyota’s cur-rent pre-delivery service manual.

4) Except as may be provided in Paragraph 5, if this vehicle fails an EPA-approved emissions test within three months or 4,000 miles(whichever comes first) of delivery to the ultimate purchaser, and thevehicle has been maintained and used in accordance with the writ-ten instructions for proper maintenance and use, Toyota will remedy

the non-conformity free of charge under the terms of the EmissionPerformance Warranty.

5) If vehicle was used as a company car or demonstrator, check box andcomplete the following:

□ The vehicle with which this statement is delivered was placed into service as a company car or demonstrator prior to delivery.The Emission Performance Warranty period commenced on thedate the vehicle was first placed into service, which was:

Month Day Year

Note: The dealership makes no representation or warranty that theemission control system or any part thereof is without defect or thatthe system will perform properly. The Emission Performance Warrantyreferred to in Paragraph 4 and furnished with the vehicle is solely thatof the manufacturer.

This statement is required by section 207 of the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C.7541) and the EPA regulations issued thereunder.

Dealership Name

DEALER CERTIFICATE



The California Air Resources Board (CARB) and Toyota are pleased toexplain the emission control system warranty for your 2003 vehicle. InCalifornia, new motor vehicles must be designed, built and equipped tomeet the state’s stringent anti-smog standards. CARB regulations requirethat Toyota must warrant the emission control system on your vehicle forthe time periods indicated on this page, provided there has been noabuse, neglect or improper maintenance of your vehicle.

Your emission control system may include parts such as the fuel injectionsystem, ignition system, catalytic converter and engine computer. Alsoincluded may be hoses, belts, connectors and other emissions-relatedassemblies.

Where a warrantable condition exists, Toyota will repair your vehicle atno cost to you, including diagnosis, parts and labor.

1) For three years or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first:*

• If your vehicle fails a smog-check test, all necessary repairs andadjustments will be made by Toyota to ensure that your vehiclepasses the test. This is your Emission Control System PERFORMANCEWARRANTY.

• If any emissions-related part on your vehicle is defective, the partwill be repaired or replaced by Toyota. This is your SHORT-TERMEmission Control System DEFECT WARRANTY. Covered parts are listedon pages 15–16. Specific components may have longer coverageunder the terms of the Powertrain Warranty.

2) For seven years or 70,000 miles, whichever occurs first:*

• If an emissions-related part listed on pages 22—23 is defective, the part will be repaired or replaced by Toyota. This is yourLONG-TERM Emission Control System DEFECT WARRANTY.

YOUR WARRANTY RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS

MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY COVERAGE


California Emission Control Warranty

* For 4-cylinder Camry models certified as partial zero-emission vehicles (PZEV),if any, coverage is 15 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

You are responsible for performance of the required maintenance indi-cated in the Owner’s Manual and the Scheduled Maintenance Guide.Toyota recommends that you retain all receipts covering maintenance onyour vehicle, but Toyota cannot deny warranty coverage solely for thelack of receipts or your failure to ensure the performance of all scheduledmaintenance.

You are responsible for presenting your vehicle to a Toyota dealership assoon as a problem exists. The warranty repairs should be completed in areasonable amount of time, not to exceed 30 days.

You should also be aware that Toyota may deny you warranty coverage ifyour vehicle or a part has failed due to abuse, neglect, improper main-tenance or unapproved modifications.

If you have any questions regarding your warranty rights and responsi-bilities, you should contact the Toyota Customer Assistance Center at(800)331-4331 or the California Air Resources Board, Mobile SourceControl Division, at 9528 Telstar Avenue, P.O. Box 8001, El Monte, CA91734-8001.

These warranty obligations do not apply to failures or noncompliancecaused by:

• The use of replacement parts not certified in accordance with aftermarket parts certification regulations.

• The use of replacement parts not equivalent in quality or design tooriginal equipment parts.

Provisions under the “What Is Not Covered” section of the New VehicleLimited Warranty also apply to this warranty.

OWNER’S WARRANTY RESPONSIBILITIES WHAT IS NOT COVERED



The parts listed here are covered for seven years or 70,000 miles fromthe vehicle’s in-service date, whichever occurs first.

Air/Fuel Metering System• Air-fuel ratio sensor on Highlander

• Engine control computer (engine control module)

• Fuel pump on Sienna

• Mass air flow sensor on Tacoma equipped with 2RZ-FE and 3RZ-FE

• Throttle body

Air Induction System• Intake manifold and intake air surge tank

• Intake manifold gasket on MR2 Spyder

Catalyst System• Catalytic converter (warm-up three-way catalyst)

• Exhaust center pipe on Avalon, Corolla Matrix 4WD, Highlanderequipped with 1MZ-FE, Tacoma and Tundra equipped with 5VZ-FE

• Exhaust front pipe on Avalon, Camry, Camry Solara, Celica, Corolla,Corolla Matrix 2WD, ECHO, Highlander equipped with 1MZ-FE, LandCruiser, MR2 Spyder, Sequoia, Sienna, Tacoma, Tundra and 4Runner

• Exhaust manifold on Avalon, Camry, Camry Solara, Highlander, LandCruiser, MR2 Spyder, RAV4, Sequoia, Sienna, Tundra equipped with2UZ-FE and 4Runner

• Exhaust manifold gasket on Land Cruiser, Sequoia, Tundra equippedwith 2UZ-FE and 4Runner

• Right exhaust manifold gasket on Sienna and on Avalon, Camry,Camry Solara and Highlander models equipped with 1MZ-FE



PARTS LIST: LONG-TERM EMISSION DEFECT WARRANTY

Evaporative Control System• Charcoal canister on Highlander, Land Cruiser and 4Runner

• Fuel tank

Ignition System• Knock sensor on Land Cruiser, MR2 Spyder, Sequoia, Tacoma

equipped with 5VZ-FE, Tundra and 4Runner

You are responsible for performance of the required maintenance indi-cated in the Owner’s Manual and the Scheduled Maintenance Guide.Toyota will not deny a warranty claim solely because you do not haverecords to show that you maintained your vehicle. However, any failureor noncompliance caused by lack of maintenance is not covered by thiswarranty.

When maintenance and repairs are paid for by you, these servicesmay be performed by you or by any automotive service provider youchoose. Toyota will not deny a warranty claim simply because youused a service provider other than a Toyota dealership for mainte-nance and repairs. However, any failure or non-compliance caused byimproper maintenance or repairs is not covered by this warranty.

MAINTENANCE



To ensure optimum performance and maintain the quality built intoyour vehicle’s emission control systems, Toyota recommends the use ofGenuine Toyota Parts when servicing or repairing the systems.

Warranty coverage is not dependent upon the use of any particularbrand of replacement parts and you may elect to use non-GenuineToyota Parts for maintenance and repairs. However, use of replace–ment parts that are not equivalent in quality to Genuine ToyotaParts may impair the effectiveness of the emission control systems.

If you use replacement parts that have maintenance or replacementschedules different from those of Genuine Toyota Parts, you must followthe maintenance and replacement schedules for the parts you are using.In addition, you should ensure that such parts are warranted by theirmanufacturers to be equivalent to Genuine Toyota Parts.

If your vehicle fails a smog-check test, you may make a claim under theEmission Performance Warranty. To do so, take your vehicle to an autho-rized Toyota dealership and present a copy of the smog-check testreport. Also, take your maintenance records in case they are needed.

If your claim qualifies for coverage, the dealership will repair your vehi-cle within 30 days (unless a shorter period is required by law). If yourclaim is denied, Toyota will notify you in writing of the reason within the same period. If we fail to do so, we will repair your vehicle free ofcharge. The only exceptions allowed are when you request or agree to a delay, or a delay is caused by factors beyond the control of Toyota orthe dealership.

For information on how to obtain service under the Emission DefectWarranty, see page 29, “Obtaining Warranty Service.”

REPLACEMENT PARTS IF YOUR VEHICLE FAILS A SMOG-CHECK TEST



If a Toyota dealership is unable to complete repairs on your vehicle within 30 days, you may have the repairs made under Toyota’s provisions for emergency warranty repairs. See page 29 for details.

If you have questions or concerns about your vehicle’s California emis-sion warranty coverage, please follow the steps described under “If YouNeed Assistance” on pages 4–5. You may also request information fromor report complaints to:

California Air Resources BoardMobile Source Control Division9528 Telstar AvenueP.O. Box 8001El Monte, CA 91734-8001(800)242-4450

Vehicles equipped with a California Certified Emission Control Systemthat are registered and operated in California or any state thatadopts California emission warranty provisions are covered by thiswarranty. Currently, Massachusetts and Vermont are the only otherstates to which this warranty applies. Vehicles covered by this warranty are also covered by the Federal Emission Control Warranty(see page 14).

REPAIR DELAYS IF YOU HAVE QUESTIONS



OBTAINING WARRANTY SERVICE ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT TIRE MANUFACTURERS

The tires that come as original equipment on your vehicle are warrantedby their manufacturer and not Toyota. A separate warranty statement forthe tires is in your glove box.

To obtain service for a tire defect, take the tire to an authorized dealerof the tire manufacturer. (Refer to your local phone directory for dealerlocations.) Your Toyota dealer may also be able to assist you in obtainingwarranty service from the manufacturer.

For additional warranty information or service assistance, contact the tire manufacturer directly.


Tire Limited Warranty

Bridgestone/FirestoneOne Bridgestone ParkNashville, TN 37214(800)847-3272

Continental General Tire1800 Continental Blvd.Charlotte, NC 28273(800)847-3349

Goodyear Dunlop TiresNorth America, Ltd.P.O. Box 1109Buffalo, NY 14240(800)548-4714

Goodyear Tire and Rubber Co.1144 East Market StreetAkron, OH 44316(800)321-2136

Michelin/BFGoodrichP.O. Box 19001Greenville, SC 29602(800)847-3435

Toyo Tire (U.S.A.) Corporation6261 Katella Ave., Ste. 2BCypress, CA 90630(800)442-8696

Yokohama Tire Corporation601 South Acacia AvenueFullerton, CA 92831(800)722-9888

You are responsible for ensuring that your Toyota is operated and main-tained according to the instructions in the Owner’s Manual and theScheduled Maintenance Guide.

You should keep detailed records of vehicle maintenance, since undersome circumstances they may be required for warranty coverage. Theserecords should include date of service, mileage at time of service and adescription of service performed and/or parts installed. For your conve-nience, a maintenance log is included in the Scheduled MaintenanceGuide. If you sell your vehicle, you should give your maintenance recordsto the new owner.

Toyota will not deny a warranty claim solely because you do not haverecords to show that you maintained your vehicle. However, damage orfailures caused by lack of proper maintenance are not covered underwarranty.

You may have maintenance performed on your vehicle by any qualifiedperson or facility. However, Toyota recommends having maintenanceperformed by an authorized Toyota dealership.

Toyota dealership technicians are specially trained to maintain and repairToyota vehicles. They stay current on the latest service informationthrough Toyota technical bulletins, service publications and trainingcourses. Many are also certified through the Toyota CertificationProgram, which involves a series of rigorous written examinations. Feelfree to ask any Toyota dealership to show you its technicians’ credentials.

You can be confident you’re getting the best possible service for yourvehicle when you take it to a Toyota dealership. Plus, a Toyota dealer-ship will always use Genuine Toyota Parts designed specifically for yourvehicle.

GENERAL INFORMATION WHERE TO GO FOR MAINTENANCE

Your Responsibilities 27

Operation and Maintenance

Warranty coverage is not dependent upon the use of any particularbrand of replacement parts. However, Toyota recommends using onlyGenuine Toyota Parts when you need to replace a part on your vehicle.Like all Toyota products, Genuine Toyota Parts are built to the higheststandards of quality, durability and performance. They are also designedto fit your vehicle’s exact specifications.

Your Toyota dealership maintains an extensive inventory of GenuineToyota Parts to meet your vehicle service needs. And because it is linkedelectronically to Toyota’s Parts Distribution Centers, the dealership hasquick access to any parts it may not have in stock.

Genuine Toyota Parts are covered by their own warranty (see your dealerfor details) or the remainder of any applicable New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, whichever is longer. Non–Genuine Toyota Parts, or anydamage or failures resulting from their use, are not covered by any Toyota warranty.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Your Responsibilities28

Operation and Maintenance

In the United States, U.S. Territories and CanadaTo obtain warranty service in the United States, U.S. territories or Canada,take your vehicle to an authorized Toyota dealership. If your vehicle cannot be driven, contact your nearest Toyota dealership for towingassistance. You do not have to pay for towing to the nearest Toyota deal-ership if your vehicle is inoperable due to failure of a warranted part.

Outside the United States, U.S. Territories and CanadaIf you are using your vehicle outside the United States, U.S. territoriesand Canada and need warranty service, contact a local Toyota dealer-ship. Please note, however, that your vehicle may not be repaired free of charge because the local Toyota distributor may have no obligation toprovide warranty service for your vehicle, and/or your vehicle may notcomply with local regulatory or environmental requirements.

If your vehicle is inoperable or unsafe to drive and there is no Toyotadealership reasonably available to make repairs, you may perform therepairs yourself or have them performed by another automotive serviceprovider. Toyota will reimburse you for any of the repairs that are cov-ered by warranty. To receive reimbursement, present to an authorizedToyota dealership your paid repair invoices and any parts that wereremoved from the vehicle. You will be reimbursed for warranted parts at the manufacturer’s suggested retail price and warranted labor at ageographically appropriate hourly rate multiplied by Toyota’s recom-mended time allowance for the repair.

If your vehicle requires emergency repair, Toyota assumes no liability for subsequent failures caused by improper repairs or the use of non-Genuine Toyota Parts unless you have the vehicle properly repaired in atimely manner. To ensure that warranty coverage remains intact, haveyour vehicle inspected by an authorized Toyota dealership as soon aspossible after an emergency repair.

Obtaining Warranty Service

Your Responsibilities 29

BY GEOGRAPHIC REGION EMERGENCY REPAIRS

Notes

30

Notes

31

Notes

32

Check one: ■■ Same owner, name and/or address has changed ■■ New owner, purchased vehicle used

■■ Same owner, additional driver who should receive product/safety updates

■■ Mr. ■■ Mrs. ■■ Ms. ■■ Miss ■■ Dr.

Owner Information Change Form

EVV

First name M.I. Last name

Company name

Street address or P.O. Box Apt. or suite number

City State Zip code

Home phone number Work phone number Extension

Vehicle Identification Number (required to process change) Mo. Day Year

–

– – – –

– –

/ /

Check here if address belowis for company

■■

This information is obtained solely for the use of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.Toyota occasionally sends special promotional offers to registered owners. Check here if you prefer not to receive these offers. ■■

/

Effective date ofthis information

Social Security Number(optional; for Toyota customer reference only)

If your name

or address has

changed or you

purchased your

Toyota as a used

vehicle, please

complete and

mail the attached

card, even if your

warranty coverage

has expired. This

will enable Toyota

to contact you

with important

product or safety

updates concern-

ing your vehicle.

If the card is no

longer attached,

please call the

Toyota Customer

Assistance Center at

(800) 331-4331.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

i


Foreword

Welcome to the growing group of value–conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering andquality construction of each vehicle we build.

This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupantsfollow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble–free motoring. Forimportant information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.

When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle best and is interested in your completesatisfaction. He will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.

If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:

� U.S. OWNERS: Toyota Customer Assistance Center Toll–free: 1–800–331–4331

� CANADIAN OWNERS: Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre Toll–free: 1–888–TOYOTA–8 (1–888–869–6828)

Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.

All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy ofcontinual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you mayfind some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

2003 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of ToyotaMotor Corporation.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

iii


Important information about your Toyota

New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limitedwarranties:

� New vehicle warranty

� Emission control systems warranty

� Others

For further information, please refer to the “Owner’sWarranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement”.

Your responsibility formaintenance

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the speci-fied maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details ofthese maintenance requirements. Also included in Section6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance in-formation, please refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Accessories, spare parts andmodification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non–genuine spare parts and accessoriesfor Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market.You should know that Toyota does not warrant these prod-ucts and is not responsible for their performance, repair, orreplacement, or for any damage they may cause to, oradverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non–genuineToyota products. Modification with non–genuine Toyotaproducts could affect its performance, safety or durability,and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi-tion, damage or performance problems resulting from themodification may not be covered under warranty.

Important Information About Your Toyota

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

iv


Spark ignition system of yourToyota

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all require-ments of the Canadian Interference–Causing EquipmentStandard.

Installation of a mobiletwo–way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two–way radio system inyour vehicle could affect electronic systems such as fol-lows, be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precau-tionary measures or special instructions regarding installa-tion.

� Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiportfuel injection system

� SRS airbag system

� Seat belt pretensioner system






� Rear height control air suspension

� Cruise control system


� Electronic throttle control system

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

v


Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in yourToyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle isscrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as theyare, it may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure tohave the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt preten-sioner removed and disposed of by a qualified serviceshop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of yourvehicle.

On–pavement and off–roaddriving tips

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utility ve-hicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than othertypes of vehicles. This vehicle will handle and maneuverdifferently from an ordinary passenger car because it isdesigned for off–road use also. In addition, this vehiclehas a higher ground clearance and center of gravity thanthat of an ordinary passenger car. This vehicle design fea-ture causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rol-lover. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result inloss of control, accidents or vehicle rollover causing deathor serious injury. Be sure to read “Off–road vehicle precau-tions” on page 242 in Section 2 and “Off–road driving pre-cautions” on page 263 in Section 3.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

vi


’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)

ii


Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam-age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully toavoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they areused in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may causeinjury to people if the warning is ignored. You areinformed about what you must or must not do inorder to reduce the risk of injury to yourself andothers.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may causedamage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warningis ignored. You are informed about what you must ormust not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk ofdamage to your vehicle and its equipment.

Important Information About This Manual

Safety symbol

When you see the safety symbolshown above, it means: “Do not...”;“Do not do this”; or “Do not let thishappen”.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)


Repair Manual Information

You should know as much about the quality and

importance of proper maintenance of your new

vehicle as the people who built it.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual

tells you how to maintain your vehicle and

enables you to correctly perform your own

maintenance.

The best way to keep your new vehicle in toprunning order is to maintain it properly fromthe moment you drive it off the showroomfloor.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual ispacked with literally everything you need toknow to perform your own maintenance invirtually every area of your new vehicle.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0 305)


Where to obtain the

Repair Manual

The repair manual for 4RUNNER, written in

English, may be purchased as applicable from

any Toyota dealer.

Pub. Name: 2003 4RUNNER Repair ManualPub. No.: RM1001U1

RM1001U2

RM1034U

Maintenance procedures for the engine,

chassis, body, electrical system, and more,

are clearly explained and illustrated.

Periodic maintenance and tune−up

Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to pre�vent small problems from growing into larger ones lat�er on. The repair manual outlines exactly what main�tenance is required and clearly explains how to do thework yourself step−by−step.

Areas covered include such things as spark plug re�placement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oiland filter replacement.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


Seat Belt Warning

WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU PLEASE BUCKLE UP

Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.

Toyota belts are:

� Comfortable

� Easy to use

� Convenient

We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

U

Documents

2003 Toyota 4Runner Owners Manual